Freedom and Fame

By  Lazette Gifford

Prelude

Abby and Tristan left the gray world behind, gladly turning their backs on everything they had found in this place. Liora had changed their lives, and Abby felt trepidation in that moment when they moved away, not just because they were heading for hell at last. They had grown apart—
I'm here, Abby. I've always been here.
Abby should have felt relief. Instead, he felt anxiety. He wanted to forget Liora. He wanted her out of his mind, out of his life and out of his thoughts—
"Let her go.” Tristan said it aloud this time, rather than just as words in his mind.
It was a strange whisper of sound in a place without time or distance, but through which they traveled in a line of wavering light. He looked back, not sure what he would see—Liora? Gix? Tabor?
"Abby?"
"I want to get away from this place. I'll even gladly go to hell to get away from it."
But he meant more a place in his mind than the world that had already faded behind them.
"Look ahead,” Tristan said. “Don't look back. There have been many we've left behind—don't let her be the one to bury the thoughts of other friends we'll never see again."
And they thought of others in that moment—Dacey, Brendan, Petra—dozens of people in so many places that he could not clearly remember them all.
And that gave him hope that he would forget her as well. He would let the grayness of Eliora's world melt into his memory, and be buried beneath the others. It would just take time.
And besides ... look ahead. They still had work to do, the battle nearly finished. He couldn't clearly see where the path led this time, but they moved forward toward the piece of the Kiya that drew them on.
"It twists, Abby,” Tristan said. He even stopped, which he had never done before. It made Abby nervous, standing here in this not-real place with magic and light moving around them. “It's as though—the piece doesn't lead us straight to hell. As though the piece we follow has moved."
"A trap,” Abby said.
"Oh, beyond a doubt. And perhaps something more. Perhaps Gix doesn't want you in his hell. That might be something to know. But we go somewhere else, Abby. I feel the piece of the Kiya turning aside."
To a new world, a different battle. To new people.
And could he trust them?
Even Tristan didn't answer.

Part One—The Cost of Freedom
Chapter 1

Kadrien walked through the center of the room, moving quickly across the antique inlaid floors. Ancient stones beneath his feet, ancient walls around him ... and none of it from this world. Oh no, they brought their old world with them when they came to build the new capital. Kadrien often wondered why, if they loved the other world so much, they ever left. There were no answers in all the ancient works he'd read.
They had brought much of their old world with them, a wonder to see. Ambassadors came to the capital world, marveled at the ancient alien wonders, and went home again.
Emperor Kadrien lived here. He knew the stories shown in the mosaics on the walls, and he knew the tales of the empire—but he had never left the complex. Sometimes it made him feel like an animal, dressed in the finest silks and put on display for those ambassadors to gawk at, just as they gawked at the building.
Those were old dark thoughts, and Kadrien didn't slow as he crossed the room. He hadn't time to gawk, or to consider his own actions. Nearly everyone in the palace had gathered upstairs celebrating the Queen Mother's birthday. She wouldn't approve of him sneaking around, of course, but then if his mother hadn't loved intrigue so much, he wouldn't have had to take it up as well.
Kadrien wasn't used to moving around the palace alone, of course, but this wasn't the time to bring even the most trusted of the Emperor's Guard with him. Discretion ... he had learned it at his mother's side as a form of self-preservation. Right now she thought he'd gone off with the pretty daughter of the new Elis ambassador. She'd learn differently, later. She always did. But even she couldn't demand to know where he'd been. He still outranked her. Sometimes that drove her mad—petty vindication for her constant meddling.
He reached the far door and quickly put his hand on the palm lock. The door slid silently open, and he stepped through into an area where very few strangers were ever allowed to go.
Little time left now. Someone might notice the accessing of the door to the Royal Families’ private rooms. They might tell his mother ... or they might not. At any rate, he didn't want her coming down here and making a show of his leaving her party.
Some days he found living with her nearly intolerable. However, for the most part, she did far more than her share of the work. In fact, her intrigues had kept him in power during the dangerous first two years after his father's untimely death. If she had just learned to temper her games once Kadrien had control—but no. She insisted on playing, even still.
He could not afford to ask her if she knew things he should. He could not afford to look like he had to rely on his mother for answers. People took advantage of that type of weakness, and his mother, unfortunately, was not as keen-witted as she had been in her youth. She liked having people dote on her these days.
Gods, what a mess.
Kadrien had resources of his own. He ruled an empire two hundred and ten worlds strong: a good empire, with few problems for so vast a realm. He'd brought peace after his father's dark rule, but even so, his father had left him a very unwelcome legacy.
The Imperial Guard had been moving farther and farther out of Imperial control for years now. He had, of late, heard faint rumors that some of the groups were preparing for open rebellion. He knew that he had to learn the truth, and quickly. He must also move carefully and with discretion. If word got out that the Emperor suspected the IGs of rebellion, it might actually push the Imperial Guard into action, as well as spread panic throughout the worlds. He wanted to know their locations, their strengths, and their plans without startling them into an action for which he was not yet prepared.
Kadrien had walked down the hall quickly, quietly. Even here, where there should be no one at all, he expected assassins. There had been attempts in the past, and passing an open doorway without his guards at his side proved a test of courage. He hated it. He didn't want to fear being alone.
His family had ruled this empire for over five hundred years, and he would not easily give it up—not to the IGs or the assassins, or even his mother. He could curb his fears, and forget that he had no freedom, if it meant that he would hold things together for another generation.
Sometimes he couldn't decide what he really wanted anymore. Not that it mattered. As the years drew on they presented him with fewer and fewer choices.
The hall curved. He walked on, faster now, his slippers making a slight whisper of sound across the floor. He had already started to think out his note. He had only one person he could turn to with questions this delicate. Tam would be discreet—had been so in the past and proved excellent as both spy and assassin. He would ask Tam to come here because he couldn't trust such a question in a note.
And it was an excuse, wasn't it? One to finally bring someone he missed back to court, even for a short time. Oh, Tam would have come to him before if he asked. Tam understood the prison and what held the Emperor here. But Kadrien couldn't bring himself to tie his cousin back to this damned world.
Besides, Tam did good work. They'd discussed it, years ago, before his cousin left Grant. Discussed the sort of work Tam thought he should do, having grown up in court and knowing all the worst people. Kadrien gave him leave and his blessing. He did not want his father's friends and supporters thinking they still held power at court.
The worst of those people began to die rather suddenly. Inexplicably. So far there hadn't been even a whisper of Tam's involvement. No matter, really—even if they did suspect, they could never have brought him to any kind of court for justice. And that was only fair, since the ones Tam dealt with could not be brought to justice either. Too powerful even for the Emperor to call them to the High Court at Grant.
So Tam took care of the worst of the group, and the others, knowing they were marked somehow, grew quiet and withdrew from the public. Some thought that they could still work their plots and evils, but Tam managed still to find and deal with them.
And he made Kadrien look very powerful. No one doubted the Emperor's hand in the matter. People knew he had despised his father's cruelty, and would have nothing to do with those who had been part of his father's court. They didn't know how he arranged their deaths, but they lived in fear of his word. Even if they finally learned that Tam did the work, they would have to try and kill him—and that, Kadrien knew, would not be easy.
Gods protect his cousin. There had been no assassinations in a couple years now, and he took that as a good sign. He wanted Tam ... safe. And he wanted him sane.
Kadrien pushed that last thought away and hurried up the short flight of stairs that took him past his private rooms. He knew his mother had his comm lines monitored. So he went on to her office and used hers, instead. A long ago memorized code—the gift of another friend no longer on Grant—got him in through her door. He didn't think often of Prince Sharton from Silversun. It was appropriate tonight, since Tam had last been seen on that world, and still in the company of the free trader and smuggler.
Kadrien grinned at that one. Gods, the scandal he had created in the last year standard. It was joy to watch the hangers-on go near faint at news of Tam's company. Even his mother seemed amused by the gossip.
He slipped into his mother's suite: it smelled of perfumes, and always felt close and cloying to him. Riches littered every corner, gathered like her intrigues, and as easily tossed aside when they no longer amused her. He kept her happy with those baubles sometimes, but it still surprised him to see them here, like trophies to be shown to whomever happened this far into her lair.
She had lovers, of course. She gathered them like trophies, too—and they kept her busy sometimes, when he could direct someone her way. Gods help them all if she ever realized that he often brought someone to court just to keep her entertained while he took care of real business.
He carefully didn't move anything, and even stood over her computer and comm equipment rather than sitting before it. Another code from Prince Sharton made it possible for him to get past any security she had set.
He worded his quick note as best he could in the limited time he had. Carefully, because though he trusted Tam, a note like this would go through many hands.
He read it a last time and sent it out. Done. If Tam got it, he would come back to Grant to talk to him. He had no doubt at all about that part. Gods, it would be good to see him again—to see anyone he could trust.
Kadrien turned and glanced around the room at the gold and gems, the ancient artifacts and the best of the new art. He wondered if she really liked it in this room. He wondered if she really enjoyed any of the gifts anymore. Life had been better since her husband died—but still...
Time to get back and join in the show. She'd no doubt be surprised when Tam showed up, though. That put him in a remarkably good mood as he hurried down the short hall, down the stairs, around the curving corridor that lead to the door and out ... out into the open again.
He wasn't so far gone that he didn't stop there and look before he slipped from the doorway and closed it behind him. The huge room with the tile floor and mosaic walls was empty still. Good.
Kadrien hurried across the ancient stones and...
Heard something behind him. He started to turn, but a wind shoved him down with a force that knocked the breath from him and swept him across the room. He fell awkwardly, his arm twisting under him, and his eyes half blinded by the sudden pain and the wind.
What the hell—
Someone who did not belong in the palace walked toward him; a tall, young man with a lean face and wide brown eyes. He looked around the room like someone of power, someone who did not fear where he stood, and was used to giving signs of approval.
How the hell had he gotten through security, through the palace alarms, and even through the shields?
"Wise of you not to fight me,” the stranger said. Odd, odd accent. Kadrien made a habit of knowing accents, of recognizing where his visitors came from as soon as they spoke. It gave them a feeling that he had far more connection with the other worlds. But he did not know this one.
The man leaned closer. He rubbed a piece of cloth against a cut on his neck; an odd move, as though he didn't even really think about it. He looked worried.
"Are you all right, Emperor Kadrien?"
Kadrien didn't know what to answer, but he did get back to his feet, and without the aid of the offered hand.
"What do you want?” Kadrien asked. He knew he must have gone white. His arm hurt like hell, and the fear of being here, alone with this stranger, nearly set him trembling. He looked to the taller man and refused to show his fear or his pain.
"I want ... you,” the stranger said. He looked around again. Nervous? That gave Kadrien some hope and confidence. “Your reality is too ... wide. I have already had one bout with it, and it's not something I wish to try my luck with again."
Kadrien looked at him, waiting for this stranger's words to make some sort of sense. He thought perhaps that the man didn't quite understand the language—but he feared this misunderstanding came from something far more basic. He spoke of things Kadrien didn't understand at all; not the stranger's problem, but his own.
"I want something here,” the man said. He looked around. “I want to get to it before the others do."
"Something in my palace?"
"Something in your ... Empire."
That didn't help. However, he could play along since the man seemed calm enough. Just time. Time until the Emperor's Guard arrived. They would, eventually, come looking for him. “What is it you seek?"
He laughed, and Kadrien thought there might be a different madness in that sound. “A very small piece of wood. It could be anywhere. And time is running out."
A madman. Beyond a doubt, he stood before a madman, with no idea how he had gotten inside. Where were his damned guards? Surely someone must have realized a stranger had gotten into the palace! The sensors in this building should have picked him up, if nothing else.
"I don't know how I can help you,” Kadrien said, a statement of honesty. “My powers do not lie in ... finding small pieces of wood."
The stranger laughed again. He seemed genuinely amused. “I understand, Emperor Kadrien, but you are still my best bet for doing things efficiently. I have watched you."
"Watched me.” He didn't like the sound of that at all but he held his place and looked at the man. No stranger could have watched him. Not with the security ... but here he stood, against that security as well.
"I am Tabor,” he said, and in a tone that made them equals. Kadrien started to feel annoyed, but a little chill crept up his spine. This man held power. He was not just a madman.
"Tabor,” he said but didn't bow his head. Oh no. He would not even give that polite acknowledgement to this one. “I fear that your search is not going to be easy."
"It's never easy,” Tabor said, and wiped at the cut on his neck again. “We must go now, I fear. I've found another place where we can work. Quieter."
At the moment the palace seemed far too quiet to him. His mother wouldn't take this well at all, no matter what happened. The lack of alarms, of any warning...
A thought occurred to him. Something that he'd heard whispers about in the past, but had never really believed.
"Are you a mage?” he asked.
Tabor looked at him, head tilted for a moment. “Yes, I am. A mage and more. And it is, truly, time we were away from here. I don't want to have to deal with your guards, Emperor. Or your mother, for that matter."
Tabor did know. He had been watching. Magic ... Gods help him, he had not believed in it before now. If magic existed, they were not safe...
Tabor lifted his hand, whispered words—and they moved. They moved from the palace, away from any safety he knew. Away from guards, spies, assassins, courtiers, and servants. As simple as that, the man took him somewhere else.
And Kadrien knew he would never be safe again.

Chapter 2

Captain Crystal hadn't expected the call to come in from Port Authority. Such contacts still made him nervous, even though he knew it was unlikely anyone would cause him trouble, not when he traveled as part of the Prince's group.
Nonetheless, he held with his hand hovering over the key as the comp flashed the announcement. Premonitions of disaster played through his mind as he finally keyed it over. At least it provided a break from tuning the inship comm system again. Damn this fancy equipment—far too sensitive—
"Message, Amora Port Commander Ulta to Captain Crystal of Fame. We have a private message in hold for Prince Tamaris and hoped that we might locate him on your ship. Please advise if he is there or where we might find him. Thank you. End Message, awaiting reply."
Crystal scowled at the computer. Tam wasn't Fame crew, and Captain Crystal wasn't a messenger boy. Then again, he could hardly blame the poor man for trying to find the Prince Heir if some message had arrived. Sometimes Crystal forgot how far up the pole Tam sat, and how others reacted to having him on world.
Crystal keyed the comp over to send and dictated a quick message. “Captain Crystal to Commander Ulta—Please be advised that Tam is not aboard Fame and I am unaware of his current location. If I see him I'll let him know that there's a message. Thank you."
He keyed it off, grinning. That off the cuff reference to Prince Tamaris as ‘Tam’ would raise a few eyebrows. Good. That was the most fun he'd had today.
He looked at the readout of the inship comm boards again and shook his head. Was there a reason he had to get it above 96% clarity? Yes, he liked perfection in his ship, but he also liked to see the worlds where they stopped now and then, too.
He knew why the port couldn't find Tam—or anyone else from Freedom. Etric had taken his entire crew off for dinner at a port-side restaurant. The crew of Fame had been invited, of course—but Crystal chose to stay behind and his crew stayed with him for some reason.
He looked at the board again. Then he thought about the food down in the ship's galley.
"To hell with this.” He hit the all-ship call. “Anyone who wants to join me in tracking down Etric and his crew and joining them for dinner, be down at the airlock in ten minutes. Maybe we can even get them to pay."
He thought he heard laughter out in the hall.
Crystal keyed off the equipment, put the ship on standby, and locked down the computer. He had just enough time to get to his room and change into something a little fancier—after all, he wouldn't attend dinner with the Prince and Etric's crew looking like a port worker.
The others must have thought the same thing. Istanan even carried his hand-carved cane with the golden eyes that glittered in even the faintest light. Banning—damn, she could clean up well when she wanted to. Even Damien, who usually dressed low-key, had pulled out his best bright blue jacket and lace cuffs.
"So, if you were all so anxious to go to this dinner, why didn't you?” he asked as he keyed the airlock door open.
"Go without you, Captain?” Banning said, and draped her arm across his shoulder. “What fun would that be? We'd have no one to embarrass."
He gave her a worried look. Sometimes he couldn't tell when Banning might be planning some mischief at his expense. It would not be the first time.
Walking out with the crew felt good, though. He and his people did well together, and had even before they joined with Prince Tamaris and the crew of Freedom. He'd come a long ways since he left home as a slave.
Standing out in Silversun's bright afternoon light suddenly made him think of home. Of Delson, a world filled with green and life. Silversun seemed too bright and dry. He had seen far too few worlds that held the force of life like Delson. He longed for it—and suddenly had an odd urge to go home. He'd not felt that for a long time. Maybe he'd finally reached the point where he could go back without any of the darker experiences of his life standing in the way. He could take his crew and Etric's people, and show them the world he had loved so much. Still loved, in fact, though he had feared going near it. He had changed in those years as a slave. He hadn't wanted to bring that bitterness home with him.
He hadn't been bitter in a long time. And he no longer dreamed—the drug-infested dreams that had been brought by a brief, but devastating, addiction to the Midori drug that had saved his life. Time to put all of that behind him. He'd talk to Etric about putting Delson on their agenda. After all, they weren't really following any set route. They'd taken fourteen ports together in the last year and a half standard, since Abby and Tristan...
Sometimes that part of his life seemed unreal, and if the others hadn't sometimes still talked about the two, he would have believed it part of his Midori-drugged dreams. That they hadn't fought with good—
"You're too quiet, Crystal,” Banning said, tapping him on the shoulder. “I never trust you when you're that quiet."
"Just thinking about our future, Ban,” he said. They'd walked away from the pad where Fame sat, and he could see Freedom off to the right, close by. Other people looked their way, but he couldn't tell if the glances came because they looked unusual—they did—or because people knew they traveled with the one of the three heirs to the Empire.
"We've been doing well,” Ban said with a glance at Freedom. “I've no complaints. I don't think Istanan and Damien have either."
"No, we haven't,” Istanan said. Crystal slowed, knowing that his crewman would have trouble keeping up, even with the cane. “Damien and I discussed this just the last slide."
Istanan and Damien's attitude didn't surprise him, but he hadn't expected Banning to willingly still go on with Etric's crew. She got along very well with them—they all did—and it was a remarkably good mix.
But still ... Banning had been a smuggler and a big player in the black-market far longer than Captain Crystal. She had made a good career at it, and had never shown signs of wanting out. Yet she'd not made any suggestion that they drop traveling with Etric and Tam (who paid all expenses) and go back to their lucrative work.
He looked at her. She must have seen a lot in his stare, and shrugged. “It's been a good year. Calm. I'm not saying I want this forever, Captain, but I don't really want to part company with our friends, either."
The other two nodded. They looked worried now that the words had been spoken.
"Don't worry,” Crystal said and laughed. “We'll stick with them a while longer. Unless they don't buy us dinner."
Banning nodded, as though he had just made some sort of wise decision. It confused him again.
"We fought the good fight with them, Captain,” Banning finally said. “We made a bond that isn't going to be easy to break. I don't want to let go just yet."
"As if we're not quite done,” Damien said. He shrugged this time, a little embarrassed by their attention. “Or maybe it's just been too much fun, watching all those Imperial Guards and port workers try to decide how to treat us."
"A while longer,” Istanan said.
Crystal didn't argue. He hadn't actually intended to break away from Etric anyway, but he found it interesting to see how the others felt. Damien had hit closer to what Crystal felt: as if their work wasn't quite finished. Well, it made a good excuse, anyway.
Banning went ahead and rented an open-topped road car. Amora Port stretched for several miles from the pads, and Crystal had no intention of walking the crowded streets in the vain hope of finding Etric and his crew. Crystal already felt the drag of this world at his heels, and Istanan, having been raised on a low-grav satellite, would feel it far worse.
He had one idea of where to find the crew of Freedom. Etric hadn't told him where they intended to dine, though, and that made Crystal discreet as well.
The Imperial Guards eyed the group as they left the port. Nothing new there, but he never liked it much. Truthfully, though they had Tam's protection, they also shared his danger. People in Tam's position drew attention, envy, and distrust, and they'd seen those reactions more plainly on the last couple worlds. Tam rarely sought out attention, but on Silversun he said he needed to make an appearance or people would start wondering where he'd disappeared to, and that never led to good.
As far as Crystal could tell, he had also not been practicing the fine art of assassination. Crystal hadn't heard of any sudden deaths among the elite of the worlds they had visited, but then again the news might not have caught up with them yet.
Obviously Tam intended to do no such work here. He purposely checked in with the port when they landed and reported that they would be here for a few days. He drew attention to himself, and it had paid off in the form of this communications. Crystal hoped it was worth it for the Prince. Tam hated attention so much he would have made an excellent smuggler.
Crystal drove as they left the port, and turned their vehicle down the dusty streets and toward the center of town. He'd been to Amora a couple times in the past, and knew all the best places to eat and shop. It wouldn't be too hard to track down a group like Etric's crew.
Crystal's group drew stares of their own, of course. They looked exotic, and most people probably mistook them for travelers rather than ship's crew. Too many crews these days were drawn all from one world—they looked, sounded, and dressed alike. Crystal's crew—as well as Etric's—came from varied places and backgrounds. And they liked being different; they dressed for it and gloried in the attention—most of the time.
He grinned and slowed as they neared the square where the ‘good people’ gathered for the evening. He could see the occasional flash of jewels and the sweep of clothing that cost far more than it should have.
In other days, on another world, he would have watched such groups and marked out his victims. Gods, that seemed like such a long time ago. He'd been good, though ... and like Tam, he'd picked his targets carefully. In this group—well, he might be tempted to the haughty woman who glared at anyone who came too near, at least if they weren't dressed well enough.
As it happened, Crystal's group did dress better than many of the people here. People turned to watch as the four climbed out of the car; tall, statuesque Banning with her golden hair and perfect face; thin, ethereal Istanan, who moved with low-grav grace even here; and small, handsome Damien who, dark-haired, only seemed more exotic beside the other two. Crystal never quite knew where he fit in, but he knew people looked his way as well.
He liked putting on the show today. They had nothing to hide. They left the vehicle in the lot at the edge of the square and began to make their way along the circular path, checking the different restaurants along the way. By the time they reached the third, Crystal thought they should just stop there and eat without their friends. He hadn't realized how hungry he felt until now.
"Not here,” Damien reported, coming back from the door. “The doorman did see them, though. He thinks they went on to the Way House."
Crystal looked ahead. The restaurant stood only three more buildings down the line. “Good! Let's go before they eat all the food."
"We'll find some of our own, don't worry Captain,” Banning said with a laugh. Crystal saw envy in some of the faces as she took his arm. Oh, and she did that on purpose. A good thing he liked the show today and didn't mind that nothing ever came of her flirting with him.
As they neared the restaurant, Banning finally let go of his arm and pushed ahead to talk to the doorman. He gave a slight nod, but looked worried when she waved the others forward.
People waiting to get in did not look happy about seeing the four of them go closer to the door. They passed three groups from ships—those cloned looks, and exact uniforms—and two more of important locals. Crystal heard Prince Tamaris whispered once, which explained the crowd, come to gawk at the type of royalty they rarely saw here.
"I'm sorry, but just because you say you are with the Prince doesn't mean we will let you in,” the man at the door said.
Banning stared him down. The doorman, who had started out with that I work at an important place attitude grounders sometimes got with crew, now had a bit more of a worried look.
"I suggest that you ask the Prince himself if he would like us to join him,” Banning said, her voice cool but not unfriendly—not yet. “You really don't want to know how he'll reacts if he finds we've been turned away."
Someone behind them guffawed at that idea. Banning turned that blue-ice stare of hers on the woman, who didn't look any more willing to back down.
"The idea that Crown Prince Tamaris might be upset that some common ship's crew was sent packing—"
Crystal put a hand on Banning's arm before she said anything. He turned his best smile to the woman instead. “Oh, surely not common. We've traveled with Tam for well over a year now. I would say that makes us rather uncommon, wouldn't you think?"
The man at the door had signaled someone else to him, and that person took off at a run back into the building. Good. The grounder woman glared at him, gray eyes narrowed. He hadn't insulted her, but she was about to say something to him that she might regret, for many reasons.
"We do not brook liars on this world—"
But Rqua had come to the door. He looked out at the group and gave a little laugh. “You told Tam you weren't going to join us, Crystal! We weren't sure it was actually you, though if the doorman had said someone was starting a brawl outside, we'd have just said let you in."
Damien laughed. The woman had gone red and white in turn. Crystal gave her a little bow—not polite, of course, but very well worth it to see her blanch. The doorman had started to stutter apologies—
"You did your job,” Banning told him, with a hand on the man's arm. He looked at her, stunned. “We travel with Prince Tamaris. If you had just let us in without question ... well, I can guarantee you would not have had a job within the hour."
"Oh. Oh.” He smiled a little and let the group past. “Thank you."
Rqua looked amused as he started back across the wide interior. Tables sat in clusters, and despite the crowd the place seemed inordinately quiet—and then they saw why. Each area had sound shields and private lighting. Expensive stuff, but he liked the feel—not just the privacy, but the peace of not hearing so many people chattering away.
"The owner of the place shows up every couple minutes to talk to his people. He apparently fears they'll trip and splatter the prince with water or something. It's a wonder he didn't come running to the door himself. He seems to be a bit nervous with Tam around,” Rqua said. “And that's made his people a little nervous as well."
"Don't have to explain it to me,” Crystal said. “I know the feeling."
They hadn't put the prince on show, as Crystal half expected to find him—but nearly everyone in the place still watched the far corner of the restaurant. Tam sat at the back of the long table, with Otaka, Kamil, and Tathis across from him, Etric to his right, Ylin next to him and a spot for Rqua next. The owner—Rqua made a little nod and grin in his direction—helped to carry a second table that melded in with the first. Crystal and his people quickly sat down. Istanan looked relieved to be off his feet, but Crystal, finding himself opposite Etric and on the other side of Tam, wasn't sure this was quite where he wanted to be, with all those people who came to watch Tam now watching him as well. It was one thing to draw attention by being flamboyant; it was another to be on show.
However, the food smelled very good and he doubted that people really looked twice at him with a Prince of the Line and Heir Apparent just an arm's length away.
"Glad you joined us,” Tam said. “And sorry I missed the trouble at the door. I could use a little excitement."
"It wasn't all that exciting,” Istanan said as he glanced at the menu coded into the table. “And if you had stepped in, Banning would have been pissed that she didn't get a chance to take that woman down a notch or two."
Banning spread her hands in a gesture of agreement. “What can I say? I don't get to use my older skills much any more."
"Except on me,” Crystal said.
"Well yes, but I have you so well trained that it's hardly worth it any more."
That set the others laughing.
"Isn't your renewal coming up soon, Ban? I'll see if we can't find a suitable backwater world to drop you on."
"Wouldn't work. I'd just go to work for Etric."
"Oh no—leave me out of this!” Etric said, shaking his head.
"You wouldn't hire me on as crew?” she said, smiling.
"Let me get you out of this, Captain Etric, by deftly changing the subject so that she hardly even notices,” Crystal said. They laughed again. “Tam, we came because Port Authority contacted my ship looking for you. There seems to be a private coded message for you at port. I thought we'd play messenger and maybe get a meal out of it."
"Oh, by all means,” Tam said. He reached for the comm board hanging on the wall behind them and nodded his thanks when Crystal handed it to him. “I'm not surprised to find there's a message. I came to Silversun specifically to see if anything needed to catch up with me. People get nervous if I disappear for too long."
He tapped in a code—ah, and it went straight to the message, bypassing any locks and security check in. Now that showed the true sign of Tam's trust, that he used such a code right there with a smuggler and thief sitting at his side. Gods, the stuff Crystal could do with a code like that.
Tam looked at him and grinned. Oh yes, the Prince Heir knew exactly what he'd just done.
The message came up quickly. Text-only—odd, though not unusual. Most people sent text-only messages, but Crystal would have thought that anyone with enough clout to send a message to the Prince would have had the funds to do full vid and sound without an eye blink.
"Oh my,” Tam said He sat the board down and stared at it. That didn't sound or look good. Then he read the note aloud. “Tam—I have a few questions I would like to ask you, if you could stop by. I shall not detain your or your friends for long. I look forward to seeing you soon—Cousin Ryan."
It didn't sound like such an ominous message to win the worry on Tam's face. However, Tam's look stilled everyone. Crystal glanced at the other tables and noted how even a few of the people there even looked worried now.
Tam shook his head and shut the connection down, banishing the message but not his mood.
"You obviously don't want to go,” Istanan said softly. “Is there a reason you should?"
Tam looked at him, startled. And then he smiled, though he still appeared nervous. Crystal had never seen the prince look quite this way before, and it worried him all the more—and made him nervous. He thought it might be contagious.
"Ah, you wouldn't have caught the code. Cousin Ryan is Emperor Kadrien. I would have to find a very good reason not to go to him."
Well. That stopped everyone again.
"Tam, is it safe for you to go?” Etric asked. “Because if you shouldn't—"
"I'm safe enough. He knows my work,” Tam said, waving that away. He sat back, looking troubled but less nervous now. “That's not a problem. I just wonder what could be so important that he has to tell me in person. I'll go, of course. I owe him at least that much."
"Grant is only a few days’ slide from here,” Rqua said. “We can make the run without much trouble."
"There is just one small problem,” Crystal said. He keyed in his order for food with quick stabs of his finger—and hoped he didn't look too shaken. “There's no reason Etric and his crew can't go ... but my crew are smugglers. It might not be wise for us to go with you."
Etric looked worried as though he had forgotten, but Tam waved that worry aside as well. “Kadrien is good as his word—and he did already give you his word, you know. I shall not detain you or your friends for long. He is well aware of the company I keep."
The idea that Emperor Kadrien knew about him and his crew... that didn't exactly settle Crystal's nerves any. In fact, even Etric and his people looked a little unsettled by the revelation, as though they had any reason to be worried.
"You are safe, all of you.” Tam leaned back in his chair. “Nevertheless, you are not required to go with me. None of you are. I can arrange my own transport."
"Do you want us to go?” Banning asked.
"It would make the journey more pleasant,” Tam said. “You can tell that I'm not exactly thrilled with the idea of being called to court. I understand that you would not want to go there. I'll contract with someone else—"
"Don't you think that perhaps you ought to wait until we decide?” Etric asked. “I think a vote of the crews might be in order. So, is there anyone here who does not want to go to Grant with Prince Tamaris?"
People all along the table looked at each other. After a couple moments, Etric shrugged and looked back at Tam with a grin. Crystal turned to Banning expecting some protest, but she only smiled.
"Hey,” she said. “How else will I ever get to see Grant? Unless it's for a trial I would really rather not be party to."
"Good point,” Tam said. “It really is a lovely palace. I think, with Kadrien as Emperor, I'll even enjoy seeing it again. I left right after his father's death. Maybe it's long past time I went back and faced... things that I've left unfinished for too long."
"Then we're going.” Crystal felt remarkably calm as he said those odd words. He had obviously spent far too much time with Tamaris if going to see the Emperor didn't worry him. “Let's enjoy dinner. We can put in launch requests tonight and leave after we sleep."
That won nods all around. Some of the others still looked a little shocked, but the food began arriving and soon took their attention. Gods, real food: fresh vegetables, sauces that made his stomach growl just at their scent ... Normally Crystal didn't care that much about what he ate, but that only made moments like this all the more enjoyable. The food looked excellent.
Tam sipped at his drink and looked around the table, nodding again as he sat the cup back down. “Good, thank you. It will make this journey far more enjoyable. If we leave for Grant tomorrow, we can be there in four days standard. The sooner we take care of this, the sooner we can get back to normal."
Silence.
Everyone at the table had stopped with spoons, forks and cups half way to their mouths. Even the waiters, still passing around the food, looked stunned by that statement.
"All right, all right,” Tam said, trying not to laugh. “So normal is not the word I should have used with this group. I get the point."
Kamil reached over and patted the prince on the arm, a rare show of camaraderie for him. “It's why you fit in so well, Prince Tamaris,” he said aloud, though he signed the words for Tathis as well.
And they all laughed again. The waiters even relaxed and seemed reluctant to leave. Remembering the rudeness of the woman in the line, Crystal couldn't blame them. Too many people found pleasure in making others grovel before them.
He wondered why Tam had never turned out that way. Maybe he'd have to ask some day. But for now... well, he had to get used to the idea that he would be visiting Grant. Tonight, though, he intended to enjoy a good meal with friends and not worry about anything else.

Chapter 3

Etric enjoyed the dinner with Tam. He usually did, whether on the ship or off. They didn't share enough of these meals with Fame's crew, though, and having them join tonight made it even better. The smugglers were a fun group.
And everyone seemed remarkably calm, despite the knowledge that they would leave from here for Grant. Etric didn't worry too much. He had thought the crews would sit it out in their ships while Tamaris took care of whatever business with the Emperor he had, but Tam seemed to have other ideas. In fact, he seemed quite pleased with the idea of taking them into the palace, showing them the wonders of the place.
Etric looked down the table toward Crystal and saw the same bemused look on his friend's face that he felt on his own. Sometimes he wondered how they had gotten into this odd situation. He and Crystal had met as slaves working illegal Midori fields. He could never have imagined one day they would be discussing going to Grant with one of the three possible heirs to the throne.
"Ah,” Tam said and suddenly sat straighter, surprise showing on his face. “Now there is someone I had not expected to see. And at least the doorman had wisdom enough to let him in!"
A well-dressed young man—local from the looks of him—had started across the room toward them. He walked with a noticeable limp and a cane, which seemed odd to Etric. Most people that rich had no trouble getting such problems fixed. He might have done the same for Ylin, long ago before Ylin's wounds healed and left him with as bad a limp. The doctors now said that they'd have to rebuild the entire leg, and even that would not guarantee anything better, since so often grafted limbs did not take.
But this one.... Ah, and people bowed when he passed. Nobility.
Tam stood when the stranger neared and indicated he wanted another chair. The others, of course, stood as well. The newcomer looked uncertain and a little worried at the sight.
"Prince Shantar of Silversun,” Tam said, indicating the newcomer. “I didn't realize you were on world, sir."
"Sir? Prince?” He smirked a little and won a bit of a smile from Tamaris. “Relax, Tam. Just because I came home, doesn't mean I changed."
"Good. You never know. I ran into Umelis of Starkin about five years ago—"
"She always was a little prig, even if she pretended otherwise.” One of the waiters brought a chair and sat it carefully beside him. “Thank you.” He sat. So did Tam. So did the others. “I'm sorry to bother you, but since you were so relatively easy to find, I assumed you meant to be."
"True enough.” Tam pushed back his plate and frowned. “Trouble?"
"Something odd is going on. The IGs are gathering at their quarters. They're being very secretive and I don't trust it."
"Never trust secretive IGs,” Tam agreed. “They're becoming increasingly more trouble. Damn. If the IGs are moving, I suspect it might be wise to get back to the safety of the ships. Would you care to join us on Freedom or Fame, Shar? I'd like to talk about old times."
"Old times?” Shar said. His face lost all look of pleasure. “I'd rather not."
"Ah, true. My apologies. That was badly worded,” Tam said and bowed his head, a true apology, and Etric thought it might have been needed. Prince Sharton's hand shook and his face paled. Etric had guessed that life at court hadn't been good, but Tam hid the feelings better.
Then again, Tam did take rather drastic steps to settle his ghosts. Etric only now realized there might be a very personal reason why Tam had become an assassin and chose his targets from people who had, very likely, been at the court during Emperor Overin's reign.
"We've known each other a long time. Prince Sharton was a Guest of the Court for most of his life,” Tam said. Then he must have seen that they didn't understand. “A hostage. The old Emperor needed them to keep everyone in line. Overin was not loved."
"But Kadrien—Kadrien's different,” Sharton said. He smiled again. “You and he were the bright spots of living on Grant, you know. If it wasn't for the two of you, I'd have gone mad. And while I'm not ready to talk about the old days, I did rather hope to get introduced to your odd friends here. Word gets around, you know. You've created quite a scandal. Congratulations."
Tam sputtered, and some of the others laughed. Prince Sharton grinned with delight and even agreed to go with them back to the ships.
"I'll arrange transport. I don't think I could walk back,” Etric said. “Not after that meal—though the Gods know I probably need to. Crystal can you hand me the—"
Trouble at the door. He turned back, reaching for the weapon he normally carried—but damn, there was a weapon ban at Silversun.
His people had noted the trouble and already began to move closer to Tam. Imperial Guards had entered the restaurant—a full dozen of them—and they swarmed up toward the table, pushing aside anyone who didn't move fast enough. A good many people escaped out through the door in their wake, and Etric could already hear panic outside.
Etric and his companions had moved as quickly. They would not be caught in the corner of the room, with no way out. Otaka, Rqua, Banning, and Kamil had already formed up around Tam, and they pulled Prince Sharton into that protection as well as they started out of the restaurant. However, none of them got very far through the nearly deserted room before the IGs cut them off from what appeared to be the only door.
"What are you doing here?” Tam demanded, his voice dead calm, and a sure sign that he did not like what had happened.
"We have brought grave news,” the Captain in charge said. He even dared to step closer. “Emperor Kadrien is missing."
"Missing,” Tam repeated. He paled. “He can't be missing. I just had a note from him."
"Grant is in chaos,” the IG said. He had his hand on his weapon. “We are here to take you into protective custody, Prince Tamaris."
"No, I don't think so."
"But I insist,” the man said, and drew that weapon.
Rqua stepped closer to Tam, obviously ready to pull the prince back away from the line of fire—and the IG Captain turned his hand and fired.
Rqua fell—crumpled to the floor without a sound. In that moment when Etric wasn't sure if his friend lived he almost attacked the IG himself, and the weapon be damned. But Tathis had thrown himself down by Rqua, put a hand on his chest, and nodded back to Etric. All in a half dozen fast heartbeats before even any of the others could move.
Except for Tam. Etric had missed the prince stepping closer to the guard—fool!—the fury so plain in his face that the guard even brought the weapon around to face him.
"Careful, Tam,” Etric said. His voice trembled. “Careful. Tathis says he's not dead."
The wound had to be serious. Banning had knelt now, and Ylin dropped down—unable to kneel with his leg brace—and began to do whatever he could.
"You are lucky I don't kill you right now,” Tam said, his voice cold with rage. Shantar, standing beside him, looked worried. Etric wondered if he'd seen this rage before. “Get away from me. Get away right now, or by the Gods, I'll have you killed on the spot."
The guard stepped back. Not far, but enough that it stilled Tam from doing something that might not be wise with all the other guards present.
"I'm sorry, Tam,” Sharton said softly. “I didn't know. If I had waited a little longer—"
"No,” Tam said. He put a hand on Sharton's arm, and glanced at Rqua and away again. “No, you barely got here ahead of them as it was. You did your best.” His voice dropped as he stepped closer to Etric and Crystal. “Forgive me, but this is a really dangerous time for me. Heirs do not always survive, and some find themselves under the control of others. Gods, I can't imagine what happened to Kadrien—but I will not go with the IGs. I'm sorry, Etric. If I had said yes—"
"We'd have had to battle them to get you back,” Etric said. “Rqua is still alive. Nothing is lost yet. Let's not throw it away."
"Rqua needs care,” Banning said as she stood. “Back to the ship if not to a local medical unit. He's lucky—there's a bad burn along the side of his head, and damage to the skull, but he pulled aside just in time to avoid taking the blast straight through his brain. It's serious, but he can live—if we get him to care. Soon."
"Then we'll go,” Tam said. He looked at the IGs who still held the line at the door. “You really don't want to stand between me and my friends."
But the fools held their place, even when the group gathered around Tam and started for the door, with Rqua in Banning and Kamil's hold. Neither side had any intention of standing down.
"Your friends can go. But you, Prince Tamaris—you are to stay in our care. You do understand, I'm sure."
"Oh yes. I understand very well,” Tam said. He took an unexpected step closer before Etric or Crystal could stop him. The IG smiled. “I am not going with you."
The words surprised the man, but not nearly as much as the knife that Tam brought up and put right against his throat. Etric, who had started to reach for Tam, stopped in time. The IG's face had gone white. Etric even managed to pull the laser pistol from the soldier's hand, which gave him a little more hope.
"I am not going with you,” Tam repeated. He let the blade leave a small cut and a trickle of blood on the soldier's neck. A thin line of red ran down onto the collar of his perfect white uniform. “I do not trust you, or any other IG, at a time like this. I'm not a fool. I trust my friends. They are my people. Do you understand? You wounded one of my people—and I could be emperor soon."
Oh yes. The man did understand that point and the threat that went with it. Etric wasn't certain that it really helped. The men, as greedy as their Captain, didn't look inclined to care if Tam slit the man's neck.
"Damien, Ylin—go find a first aid kit. There's likely one in the kitchen,” Banning said. She moved Rqua over to one of the abandoned chairs, and Tathis stood behind him, carefully holding his friend's head up while Banning worked at the wound again. Damn good thing that woman kept her head. And the guards didn't try to stop Darian or Ylin, at least.
But they still weren't out of the building. And though Etric had a pistol, he didn't really want to start a shooting war. Oh gods, what a mess!
The guards looked uneasy as well. Something would give all too soon, and Etric couldn't say which way it would go. He looked back at Rqua, and Ylin looked up at him—worried, but that worry gave him hope.
"Rquana isn't dead,” Ylin said aloud, but mostly for Tam's benefit. “Let's not make this worse. There are others to consider, as well as the crew."
Tam obviously only now remembered where he stood, with all those other people who had come for their nice, quiet dinner, and to see the spectacle of a crown prince right in their own port. Etric felt sorry for them right then.
But so far, it had not gotten any of them hurt. He glanced at Ylin and Rqua again, but even before he could say anything to the prince, Tamaris had made his own decision.
Tam pulled his knife back, and the Captain stepped away, his eyes blazing with anger now that he no longer felt death at his throat. A dozen more of his people arrived, now fully outnumbering the crews of Freedom and Fame.
Tam glanced toward Etric, giving his head a little shake. Quite obviously he wouldn't risk any more of the crew. He started to move toward the guards—
Crystal moved faster, grabbing the laser pistol out of Etric's hand, and in the next step came close enough to put it up against—against Tam's head.
Tam's eyes widened in surprise, and his hand started to move—Etric thought that Captain Crystal might not survive this moment of desperate madness, one way or another. But in the next heartbeat Tamaris dropped the knife he held, the loud clatter against the floor.
The world held still in those moments when all their fates hung on what the Imperial Guards believed—and how much they would risk to keep the Prince Heir in their hands.
"If you try to take Prince Tamaris, I'll kill him,” Crystal said, his voice calm and steady. “Do you understand? I would rather see him dead than out of our hands. So get the hell out of this place before I make certain that none of us gain from this."
The guard believed him. Oh yes, he believed that someone like Crystal—no doubt he recognized the Captain of Fame—would have his own reasons for staying with the prince and would be desperate enough to murder the prince rather than lose control of him. The IGs backed away, out through the door—finally gone, though obviously they would not have gone far or would stay away for long.
As soon as they were out of sight, Crystal lowered the weapon, obviously shaken. Tam put a hand on his shoulder, getting a look of surprise from Sharton, and sounds of shock from the few others still left in the room.
"Good work, Crystal, though I was quite surprised to find a laser pistol to my head. I don't believe that's ever been done to a member of the royal family before. You'll be a legend."
"I'm sorry,” Crystal said. He looked ill. “It was all I could think to do."
"You did well,” Tam said.
"Get the door secured,” Etric ordered, waving people that way. “That will hold them for a bit. Kamil, Istanan, Ylin—start looking for another way out."
People moved off to do his bidding. Crystal went with Otaka to the front door. Good. He might be able to do something with the lock that made it harder to open—though Etric knew that wouldn't hold anyone for long.
Damien arrived with the first aid kit, and Banning sat it on the table, immediately going to work. Etric wanted to help her—but unless they could come up with a way out of here, none of them were going to survive.
"They're going to bring up the heavy equipment, Captain,” Damien said. “And as far as I can tell, there's no easy way out of here. The windows are too small, and the cook said that the only other door leads into a narrow alley between the buildings and back out to the square—we'd never get far that way, one at a time."
"Hell,” Tam said. “Those men better hope that I never become emperor."
"The rest of you,” Etric said, looking at the few people still at their tables, “Do your best not to draw the IGs’ attention. Get far back from the front wall—that's the weakest point and where they are likely to come through with equipment. I don't think even prominent citizens would mean much to them right now. Stay as uninvolved as you can."
But they were already involved, and some of them knew it. When the IGs came back in, they were not going to be calm. Oh hell...
Otaka came back, shaking her head and looking worried. “Crystal fixed the door. They'll have to blast it open. Which they will, of course. We need another way out. I'm going to look for one."
Etric nodded and sent her on her way. No time. They had no time at all to waste.

Chapter 4

Crystal stood by the door and trembled. Gods grant that he never go that crazy again. Crystal still felt the edge of panic surge through him at the thought of what he'd done. It had been pure madness to put that laser to Tam's head. The thought of it—and that Tam could have killed him just in reaction, since he had that knife in his hand—
But the ploy had worked. That counted for something right now, in those few moments the action had given them to find a way out.
He could hear sounds outside the building. Far too many of them—voices and equipment, panic and what sounded like orders. He didn't call that news back to the others. They weren't stupid, and they certainly had enough to do already.
Banning had turned Rquana over to Ylin and came to stand by Crystal. She put a hand on his shoulder, an unexpected show of comfort.
"We're still doing all right, Captain,” she said. She frowned, her head canted toward the door as she heard the sounds. She shook her head, saying nothing about them either. “We wouldn't have a chance at all if you hadn't moved in."
"It was insane."
"Well, yes. But it worked."
"Kadrien's disappearance—Emperor Kadrien's disappearance has me almost as rattled as it does Tam,” Crystal admitted. “I was just getting used to the idea that we were going to Grant at his request. The idea that we might be taking Tam there to make him Emperor—"
"I hadn't thought that far ahead,” Banning admitted. She glanced back at the table where Ylin gently wrapped bandages around Rqua's head. Tam, Etric and Sharton stood close by.
"How bad is Rqua?"
"Bad enough to need care—but I've seen worse from people who survived. I'd rather get him somewhere that he has professional attention, but we're doing well enough. They had a good first aide kit. That helped."
"We'll get him back to Freedom,” Crystal said. “We don't dare try to hold up anywhere else. We may have to go with Freedom, Banning. We may have to leave the ship behind."
"Yes,” she said and sighed. “Damn. And I had just gotten the new vid system tuned, too."
That made him laugh, even now.
Otaka rushed back out of the kitchen, talked to Etric—and the three of them came over to the door, anxious but looking hopeful. He hoped they'd found something because from the sounds he could hear, they were fast running out of time.
"Otaka found a storm drain in the basement. It's been sealed shut forever,” Etric said, “but she says once they get it open it'll be our best chance to get out."
"I've got Damien and Istanan getting the seal open. It shouldn't take them too long, which is damned good from the sounds of things.” She looked toward the door and shook her head. “I was an IG, remember. I know exactly what kind of equipment they are bringing up. We don't want to be here when it arrives."
"In fact, I suggest we all move away from the walls,” Banning said.
"I'm going to go back and help Damien and Istanan—” Otaka said.
"Take a couple of the others. Tathis and Kamil. Get it open, Otaka. It's our only chance."
She nodded and darted away, stopping only long enough to tap Tathis on the shoulder and signal Kamil to go with her as well. They went without question.
"Running out of time,” Crystal said softly.
"I know.” Etric shook his head, looking around the room. “I'll go get the others ready to move. You two get back from the door. You can't do any good here."
Banning nodded and took hold of Crystal's arm, as though he might argue. Etric seemed to take that as a good sign. He turned and hurried back to the others.
"I am capable of moving on my own, you know,” Crystal said.
"I don't know if I trust you, Captain. You've done some pretty crazy things tonight."
"Well, yes. You have a point.” He let her maneuver him away from the door back toward the tables. Crystal and Ban helped get the recalcitrant diners toward the center of the room, away from any of the walls. Some understood and others protested for reasons Crystal couldn't understand, but apparently came from the idea that no one should tell them what to do. Crystal would have left them there except he didn't want to feel guilty over the deaths of even these fools. And he certainly didn't want Tam feeling that way.
He realized that another woman had started helping them, and he appreciated the effort enough that when they finished he didn't order her down with the others as well.
"I'd like to help you,” she said, following them back toward the door again. Crystal thought it had gotten too quiet outside. “I don't like the idea of staying here while the IGs move through, and I think I have something you might find helpful right now."
"Oh?” Banning said, curious.
She pulled back her jacket and showed a very nice little sonic pistol in a shoulder harness. “Doesn't pick up on the weapons scans. Special make. I think you could use another weapon, right? And someone who knows how to handle it?"
"Maybe,” Crystal said, though he still felt leery of letting a stranger join.
"My name is Zoe. I just left work on The Shire. I had a good amount of income from my last run and came out here to sample a little of the high life before I took work with another ship."
The Shire had been in port until this afternoon. That at least rang true. And the Gods knew that they needed the weapon.
"All right, Zoe.” He started away from the door, too nervous to stand there. “Stick with us. But you better take this bit of warning—never turn that weapon toward Tam—toward Prince Tamaris. I wouldn't give you much chance of survival."
"Oh, I can believe that,” she said, and obviously took him seriously. “I'll be careful."
"Good,” he said and nodded once toward Ban. She'd make sure someone watched over Zoe.
Otaka came back out of the kitchen again. She nodded to the others.
"We have an opening. Get moving. It's the only chance we have!"
No one argued. Etric waved Tam on ahead, and for a moment he feared the prince would argue. Instead, Tam helped Ylin carry Rquana. Prince Sharton looked uncertain, standing at the door.
"If you have reason not to trust the IGs, Prince Sharton, you are perfectly welcome to join us,” Etric said.
"I—I will slow you down,” he said, tapping his leg with the cane he used.
"You, Istanan and Ylin,” Etric said. “We aren't leaving them behind and we won't abandon you. You aren't going to slow us. Go. Crystal—"
"We're with you,” Crystal said. He didn't even need Banning's hand on his arm to urge him along.
He and Banning were the last to head out. None of the others looked insane enough to try and follow—until one woman and three men stood and the woman held out her hands, coming toward them.
"We don't want to be here when the IGs show up, for all our own reasons,” she said. “We'll hold back until the rest of you are through your opening, and then we'll come down and head in the other direction."
"Why?” Crystal asked, unwilling to let her any farther.
"Because we are competitors, Captain Crystal. Or at least we were in your wilder days and before the IGs holed my ship. I'm Captain Sand of the Stardust. These three are the last of my crew to survive. I don't want to fall into IG hands now."
Damn! He knew that name, but he hadn't realized the Captain of the ship had been a woman. He glanced at Banning, and she gave a quick nod of confirmation.
"She's legit. Well, she's a legit smuggler,” Banning said. “I hadn't heard about the Stardust."
"Just happened a few days ago,” Sand said. She had short dark hair and a bruise on the side of her face. He saw bandages and bleak looks on the other three as well. Hard times. “We were supposed to meet someone here tonight who might have helped us get a new start ... but I think that's blown to hell. I'll be happy just to get clear of this mess."
"I'm sorry you got caught up in our trouble,” Crystal said.
"Me too, but if something like this was going to happen, I'd rather it be here then out on the streets with no warning. They'll be grabbing everyone they can out there and checking their IDs. This gives us a chance to hide out, at least."
"True,” Banning said. She looked back through the kitchen door. “Stairs are clear. Let's go."
"Be careful,” Crystal warned. “Don't go near Tam."
"I gathered that might not be a good idea.” She looked at Crystal, her eyes narrowed. “He knows who you are."
"Yes. And what I am and what I've done. I've never run drugs or slaves or weapons."
"Oh, I know. You've quite a reputation, Captain.” She looked at the door and the sudden clang of sound. “It was nice to meet you. Go. We'll follow."
Crystal didn't exactly trust them, but in some ways it worked out well for his group. They stayed at the doorway while he and Banning went into the kitchen. He looked back to see her standing there, watching. She nodded.
This had turned into a hell of a mess and he didn't know what they would do now. It wouldn't take the IGs long to figure out where they went, after all. But at least this gave them some hope to get away. Like Sand, he found the opportunity far better than sitting and waiting for the IGs to come back.
And they would have marked him, of course, for having taken the Prince out of their hands. Gods. He shouldn't have come here tonight.
No. It would have been far worse to sit at Fame and hear about all of this second hand and late, and not know what happened to Tam, Etric, and the others. He suddenly thanked the Gods for putting him out here with them.
He hurried through the narrow hall just ahead of Banning and reached a stairwell leading down to a storage area. The others had only just started to go down in to the storm drain. Zoe stood at the bottom of the steps, well away from the others, but ready to move. Otaka, Damien and Kamil must have already dropped down through the dark hole.
"You next Tam,” Etric said. “Go! You're the reason we're down here, you know!"
"Oh, hell. Yes.” Tam looked frustrated and angry again. But he slipped over the edge of the opening and down. Crystal heard the splash of water.
"How deep is it?” he asked, herding Zoe and Banning closer. Ylin lowered Rqua and went right after him, Tathis next.
"About knee deep,” Etric said. He looked at Zoe.
"She's a free trader with a nice little sonic pistol."
"Excellent. Prince Sharton—"
He moved quickly as well. No panic there, at least.
Crystal looked back to see Sand and her people at the top of the stairs now. Istanan followed without a pause and even Banning without trouble.
But by then they could hear sounds upstairs that had to be more than just the few people left behind.
"They've nearly gotten the door open!” Sand shouted from the top of the stairs. Crystal looked up to see her shepherding her three crewmen down to the steps, though they didn't go any farther than half way.
"Who the hell are they?” Etric asked, worried again.
"People who do not want to get caught up there when the IGs come in. Sand and her crew ran a smuggling ship that recently got taken out. They'll stay until we're down, and then they'll head the other way."
"Ah, good—"
Something exploded above them. The walls shook and Crystal could hear shouts from below. Sand threw herself back from the door and laser fire scorched the wall where she had been. Etric looked up—
"You better get moving!” Sand warned. “They're coming fast—"
"Come on!” Etric shouted and waved toward them. “Get down here!"
She didn't need a second invitation, and neither did her people. They came straight down the stairs, one of them with his arm held so tight against his chest, that Crystal knew either the arm or his ribs had been injured already.
"Some strangers coming down!” Etric warned down the hole. “Get moving! We'll be down right after them!"
The first of Sand's people went over the edge and splashed in the water, and then a moment later Sand and the other one helped their injured friend down.
Sand pushed the other forward and looked back at Etric and Crystal. “Thanks."
And then she went. The sound up top had gotten much louder. People shouted—but Crystal knew they could do nothing to help them.
"You—” Etric said, waving Zoe over. She had been standing, her own weapon in hand, guarding the stairs.
"Zoe,” she said with a bow of her head as she reached the opening.
"Yes. Zoe. You next."
Zoe nodded and slipped down. Crystal couldn't hear the sounds in the water now because of the bedlam above them. Shadows passed the door up top.
"Go, Crystal—no, just go. I have one more trick that will hold them back for awhile!"
Magic! Crystal trusted him. He slipped over the edge and down into the darkness.
The drop turned out to be farther than he had expected, and the water far colder than he liked. The scents were not nearly as good as those in the kitchen, either. He hit with a bone-wrenching stop and scrambled out of the way, trying to look back up over the edge to where Etric still stood.
"What the hell is he doing?” Zoe said, sounding frantic. “He doesn't have a weapon—"
"He has something to slow them down,” Crystal said and tried not to sound panicked. He could see Etric, and saw the movement of his hands. He also saw a flash of laser fire—
But Etric did his work, and then came down, very quickly. Down and fell—and Zoe grabbed him to pull him back up. The only light came from the opening above them, and it didn't stretch far.
Etric gasped for breath, and held on to Zoe—not something Crystal wanted to see right now with a total stranger. However, whatever Etric had done had worked. He could hear muted shouts, but no one came through the opening.
"Which way?” Crystal asked frantically looking one way and the other.
"Your group went toward the port,” Zoe said, waving her weapon that way. “The others headed back the other way."
"Okay. Let's go. Etric?"
"Go, yes,” he said. He looked back at the opening. “Spell like that takes a hell of a lot of energy."
That got Zoe's attention, though she didn't say anything. Wise woman—this wasn't the time to stop and talk about magic, reality, and whether or not Etric's powers could stand up against the IGs’ lasers.
They caught up with the others all too soon. Otaka had a small light cube in her hands, but she had something else far more interesting across her shoulder.
"Where the hell did you get the laser rifle?"
"The owner of the restaurant. He gave it to me, along with these two pistols,” she said, handing those to Etric and Crystal. Etric looked better for it. “Apparently competition is rough in Amora."
That won a scattering of laughter, even from Tam. They barely paused a moment before starting out again. Crystal and Etric, with Zoe at their sides, slowed, letting the others move ahead. Light came from occasional grates—but those didn't look out into the streets. He would have blown the hell out of one and climbed out if he'd thought they'd have a clear run at getting free. But even Etric looked up and shook his head.
"At best, we'd only get themselves trapped in another building."
Crystal couldn't imagine where they would end up, or how they could get out, especially since he could finally hear the IGs coming behind them.
"I know,” Etric said when Crystal lifted his chin in a signal. He had, at least, stopped gasping. “I couldn't hold it any longer."
"They're going to catch up,” Zoe said. She paused as they went around a slight curve. “This isn't my place to say anything but—"
"But this is as good a place to make our stand as any,” Crystal finished. Etric had already stopped as well. In a moment Tam had stepped back to join them.
"Don't say it,” Tam said when both he and Etric started to speak. “No, not this time, when we are going to have to face them. This is my place and my war."
Crystal nodded and put his hand against the damp, slimy wall. He hated places like this, but at least it gave them a chance to make a stand, rather than running along and making interesting, helpless targets. He tried not to think about the people they had left behind. They'd done the best they could for them, and bringing them along would not have helped—except to stand them here and hoped they slowed the IGs’ pursuit. None of them threw lives away that easily.
"Tam—” Etric began, but then stopped whatever he meant to say. They could hear the soldiers coming closer, sloshing through the water at an even pace.
"Just keep in mind that if we don't keep you safe, we might as well go join Crystal's line of work,” Etric said, checking the power supply on his pistol just as Crystal did.
"Am I supposed to be insulted by that?” Crystal asked. He stepped back, steadying his arm, ready for the first sign of the enemy.
"I don't know,” Tam said. He did step back behind Crystal, but not nearly far enough to be safe. “I would be worried about the competition, though."
Zoe laughed. At least she didn't panic. Crystal couldn't say that he felt nearly as calm, but then he knew that the IG captain would kill him first chance he got.
"Zoe, go tell the others that the IGs are nearly here, and remind them if they do plan to attack to keep in mind that both their captains and their prince are back here,” Etric said.
She nodded and moved off, hurrying through the water. Good thing they trusted her—for whatever reason that might be just now.
Otaka turned up with her laser rifle. She held it out to Tam, but he shook his head. “No, you probably actually know how to use that weapon. I'd end up shooting our own people with it."
"Seems unlikely, given your knowledge of weapons,” she said.
"I tend toward more subtle devices,” he answered and pulled a knife from his boot. “I don't think they're going to help much this time, though."
Etric lifted his hand for silence. Their friends made noise somewhere else down the tunnel. Purposely, Crystal thought, to make the IGs think that the entire group still moved. Good people. He hoped they all survived this.
Zoe came back, her own little gun in hand. Not much good in long range battles, since the sound tended to disperse, but if anyone got in close, they were in for a nasty surprise. The same was true with Tam, of course.
No telling how many they faced. Too many—
Etric moved first. He stepped around the corner whispering and threw a bolt of lightning down the tunnel that hit—
Too many IGs there. Etric put down at least half a dozen with that blow, but others came right behind, and Etric had gone to his knees. Crystal leapt forward and fired the pistol as he grabbed his friend's arm and pulled him back toward the little safety of their corner. Otaka fired over and around them and didn't miss.
The weapons surprised the enemy.
The IGs had started firing as well. Crystal felt a burn along the back of his thigh, and he heard water splat and steam all around them. That might help, in fact. Laser weapons didn't work well in fog.
Zoe caught hold of Etric and pulled him back again. Crystal, slightly breathless, nodded his thanks.
They had only begun the battle. Etric got to his feet again and fired as someone appeared at the corner, sending that one sprawling into the water. The next ones were not so easy to stop—four, five, six—Zoe moved in, her sonic against the chest of the first one, who gasped and fell dead in the next moment. Tam got one with a knife through the throat, but more were coming—
In a moment they were fighting hand-to-hand, and even with their own people coming back to help, Crystal knew they couldn't win. He saw Damien hit and go down, but Prince Sharton grabbed him out of the water and pushed him back toward Tathis and Ylin. They had Rqua still, trying to shield him and protect—
Damien moved, still alive. Crystal barely noted it as he threw himself back into the battle—and realized the IGs had trouble. One he had grabbed by the arm suddenly fell dead at his feet. He grabbed the fallen soldier and stripped not only his weapon—they'd been doing that and handing them back to the others—but a blue cube he'd found as well; he lit it for a brief moment to see—
Sand and her three men. Then dark again.
"We have allies!” Crystal shouted, warning the others. “Make certain the ones you take down are in uniform!"
"Thanks, Captain Crystal!” Sand said, and sounded sincere.
Hell, they saved Crystal and his friends. Few of the IGS even still stood. They must have silently come up behind the soldiers and taken down half a dozen before anyone noticed. The last of the men fell in the next couple moments.
"More on the way,” Sand warned breathlessly as she stopped by Crystal. She put a hand on the wall, and then grimaced at the feel of slime. Her people stood close behind her, maneuvering around the bodies that choked the water. Crystal shivered at the sight. He was not a soldier. “A whole contingent behind you, from what we could tell. I hope you have a way out of this mess."
"Thank you,” Tam said with a bow of his head toward her. She looked startled. Crystal had forgotten people often had that reaction when they met the Prince.
"Let's move,” Crystal ordered. Zoe had hold of Etric, who swayed still, weakened by so much use of magic. “And no, we don't know where we're going."
"Oh, great,” she said, but didn't sound particularly surprised. “Do you mind the company?"
"Not at all,” Crystal said. “Thank you."
"I don't like IGs,” she admitted with a worried glance at Tam.
"I'm rather not fond of them myself,” Tam said. “And I do intend to have words with Kadrien about dealing with the bastards."
"Emperor Kadrien,” Sand said. They had started moving, finally.
"Yes."
"Who is missing."
"Only until we find him,” Tam said. “And we will."
Sand, wisely, didn't argue. Instead she put an arm around the waist of one of her people who looked likely to fall over at any moment. The new man wouldn't slow them down, and Crystal would not leave him or any of Sand's other people behind any more than he would have left Rqua or Damien.
"They're going to be worried about catching up with us again,” Tam said. “They'll know we stripped the others of weapons."
"Good point,” Etric said. He had started to walk better, but even in the dull light of Otaka's cube, Crystal could tell that his friend looked pale as death. “They'll bring in the big weapons and wipe out half the city, if that's what they have to do to get us."
"We need to get off-world.” Tam slowed to walk beside Crystal and Etric. Some of the others, including Zoe, moved behind them to act as guards, and Crystal helped Etric now. “I have an indelicate question to ask you, Crystal. You know that I'm rather open minded about such things, given my position in court—but—do you have any practice in pirating ships?"
Crystal laughed, startling them all. The question did point out the obvious, that they would not be going back to Freedom or Fame—and that cut at him. Still, Tam had a point.
"I hate to disillusion you, Prince Tamaris, but even our fine, upstanding Free Trader captain here has had practice at pirating ships,” he said.
"Etric has?” Tam said, looking so totally surprised that it even set Etric laughing this time.
"Crystal and I pirated a ship together, as it happens,” Etric said. He pulled away from Crystal and looked steady. “A long time ago—but don't look so worried. We stole it from the slaver, Wes Ias, when we escaped from him—a situation much like this, in fact, in some ways. Except that I am not going to let Crystal out of my sight this time."
"Ah, yes. Good,” Tam said. He sounded much relieved. “What do we do?"
"Decide what kind of ship we need,” Crystal said. “And find out what's in port, and what we're able to grab. We've crew enough to handle anything we can get our hands on—providing we can take it."
"We're heading in the right direction,” Etric said. He looked up. “But we need to find some way to be discreet. We need—I need Kamil. Can someone send him back?"
Crystal heard the word spread, and in a moment Kamil came back. He looked bedraggled and wet, and a cut bled on the side of his face. He looked at Etric, curious.
"It's too dark. He can't read lips,” Etric mumbled, and brought a bit of magic light up, settling it into the air above him, startling them all.
Sand looked back, her eyes gone wide. “What the hell have I gotten myself into?"
"Something ... interesting,” Tam said. “Something unusual."
And she laughed, a sound of delight that didn't surprise Crystal much. Kindred spirits in many ways. Etric had already started signing to Kamil, who nodded once, twice. The light Etric had created began to flicker, showing his weakness even more than his trembling hands did. In a moment, Kamil lifted his own hand, and touched the Captain's shoulder.
"I understand,” he said softly. “I'll find what we need."
He turned around and started back toward the front of the group. Etric let his extra little light die, and they went back only to the soft glow from Otaka's cube.
"Kamil is an exceptional psi,” Etric said to Sand. “He's going to try to find us a nice quiet little place within the port grounds where we can slip out."
"We're going to hit the port security net pretty soon,” Otaka warned. “I assume you can get us past that, Crystal?"
"Yes, I think so,” he said. No promises at this point.
Whistling sound—
"Down!” Otaka warned.
They all dropped into the mucky water. Something exploded overhead, raining stinging bits of rock and debris around them. When Crystal looked up, Otaka surged to her feet, firing again. He thought a group retreated very quickly.
"Yeah, they're getting serious,” Otaka said, brushing at some blood on the side of her face. “That could have brought half this tunnel down—"
"We can use that,” Zoe said quickly. “Bring it down. My sonic on the roof—it might slow them down following us! But we need to move quickly."
"Let me see—” Etric said. He lifted his hand, his eyes going closed. And swayed, but he nodded. “No one over head. Weakness right above us, Zoe—"
"I've a couple sonic tabs we can place,” Sand said. She began to literally crawl up the wall. “The rest of you get back!"
Zoe braced her arm and pointed upward. Sand's people remained by the wall, waiting for their captain, but the rest of them, including Etric, Crystal and Tam, retreated to the next curve—but no farther.
"We're going to leave the ships behind,” Etric said softly, looking at Crystal.
"I know. The IGs will have them watched. We don't dare go near them. I hope we'll get them back—but we have to get Tam out of here, and that's what we'll concentrate on."
Etric nodded and fell quiet again when Tam came closer. Besides, they had other things to draw their attention. Sand and her people came scrambling back—and stopped at the sight of Prince Tamaris in their path—
"Just get back here with the rest of us!” Tam said. “Is it set?"
"Zoe will set it off,” Sand said, moving back around the curve and urging the others to go with her. “I hope that woman can run like hell—"
Sound. Sharp, painful for a moment—Crystal winced. And then he realized that dust and debris filled the air, choking him.
"Zoe!” he shouted, and coughed.
"H-here,” she said, and staggered toward them, a hand on the wall. He couldn't tell if she was injured or not, but Sand took hold of her and they started away again. Crystal looked back and saw the tunnel filled with rock, brick, and some wood. He hoped it held the IGs back for a little while.
"Good work, ladies,” he said, putting hands on both their shoulders.
"Ladies, right,” Sand said. She snorted. “But I'm glad it helped, ‘cause it was our asses with yours at this point."
"Glad for the allies,” Etric said. “Especially resourceful ones."
Crystal nodded. He tried not to doubt that they'd get out of this mess, but right now he couldn't imagine how they were going to get Tam off world, let alone go and find the Emperor and save him.
When had his universe gone so mad?
"Crystal?” Tam said.
"Trying very hard not to doubt that a group with this many ... talents won't find a way out of this mess,” he admitted.
"Well, let's see how well you do, Captain,” Otaka said. “We've reached the Port Net. If you can't get a hole opened in it, we're pretty much stuck here for a while—until the IGs dig through and pull us out. Or leave us here."
"Ah. Well."
He moved ahead of the others, Otaka at his side. She held the cube out and even brightened it now so that he could clearly see the area head. The grid glowed with deadly power, spread out across the watery opening and up the walls. He ran his fingers along the edge of the stones, feeling out the area.
"Good. This won't take me long. I suggest the rest of you rest, take care of wounds, and get ready. Once we're inside the port, it might not take Kamil long to find us a place. Be ready for whatever trouble we might find there."
Others nodded. Glancing over the group, his worries disappeared. How could he doubt them? All they had to do was get their hands on a ship....

Chapter 5

They had gone to the Snowland Fortress, surprising Kadrien when he recognized the spacious, elegant interior. Still on Grant, at least, and that gave him some hope of rescue, even though no one would know his location. And Tabor, for all his comments about not understanding this ‘reality,’ knew enough to destroy the computer and communications equipment. He made a rather impressive show of it, with a single wave of his hand that melted equipment into so much junk. Kadrien wasn't even certain Tabor realized how impressive that moment had been.
After that they went to the nice, private quarters and Kadrien showed him how to work the climate controls and dispensers. Food was plentiful here, though nothing fresh. There had been rumors that his father sometimes brought people to Snowland, well away from the light of court—where things might happen that he didn't want others to know about. Kadrien hadn't been here since he had turned ten.
He didn't like snow, and he certainly didn't like being here with no way out. On the third night he and Tabor had dinner together for the first time. The man—man?—seemed troubled. Tabor picked over his food, shaking his head now and then as though having a conversation with someone Kadrien could not see—which, all in all, the Emperor wouldn't have found surprising either.
Kadrien couldn't remember ever having had a meal with just a single person. No servants, no guards. And he certainly wasn't used to being ignored.
His arm hurt to distraction. Just a sprain, he had decided, and not a break. He'd wrapped it as best he could, and sat with it in his lap as he ate. And he waited.
"I'm sorry,” Tabor suddenly said.
The words shocked Kadrien, who couldn't decide why the man said them, and why now—or what they might mean. He looked across at the person who had brought him to this godforsaken spot, and wondered what the hell Tabor was talking about this time.
But training kept him from asking questions, even now. He only gave a short nod.
"I don't understand how things work here,” Tabor said. He sat aside his fork and spread his hands, palms down, on each side of the plate. “You are the emperor. You are the person in charge of all this ... madness."
"I am the head of the government,” Kadrien said. He gave a little shrug. “And in theory, I run it all. But the spaces are too wide, Tabor. There's no way that I could personally oversee everything."
"No magic,” Tabor said. “Ah. Yes. And even the machines have limitations."
"I suspect that even magic has limitations, since you have made no move to take over."
"Yes. Excellent point,” Tabor said, sounding entirely too reasonable.
"What do you really want here? You obviously don't want my throne."
"Throne? Me? Rule here?” Tabor looked so appalled at the idea that even Kadrien laughed this time, and Tabor grinned. “No, I do not ever want to rule here. Your universe is too wide, too daunting. And your people don't really believe, you know."
"Believe?” Kadrien asked. He felt at ease suddenly. Logically, he knew Tabor had no intention of killing him. He might even convince the mage to take him back to the palace if he wanted cooperation.
Tabor stared at him for a long moment. He pushed away his plate.
"Your people do not believe in the gods or the demons. Not anymore. I think you must have once, but it is so long in your past that they are just words to you now, and you don't realize the power that lies there, just beyond the whisper of sound."
"Gods and demons,” Kadrien said, feeling any sense of normality slip away again.
"I—I hope that you never have to learn, Emperor Kadrien.” Tabor looked worried at those words. “I hope that Gix never comes here for you. He's lost Abby, and he's lost Sandryn. He badly wants the power of a noble to serve him, to be his slave for eternity. A blood sacrifice of someone as powerful as you would tie the demon lord very tightly to this universe. I don't think he'd find it much more to his liking than I do, but he would be here, and he would have power. He knows no bounds, Emperor Kadrien. He would do as he wished, and leave death and destruction in his wake. We do not want him here."
"No, we don't,” Kadrien said. He tried to believe, but the doubt must have been plain in his words. “So how do I keep him out?"
"Let us hope that I somehow find the Kiya first. The last piece led to you. The Kiya... I don't know why the Kiya would come to you, but I can only hope that nothing has gone wrong. I don't normally travel in such a way, but Abby and Tristan do, and have not failed yet. So we will stay close, you and I, for a while longer. I hope that Gix is still busy elsewhere and that I find the Kiya and move on before he comes here looking for her. And for me."
"You've done something to anger this demon?"
"Oh yes,” he said. And he shuddered, this man who had shown no weakness at all. “I have done something that will anger him beyond all hope of recovery. But it is done. Eat, sir. I could heal your arm, you know—"
"With magic,” Kadrien said.
"Yes."
"No, I don't think that would be wise right now,” Kadrien answered, because he couldn't really trust such a thing from the person who had brought him here.
"I'm sorry for the trouble I have caused you,” Tabor said. Kadrien couldn't be certain if he spoke truly or not. He had survived too many years at court, where people often spoke words that had no really meaning behind them, politeness without real emotions. “I have done the best I can—and so far, it has not been enough. I need ... I need to go think for a while. I need to make decisions."
Tabor stood.
"You could take me back to my palace and let me go back to my work,” Kadrien said.
"I ... I don't think that is in our best interests,” he said. Kadrien had the feeling that the ‘our’ did not really include him, even though he had seen no other allies. “There are powers at play that will have to be watched. There are decisions that I can make ... I need time to think."
"The longer I am away from my throne, the less effective I will be,” Kadrien told him, a real truth this time. “They will already be looking into the matter of my heirs. If there is anything in my power that you need—the reason you took me—then you had better decide quickly before that power is beyond my reach. And I have one cousin who is heir and will not be happy at my disappearance. If he can track you—well, you may not want to meet up with him."
"Ah,” he said. He stood, looking troubled again. “I will keep this in mind. Thank you."
And he turned and walked out of the room. Kadrien watched him leave with a welling of frustration. He still had no idea what was going on: Demons, Gods, pieces of wood.
Magic.
He didn't want to believe in demons and gods. He pushed those thoughts aside and sipped his wine. Kadrien thought about his heirs instead, and Tam in particular. He wouldn't have thought anyone would be a match for Tam, but he rather hoped his illustrious assassin-cousin didn't go up against this ... man.
Man? Why did he keep stumbling over that word?
He shivered, in the solitude of this meal, and hoped Tabor left long before Tam showed up. His cousin couldn't be far away now. He'd only been on Silversun, after all. Gods keep him safe.
Gods? He said the word and didn't really think of the power behind it—Tabor had been right in that part: words without meaning, spoken at court. Politeness spoken without truth—but he feared he must believe in a lot of things now, and none of them particularly helpful.
He sipped his wine again, thinking perhaps he could get drunk ... but no. He wanted control. So he waited. He'd never been trained in waiting. It was as new an experience as being alone...

Chapter 6

Etric leaned against the wall by the door and listened as people went by outside the warehouse office. No one tried to come in. He thought he could hear the sound of distant boots—more damned IGs!—but they did not come closer and in a moment the sound faded.
"That's it,” Tam said, looking up from the computer across the room. The door beyond him stood open, leading into the warehouse where the others waited. “I've planted the info and keyed the IGs’ codes so that they'll be chasing their tails for a little while."
"Praise the gods for that,” Etric said. He looked at Crystal, who limped into the room, his hand tight on the arm of the only man who had been in the warehouse when they unexpectedly entered the place. The newcomer scowled and Crystal didn't look at all happy.
Great, more trouble.
"What's your name?” Tam asked, looking at the square-faced, sullen man.
"Don't have to tell you people anything,” the stranger said, eyes narrowing. “Don't want the IGs to think I worked with you."
"Very wise,” Tam said, standing. He brushed at his clothing, drawing the man's look to the expensive cloth and the jewels on his fingers. “Except, of course, that I am Prince Tamaris, heir to the Empire—and unless I find my cousin damned fast, I could in fact be Emperor. The IGs may not be the people you need to fear at the moment. Now, shall we try this again? Who are you?"
The small eyes narrowed to near slits and he must have put the entire situation together and realized that it would probably take a hunt for the heir to bring so much trouble from the IGs. Etric saw the change in his face; sullen to calculating. He didn't like it much better.
"Quan,” the man said. “I'm Quan, the manager of this place."
"Good. Thank you,” Tam said, and in a tone that did not really sound as though he cared much. “You will, you understand, be under close watch while we stay here. Do not do anything to upset my people. Any one of them is apt to kill you without a second thought. We are in a desperate situation. You can survive, if you are smart."
Quan nodded, his thin black hair falling forward. Crystal still had hold of his arm, but Otaka showed up at that moment. He nodded to her. “Would you mind taking this man in your care and making certain he's watched?"
"Not at all,” she said. She took the laser rifle from her shoulder and waved it toward him, and Quan took that very seriously. He went with only a quick glare back at the rest of them.
"Well, it could be worse,” Etric said. “There could have been a dozen of his kind in here. I don't trust him, but at least we can watch one person."
Crystal nodded. He leaned against the wall and started to straighten again when someone came up. However, it turned out to be Zoe, Sand, and Prince Sharton. Odd combination, Etric thought. But then again, they all made a rather odd group.
"Istanan and Ylin are dealing with the wounded,” Zoe said. She sounded, very oddly, as though she had been with them forever, using names and giving reports. It gave Etric a little chill, but he tried not to mistrust her for it. “He said to tell you that Damien is conscious and should be fine. Rquana is still unconscious, but no worse for the trip we took."
"Good. Thank you,” Etric said. Crystal only nodded, looking very tired and worried again.
Tam sat down at the desk once more, glancing at the computer with a shake of his head. “We need to get out of here, and quickly. We don't want to give the IGs time to get organized. We need to take a ship. I've called up a list of what's in port. We'll have to find which one would be easiest to rush—"
"Oh no,” Zoe said. “Not rush, not with everyone expecting something like that”. She looked reasonably appalled. “We need a really good comp tech to create a diversion."
"What kind of diversion?” Sand asked. She didn't look inclined to the ‘rush’ method either, Etric saw. Good. He wasn't too keen on the idea either.
"The best would be to feed in an engine overload alarm, but it would have to go out over all the frequencies, and look genuine enough to scare the hell out of people,” Zoe said with a nod.
"You are a Free Trader?” Crystal said, looking at her again.
"I said I had just left a Free Trader ship,” Zoe corrected. She smiled. “I grew up on a fringe runner that had a few run-ins with trouble now and then. We never tried the overload trick, though we talked about it a few times. It wasn't something you could use more than once. But this might be the time to try it, if you can find someone in this group competent enough to get the work done—quickly."
"Yes, I agree,” Tam said, sounding very much as though he had taken charge right then. Then he bowed his head. “Sorry. Didn't mean to sound so prince-like there. I'm not a great comp tech, but I do happen to have some great codes I can use."
"And I remember a few myself,” Prince Sharton said. Tam looked startled and then pleased for some reason. “I'd be glad to help, if I can. Since I am from this world, I might be able to get into places that even Prince Tamaris can't manage."
"Oh yes,” Tam said, and gave up the chair for his companion. “Yes, you were always extraordinarily good with computers. Do come and join the fun."
Sharton gave one quick smile and sat down. He had been limping worse, Etric thought.
Etric nodded to Zoe to take his place at the door. She did so without comment. Trusted her again, but he still couldn't decide why, except that she seemed competent and willing to throw in with them. Maybe she did it to be on the good side of a prince heir and possible emperor. Right then he thought that wasn't even a bad reason. She was doing well at helping get them out of the mess, too.
He went into the warehouse with Crystal and Sand, leaving the two princes to do the work of getting them out of this mess—or at least part of the work. Looking at the bedraggled people sitting on the floor in the corner, Etric knew that getting this group to a ship would be a lot harder than even the act of taking one.
Banning stood when they neared, though the others mostly just looked up and nodded.
"We're going to need a plan, Banning, to get everyone to a ship. We're working on getting the area cleared—false ship engine overload."
"Oh, that would be a pretty trick,” Banning agreed. She ran her hand through her matted blonde hair and snarled when she had to pull her fingers free of the tangles. “But I see your point. How do we get there—ah—"
She had been looking around the warehouse. Now she nodded. It gave Etric some hope again.
"Crates and shipping carts,” she said, waving her hand toward the rest of the place. “We empty out some of the crates and get them on the carts, put a few of our people in them, and get them moving out toward the ship—before the alarm goes out, of course."
Crystal smiled and looked at Etric. “That's why I keep her for crew, even though she is a pain in the ass the rest of the time. She can think under stress."
"I always wonder why people don't ask me why I haven't shoved you out an airlock yet, though,” Banning said.
"The question did come to mind,” Sand said.
And they laughed. That helped. Sand seemed to be fitting in as well. Etric knew that they wouldn't be leaving her or her crew behind either. He wanted to trust these people. And he knew that he had to be careful.
How the hell had they gotten into this mess?
Banning and Crystal had started opening the top of a crate nearby, Crystal bypassing the complock on the lid. Quan made a sound of protest, but Otaka suggested that he not worry about it right now.
"Well, this is interesting,” Banning said. She pulled out a plant, all wrapped in clear plastic and held it to the light. “Black market, for sure."
"Really?” Etric said. “How can you tell?"
"Ban on export of this stuff from Silversun,” Sand said. She pulled another one out. “It's mildly narcotic, if you can synth enough from the leaves. And this stuff is pretty shoddy. These plants wouldn't last a week off-world."
"Why would anyone bother?” Etric asked.
"Quick way to make some credits,” she said with a shrug. “What else have you got here?"
They went through a few more crates, and from what Banning, Sand, and Crystal said, nothing they found was of very good quality.
"Just some cheap crook making some quick money,” Crystal said at last. They'd dumped several of the crates out on the floor. Quan didn't look at all happy about that mess.
Tam came out of the office, looked around with a little frown, and signaled them back. Etric, Crystal, Banning and Sand went with him. Sand looked as though she expected to be sent away, but right now... well, having someone else with some knowledge on how to get things done quickly, rather than legally, seemed a really good plan.
"Shar thinks he has things about ready to go, but we need to work out a few details,” Tam said.
"That quickly?” Sand asked, and looked worried.
"Shar is very good with computers,” Tam said. He shrugged, and waved toward the computer. “We need to decide which ship in port would make the best one for thinking the engines are going to overload."
"Fame,” Crystal said. “My ship. They would take it far more seriously from a smuggler's ship—might even expect some sort of trap of that sort."
Shar looked up from the computer, then back again. “Yes. Yes, that might work very well, especially since the IGs are sending a squad to break in there and to Freedom. If we can make them think that they set some trap off—"
"Oh, excellent,” Crystal said, fighting down that wave of panic at the idea of IGs boarding his ship. “Yes, that might work very well."
"We don't have much time,” Shar said. He had started typing again.
"Then we better get moving on shipping the crews out,” Banning said. She gave a nod and hurried back out to the warehouse again.
"Shipping?” Tam said. “Ah, the crates. Yes, good. That will get some of us out there, won't it?"
"The others will have to work as drivers. We'll have to be quick,” Crystal said. He looked at the computer and back at Tam. “This might work."
"It's daring enough,” Tam said. “But we still have the trouble of taking the ship itself. Even if the crew abandons whatever ship we decide on, we're still going to have to get in. I don't know if we can find the equipment to blast our way through the doors—"
"Blast?” Crystal and Sand said, sounding equally shocked. Tam looked startled.
Etric laughed, but held up his hand in a gesture of apology. It had been a good reaction, though, from their two smugglers.
"Sorry,” Crystal said. “But no. We are not going to blast our way into a ship that we intend to take up to space and out run the IGs in. I can get the airlock door open. That's not a problem."
"Oh. Good point, Captain Crystal,” Tam said. “Yes, we can stop worrying about how to get in."
"Now we only need to worry about which ship to take. We do have a good number of choices,” Shar said from the desk. He waved to the computer screen, and the others crowded around.
He'd pulled up the schematics to the port, showing each pad and the stats on each ship settled there. He'd already x'ed out three, and he tapped the screen for each one.
"Those three have repairs waiting. Nothing drastic, and we could likely get to Grant without a problem with any of them, but if we are going to pirate something, I suggest we try for the best we can lay our hands on."
"You've a good mind for this,” Tam said. “You'll fit right in with the rest of the crews."
Shar looked startled. Then he shook his head again as though dismissing thoughts about the rest of the people. He tapped two spots on the screen. They turned blue. “I am assuming that you do not intend to pirate either of your own ships, so I'm leaving those out of the list."
"As much as I would like to grab either or both of the ships, I think that would be too obvious,” Etric agreed. He saw Crystal give a reluctant nod as well.
"There are these three ships in port that I think would work best. Two of them are IG craft. That would mean we'd have ship weapons if we need them."
"Oh yes,” Crystal said, looking more intrigued. He leaned down closer, as though he could tell just by looking at the screen which one would be best. “This one and this one?"
"Yes, Captain,” Sharton said. “Which one should we take?"
Etric saw the way Crystal stared, and he looked pensive. Then he tapped one of the two spots. “I'd say the IG flagship, Justice. I don't know why, but I think that's the one we want."
"Flagship sounds good,” Etric said. “They're usually the best kept in the fleet. Any objections?"
"None from me,” Sand said. She looked pleased. “As if what I said really mattered. That is a good, relatively small craft."
"Excellent,” Tam said. His nod seemed to be the one Sharton had been waiting for. “Get us all the info on it you can, Shar. The rest of us better prepare our people."
"We can be moving in fifteen minutes,” Etric said. “Can you get this set for half an hour before the alarm goes?"
Sharton nodded, glanced at Tam, who also nodded, and went back to work. Etric didn't mind that he kept looking to the prince for orders. They appeared to be working well together.
"Not much of a rest,” Sand said. “But that's all right. Let's go pack up the crews, so to speak, and get them ready."
No one argued.

Chapter 7

As Crystal went out with the others he felt a little surge of adrenaline again. And worry. And the nagging feeling that he really didn't want Justice to be their ship... but he passed that off as his own worry about being in charge of all these people and having their fates in his hands. He couldn't imagine what had prompted him to choose the s
It was done. Time to go on to other things.
Sand had gone to her three crewmembers, who sat together at the edge of the others, bandaged now, but looking forlorn. Crystal went with her, intending to meet them since they would go on farther.
"We're going to pirate a ship,” she told her people. One of them sighed, as though they'd had just one bit of work like this after another. “It looks good—"
"But none of you are required to go with us,” Crystal told them. Sand looked back at him, startled. “We can trust you people if you want to stay behind. I can't say what will happen here—"
"Nothing good,” one of the men said. “I've been in places where the IGs are pissed at messing things up. Losing your crown prince is not going to make them any easier to work with, especially if they think he's going to be emperor and come back for them. I'd just as soon go, if you don't mind."
"I don't mind,” Crystal said. The other two nodded. And Etric, who had already given word to the others, came to stand with them as well. “I'm Captain Crystal of Fame, this is Captain Etric of Freedom. Tam is Etric's crew—yes, crew. You'd best get used to that. There are some times when we'll give him orders, and he'll act just like the rest of you and obey them. However, given the situation we're going into, it's likely that he's going to give some orders too, and you had better be ready to obey them as well."
"These three are good crew,” Sand said. “They've stuck with me when all else was lost. Navic, Wesna, and Seaton. Seaton, by the way, is an expert pilot."
"That is good news,” Etric said, looking at the man who sat in the middle of the group. Banged up a bit, but he looked capable. “Rqua is one of our pilots. His injuries left us short. It's not a long flight to Grant—but the gods know if that's all the farther we'll be going or not. I propose that we three captains plan to divide up the watches now, so that none of us are too worn by the time we really reach trouble. Crystal, first watch, me second, and Sand third."
Crystal nodded and so did Sand. She looked startled that they'd trust her.
"There is one more thing,” Etric said. Crystal thought he looked a little uneasy this time. “I am a mage. I use magic. It's best that all of you know that now, because I don't want to startle any of you later."
"Ah,” Sand said. “That's what happened. I had never thought it real, you know."
And she still didn't look as though she believed—well, right until Etric pulled a little ball of light from the air and tossed it up, letting it scatter into tiny fireworks of color. He had Sand's attention. And her crew's as well.
"I use magic. It's not all-powerful. I've used far too much today, and I'm not going to have a chance to regain my power before we head out in space. But you still needed to know."
"Yes.” She swallowed, and looked at her crew, and then back at Crystal and Etric. She grinned. “You people are pretty amazing, you know. I didn't think anything could top traveling with a crown prince."
"We've had our days,” Crystal said. “Let's start getting ready. There's not much time. You saw where we're going, Sand?"
"Yes."
"Then you'll drive one of the three carts loaded with several crates. We'll make certain your crew is with you. I'd like to put my Damien in your hands. He's injured, and he's going to need some help."
"I would be honored,” she said.
Crystal set it up, getting Damien into a cart with her Seaton—a close fit, but not bad. He had fixed the latches so that they all closed, but didn't lock. In a moment the others had taken their places in the crates, leaving only him, Etric, Sand, Tamaris, and Prince Sharton still out. Even Quan had been put in a crate, this time with Zoe. She had volunteered. Crystal would have as soon left him behind, but it didn't seem wise. They could take him at least as far as the ship.
He went back to the office and watched as Sharton keyed in orders to resume operations at the port, countermanding the IGs and locking them out of the controls for at least a little while, and then keyed in the last information that began to the countdown to the alarm.
"Fifteen minutes. Sand, start out along the north path,” Tam said, giving her a print out. “Go now and get as close to Justice as you can. Etric and Shar will follow in a couple minutes and go by a different route. Crystal, you and I will be the last out."
"You should be out first, Tam,” Etric protested.
"No, I shouldn't,” he said. “Not this time. If, by some chance, the IGs figure out that we're here, finding me may well hold them back long enough for you to get away. They want me alive, Etric. They want me in their hands. I'll risk that, and the chance that you people will be able to get me free again."
"It makes sense, Etric,” Crystal said. He looked at Tam. “Do you think the IGs have the emperor?"
"No,” he said. “No. They look like a group scrambling to recover what little power they can. A group of them might have overstepped the others and grabbed Kadrien, but as a whole, it doesn't look likely."
"You don't trust the IGs,” Etric said.
"No one trusts the IGs,” Sharton said. “Why should princes be any different? I've set the sequence. Fifteen minutes and twenty-seven seconds. Go. Be careful."
"Come on,” Etric said to Sharton. “Let's get you in a crate as well. You're far too well known locally to ride around up top with the rest of us fools."
Sharton seemed to find that amusing. Crystal and Tam followed them out, Tam looking uneasy. Crystal understood. So much could go wrong; so much that they'd decided on, and set in motion, and there was no turning back. Sand had already left with the first group.
Etric went to the next cart, checking the crates along the way, and finally climbing up on the seat. He looked back at Tam and Crystal, the last two out in the open in the warehouse. Crystal wasn't even certain which crew had gone with whom. He wasn't certain he wanted to know, in case they ran into trouble.
"You two be damned careful. Don't wait too long."
"We won't,” Tam said. “We're taking the straight path toward Justice, too, so we'll get there fairly quickly. Just don't worry so much about us that you get into trouble. You'd be very embarrassed."
Etric grinned and nodded, then kicked the power on for the cart. It vibrated—badly out of sync. Quan sure didn't do a good job here of managing things. Crystal rather hoped the man was in one of those crates in the back, and had to suffer through this ride with the others.
Etric waved and went out, the door opening as he neared, and sliding closed again. Crystal had a brief glimpse of other people outside. He couldn't see Sand and her group, but there had been IGs not far away.
The door slid shut again, and Crystal took a breath, preparing himself for the work.
"I'm sorry about all this, Crystal,” Tam said. “I never thought being what I am would ever put all of you in such danger."
"You want to know the truth, Tam?” Crystal said as he climbed up on the next cart. “I'm glad we were with you. It gives a chance to fight the good fight again."
"I never would have put my cause in that category,” Tam said and climbed up on the back of the cart, kneeling down and bracing himself by the boxes.
"You could have the lives of every person in the empire in your hands soon,” Crystal said. “If we didn't think you would do well, we wouldn't help you. It's the good fight, Tam."
"I don't want Kadrien's job. I want Kadrien back,” he said. Panic edged in around his eyes, and he took several deep breaths. “We have to find Kadrien."
"We'll do what we can. And you'll do what is right."
He nodded. “I know. I could have stopped being Prince Tamaris years ago, you know. No one would have found me. But I couldn't turn my back on it, not when I knew what some of the others were like. I will not let the other two heirs have the throne, Crystal. You should know that part. They both have tendencies that ... would put us back to the age of Kadrien's father."
"He was not a good man, was he?"
Tam looked up at him, his face bleak. “Sometime, when this is all over, ask Sharton what happened to his leg."
Oh gods. He had never thought...
"We better go, Crystal. We don't have time to discuss the past now."
Crystal turned back to the controls, keyed on the engine, and started the aircar forward. The door opened. His heart pounded too hard as they pulled out into the traffic path, but Sharton and Tam had already set even that part, and he had no trouble following the track as the computer directed him. No one thought them out of place, and the cart moved toward their goal without anyone shouting.
So far, it looked good. Of course, there would come a time all too soon when they would abandon the carts and crates, and rush for Justice.
He could see the little IG ship off in the distance. Too far away still, so he kicked the speed up on the cart and silently apologized for the jostling the others would get. Closer. He tried very hard not to look beyond Justice to Freedom and Fame, sitting on pads close to each other. He feared they would never see their ships again. He tried not to make that more important than everything else, but right now he just wished they could go back to space. He wanted to return to Delson and see his brothers. Go home, and away from the madness.
They sped closer to Justice. Heading for new madness, and it wouldn't be long before they were in the thick of it again.

Chapter 8

Etric didn't look at his watch again. He knew it had to happen soon, and watching the time would only make him more noticeable. They had already drawn a few stares as they headed toward one of the IG fighters, though they didn't steer straight toward Justice
The alarm came, startling him in mid-thought. Loud, stringent—and words yelled out over the port system. Malfunctioning ship engine. Clear the area!
He looked over toward Fame where the bastards had been cutting through the door. They dropped their tools and ran. That, at least, gave him a little pleasure.
Etric stopped the cart and leapt into the back, hidden from almost all directions, and hoping that people thought he had already run with everyone else trying to escape.
He had a good view of Justice between the crates. The bay-side airlock opened. Crew poured out. Oh yes—they were close enough to Fame to be worried.
Alarms still rang, but it wouldn't take long before someone came in hopes of saving the port and the ships here.
He felt a sudden rumble in the pad—someone lifted! Now that showed true stupidity and panic. However, it gave them all even better cover as everyone turned their attention to that distraction.
He hit the side of one box. Zoe popped out, holding tight to Quan and with her pistol in hand. Quan didn't look any happier than he had before.
"My. Someone panicked,” Zoe said, looking upward. “I hope everyone got clear of that pad before they kicked the engines in."
"Yeah, me too,” Etric said. He took hold of Quan and dragged him out of the box. He felt the temptation to let the man go just then, but the IGs were too close still. He would be going to the ship with them, at least.
Others had climbed out of the rest of the boxes: Istanan, Tathis, and Kamil. Etric climbed off the cart and started toward the ship, and they moved in quickly around him, slowed as much by Quan, who protested, as by Istanan, who limped along as quickly as he could.
Etric could see Sand and her group moving around the side of a ship, some distance away, but making good time. And he finally spotted Tamaris and Crystal, which put him in a much better mood. They were nearly to the ship already. Etric picked up the pace for his group, glad to see Kamil helping Istanan. Zoe said something to Quan, waved her pistol, and got him to move more quickly.
They had already started to draw notice. Damn. He had hoped to at least reach the pad, if not the airlock, before someone wondered what the hell they were doing. Still, better than getting caught in tunnels or warehouses. Here they had a way out in sight. They only had to—
And he saw disaster strike, though not at his group. Crystal and Tam had brought their people—Banning, Sharton, Otaka—right up to the pad and almost to the airlock door when it suddenly opened, and two more IGs came out.
The guards looked like they hadn't expected to find anyone there—but they quickly knew what it meant. One of them brought up his laser and fired—
Etric yelled. It would do no good, of course—but he screamed something as he ran, leaving the others behind. He saw it happen. The man aimed at Tamaris—and Crystal shoved him aside—
Crystal was hit. Banning killed the man and his companion, and grabbed Crystal up in her arms and kept going toward the airlock.
Oh hell, oh hell—
But by the time he reached the ship, Crystal was back on his feet, though Banning held him there with one hand, and Etric could see a bad burn across his forehead—
And Crystal obviously couldn't see.
"Gods, Crystal—"
"Etric, good,” he said. Crystal's voice still sounded calm. “Don't panic. Banning says it just looks like I'm flash blinded—it will clear up. Even faster once we get inside the ship and get to the med unit. And I can still get us in. I'm used to doing this work in the dark, you know."
"I'm sorry,” Tam said. “Damn—"
"Stop panicking!” Crystal ordered again. He gently rubbed at his eyes, and shook his head. “Banning?"
"Here,” she said, and put his hand against the palm lock. “Quickly, Captain. The rest of the crew are almost here, and we don't want to be caught now."
"G-good point,” he said. He closed his eyes. Etric just held his breath and watched as the others gathered. They must have seen what had happened as well, but they kept their places, ready—even as IGs yelled and started their way—
"There,” Crystal said. He sounded breathless as the airlock door opened. “Get me inside to the inner door. I'll get both open—"
Banning hurried him in. Zoe shoved Quan inside and then snagged Prince Tamaris as well. He started to argue. Didn't—
Kamil caught hold of Etric, signed quickly, signed again—
"Oh hell. Kamil says there's still someone inside the ship. Maybe two and at least one a psi. He can sense them, but it's very confusing!"
"Great,” he heard Crystal say. “More trouble."
But he had already gotten the next door open. The crew began to move in, keeping to good order, ready for trouble. Otaka remained by the outer door and she and Etric were the last two in. By then the IGs had started firing, but they were still too far away. It had only been frustration that made them react.
Etric hit the door lock and it slid closed.
"Hell. I didn't think we'd make it this far,” he said. “What do we do now?"
"Find out if Kamil can pinpoint the people,” Tam said. “Some of us will go to clear them out. The rest of you up to control and get us up."
IG flagships weren't all that large. Etric knew they would find the man before long—and they did. Kamil pinpointed him at the corridor to the right, where he had been rushing toward his own quarters.
"Time for you to leave,” Tam said as they came around the curve as the man began pounding out the code to his door. It slid open, and he would have gone in, if Banning hadn't leapt and caught him. She fought damned well. The man should have given up before he was so bloodied that they had to carry him out.
"Get him off the ship,” Etric said. “Quickly."
He still protested, but the engines had begun to rumble. They didn't have much time—and the captain seemed reluctant to go. He tried to fight Banning again, but Etric put a pistol to his chest, and the tall, thickset man finally stopped.
"You are leaving the ship, either now and alive, or once we make orbit, and dead,” Tam said. “Those are your only choices, Admiral."
Oh hell. Admiral, not Captain. Ah well, Etric thought. Just another IG when it came down to it.
"You'd never get away with killing an officer of my rank,” the man said. He looked so haughty that it made even Banning laugh.
"You had better rethink your importance to me, and quickly,” Tam said. “You know who I am. Even as crown prince I could kill you and not have to answer to anyone but my cousin. And if I don't find my cousin, the Emperor, well, then I won't have to answer to anyone at all, will I?"
The man looked pensive, as though he couldn't quite follow that logic. And Kamil—Kamil frowned and put a hand to his forehead. When Etric looked, he shook his head.
"You may think that you're powerful, Prince Tamaris,” the man said, finally giving up the fight against Banning. “But your cousin has already learned differently, hasn't he?"
Tam had a knife in hand and against the man's neck before he could even breathe again. Banning even pulled back in haste and surprise.
"What do you know about Kadrien's disappearance?"
Tam's voice had gone very cold and hard. Etric had never heard that sound from his friend before, and even the Admiral paled this time. And Kamil—Kamil looked half ill. But he reached out and put a hand on the Admiral's head, startling both men for a moment. Then he shook his head.
"No. No, Tam,” Kamil said, his voice soft as usual. “He said it only to upset you, and to make himself important. He knows nothing about what happened to Emperor Kadrien."
The shock on the man's face confirmed that Kamil had caught at least the essence of truth. Tam pulled back his blade and shoved the man back into Banning's hold. She took him away this time, Kamil going to help. And the Admiral didn't argue at all. Oh, what other secrets might Kamil have picked up—but it didn't matter. They just wanted away, and they hadn't much time left.
"Damn, damn,” Tamaris said softly, the blade slipping back into his sleeve. “I had hoped—"
"Yes, I know. But we better get up top. We have no more time, Tam. We really don't want to give the IGs a chance to come after us."
Tam nodded and hit the lock on the captain's quarters, and the door slammed shut. “He wanted something out of there badly enough to risk being blown to hell to get it. I'll see if I can find out what later. Let's go."
By the time they went back around the curve they found Banning and Kamil had just shoved the captain out the door and were rushing toward the control center as well. Kamil didn't look any better for it, though.
"Psi, Captain,” he said without any prompting. “I think the Admiral had some psi powers. I could feel ... something! But it's gone quiet now. Gone. I think it went with him."
"Or there could be someone else on the ship?” Etric asked.
"Could ... but I don't feel a person. I could be wrong.” He spread his arms in a gesture of frustration.
"You did well, Kamil,” he said, and then signed it again, because they were rushing up the curve toward control and he might not have seen it said. “You did very well."
He still looked troubled, but said no more.
"Be sure to pass the word that we may have someone else aboard,” Etric said to the others. Banning and Tam both nodded.
They reached the crew's lounge, and found many of the people already there and belted down for the lift off. He waved Kamil into a seat and he settled without argument, still looking pale. Etric went on up the rest of the short distance to the Control Deck.
They had settled Crystal back from the boards, and someone had put a med pad over his forehead. The burn didn't look good—but he had gotten them here.
"All go?” Etric asked as he slid in at the pilot's controls, Seaton moving out of the way very quickly and without complaint. “Everyone aboard?"
"Full count, and then some—thank you for taking us in,” Sand said with a tap on his arm. “All go, Captain Etric. And we better go quickly."
"They're firing up weapons in the other ships,” Istanan reported from his place. “I don't think we want to be around for that."
"No. Launch in one minute."
He had scanned the boards, checked the read outs—noted that Ylin and Otaka now sat at weapons boards that were live. The others had keyed on their positions, registered power, safety, comm on—Banning took that one now, listening in. She'd let him know about anything he needed to know...
Etric hadn't really expected them to make it this far. He wasn't even fully prepared to take them up, especially not in a ship he'd never piloted before. Some of the codes were different, of course, but he had most everything he needed in hand to get off this damned world. After that...
He stopped thinking about what they would do next. One step at a time, and the first would be difficult enough, just to get them to orbit. He'd worry about what happened after that if they made it that far.
"We're going."
He keyed in the launch code. Gravity pushed him backward in to the chair. He thought he heard Istanan give a little gasp—hell, forgot what a launch like this would to do him—but at least it would be quick.
"Shots fired!” Otaka warned.
And they took a hit. He saw the boards go red, felt the ship quiver—but they kept going, and the boards settled, though he saw some frantic movements along the edge of his sight.
"If someone doesn't say something, I won't be responsible for what I do,” Crystal said.
"Sorry,” Banning said with a laugh. “We survived the hit."
"I can still leave you on some backwater world, you know,” Crystal said.
"You think so? I'd like to see you try,” she said with a little laugh. “We took a hit near the bay, Captain. Glancing blow, probably warped a little of the outer shell. I don't think we'll have any trouble with it. But we do have two ships moving in orbit, and they look like they could be a problem."
"Only if we are stupid enough to go near them,” Etric said. “Hell. Are you sure about the integrity of the hull?"
"No,” Banning said.
"Ah well. No choice anyway. Hold on, people. We are going to take a side route out of the orbit."
"Oh hell,” Crystal said. “Now I'm sorry I asked."
Etric looked at the board rather than the screen, but only because the keys were not in the same places as he was used to. He keyed and keyed, and hoped that people could keep the power from surging. He felt the ship turning already, and hoped that everyone in the crew's lounge had been prepared for it. He glanced once at Istanan, who looked intent on his work. No time to worry about the pull of gravity being uncomfortable for him. No time to for much of anything except to keep the arc of the ship's path high enough that they didn't lose altitude and slip back farther into the gravity well. He would never pull them back up if they did that, not with this mass.
"People on the planet are not happy with our maneuvers,” Banning said. “I think that's good."
Etric grinned and kept working. He looked up once at the screen, and saw the world moving below them, brown, blue, brown, white. He checked the other screens as well. Nothing above them. Time to move, or they'd just come out in a circle where they started, and make an even better target.
He began to change the angle of their trajectory. The damned ship fought him on it. The engines needed some calibration—would have expected better from an IG flagship with a damned admiral aboard.
"Shunting power,” Istanan said, plainly understanding the problems.
It worked. The ship responded, lifted. He checked the screens this time. The IGs were trying to move in on them, but he didn't think they were going to get more than a single shot. Up—they had to go up. He aimed toward the single small moon that hung over the pole, and let that gravity grab at them as well.
"Enemy closing,” Banning warned. “And they are well and truly angry now."
"Oh, just because we stole their prince, pirated a ship from them, and got away from their massive hunt?” Sand said. “These people just don't know fun when they see it."
"Shots fired—too wide still. Otaka—I think you might have one in your range if you care to take it,” Etric said.
"Scare them,” Crystal added. He sounded more nervous than usual, but that probably came from not being able to follow what was going on. “Take a low powered shot—not that I wouldn't mind taking some of the bastards out right now, but don't take that kind of power from Etric."
"Ah. Yes. Of course."
"I agree,” Etric said, not any happier about it. “But hell, we don't have time to stick around and do this properly anyway. Take the shot, Otaka."
She did. He watched it on the screen. It brushed the nose of the ship—probably gave them enough trouble just in that little touch.
"Good work,” Banning reported. “And nothing else in range for the moment, Captain Etric. We'll get clear. Seaton, you want to help me plot our slide points to Grant?"
They had made it out of orbit, and for the moment he could do nothing but let the ship move forward. Etric leaned back, letting his shoulder muscles relax again. They had done it, but he knew they would still be on the run.
"You know, there's a reason I'm a Free Trader and not a smuggler or a pirate. I don't like this kind of stuff."
Tam put a hand on his shoulder. “You did a damned good job, Etric. Thank you. We're off Silversun, and that gives us a real chance at survival. However, as much as I hate to say this ... I think our little romp here with the IGs is going to look like fun and games compared to finding Kadrien."

Part Two: The Price of Fame
Chapter 1

The world changed, a swirl of color and sound through which they walked for a moment or an eternity, and then they were somewhere else.
Somewhere strange. Empty. White.
Cold!
He couldn't be certain which of them thought it first, or which of them felt the dismay as they realized they had come down in a vast white field of rolling hills covered in snow.
"Oh, this is just wonderful,” Abby said aloud. And even his words sounded alien and out of place, too loud in this world of white emptiness.
"Well, at least it's not gray,” Tristan said. But he didn't sound—or feel—very assured by those words.
Abby looked back over his shoulder, as though he could see the way they came and step back to somewhere warmer, if not safer. He couldn't say that he wanted to go back, to Eliora's world, but he wasn't ready for this, either.
"We'll be fine,” Tristan said. “We'll survive some snow. Besides, there's at least a moon here. And magic, Abby. A lot of magic—I can feel it everywhere."
"I don't know if I'm ready—” Abby said, and stopped himself. He wasn't sure what he had been about to say. Ready for a change? Ready to go on? He didn't want to go on. He didn't want to go back. He wanted...
"Abby?"
"I can't even remember Ishan, Tristan. I can't remember the world where this all began—"
"Of course you can't,” Tristan replied calmly and quelled Abby's growing panic. “Abby, forgive me—but it was never really your world. You were always locked away from it, except for a brief time when you traveled—mostly in darkness. You spent the rest of the time fighting. You never had a chance to really know Ishan."
Abby didn't think that made him feel any better, and it didn't help with this place at all—
"There is something out there, Abby.” Tristan lifted his hand and reached—and Abby could feel him find a place that had walls, warmth, perhaps a little life. “We can get there."
"It's a long ways,” Abby said.
"But the moon's full,” Tristan reminded him. He reached for that magical light now instead. “Magic. That's all we really need."
He let Tristan start leading the way, while he used the Janin—an unusually quiet Janin, who barely hummed a tune—to help keep him to his feet. She felt warm in his bare hand, and he pushed the other into his shirt. The cold seeped in around him for a moment, and then seemed to disappear again—
Magic. It shouldn't have felt so odd. He only now realized how much Liora had changed him in that time he spent with her. He had forgotten magic; he had forgotten the feel of Tristan in his mind—he had lost even himself—
"It was a spell, Abby. You have to remember that,” Tristan said.
"But I never fought it."
"Of course not. It offered you everything that you had ever really wanted in life: acceptance, love, peace. And it hid the dangers from you as well. I couldn't protect you from the spell Liora had over you, but I could protect you from the rest. I did the best I could, Abby. I'm sorry—"
Abby stepped forward and put a hand on Tristan's shoulder. Emotions redoubled between them—loss, fear, worry—
"I want it back the way it was,” Abby said. “I don't want to think that she changed me, Tristan. I want to forget that I stayed so long in her shadow, and hid from my duty—"
"Oh, you never did that,” Tristan said. Abby felt a little lightening of his friend's mood. “You always remembered the real war, even if you didn't pursue it. I think you knew that the Kiya would come to you, if you stayed. I think... Abby, I think that spell may not have been all bad. It gave you rest. And you needed it. You're stronger now."
Older, Abby thought—an odd consideration. But he did feel as though he had found some maturity and maybe that was what Liora forced on him, though he doubted it had been her plan.
They had left her behind. Like all the others, he would not have to deal with her again. He'd miss Eliora and Lehan—but it was one place he would not regret never going back to.
Tristan didn't argue. “In the past, Abby. We both did what we had to. Time to move on. And a bit more quickly, I think. Even with the moon—well, it's cold here. And I'm tired from our journey. The sooner we get to that building, the better we'll both feel."
They trudged down hillsides and up the next—weary travel, though pretty in a way. As long as Tristan could keep them both warm, he didn't mind so much. He found the emptiness alluring. Peaceful.
"You know, if the Kiya was somewhere out here in the snow, I'd gladly hike all over the place to find it. No people. No complications. I'd like that this time,” Abby admitted as he reached the top of the hill. Tristan suddenly leapt over and knocked him down into the knee-deep snow. Cold swept up around him as magic died—
But before he could ask, he felt the reason. Tristan had kept a link to that distant building, and he had felt the moment when magic surged from it. Tristan had dropped his own magic, except for a little he used to try to shield the aura of power from the Janin.
A lot of magic—
"Someone leaving,” Tristan said. He dared to sit up and lift his hand into the sky. “Someone using a considerable amount of magic to leave this place. I can't follow where he went, though. Toward the mountains, I think."
"So, there are people who know magic here."
"Yes,” Tristan said. But then he shook his head. “I don't feel that there are many people using it."
"Ah, well. Maybe it's like Dacey's world,” he said, “and only a few have the ability. I hope the attitude is better, though."
"Well, whoever used magic to leave that building didn't try to hide it. I suspect, if we had been closer, it would have glowed. Abby, there's magic enough here that I think—I think I want to get us there faster, before the night is out. If we keep walking, I fear we'll be a whole day and another night walking."
"How will you get us there faster?"
"Glide, I think,” he said. He patted the snow with another whisper of magic. “A game we used to play when I was a child and my parents took me to the snow of the mountains."
"Glide?” But he could see, where Tristan touched, that the snow had turned harder, slick. He didn't really think he would trust it much—but then again, he really didn't think he would like being here in the bright day with nothing but white around.
"Trust me, Abby."
And how could he not? He sat down on the edge of the hard snow, bracing himself with the Janin, or else he would have gone sliding off down the hillside. Tristan moved up in front of him, and wrapped them both in a cloak of magic that kept them together and warm.
"Time to go,” Tristan said, and tapped Abby's arm where he held the Janin.
With some trepidation, he pulled the Janin up—
It felt like flying, but on the ground—and he couldn't say that made it any better. Down the hillside, gaining speed, Tristan pushing magic out in front of them to keep the snow hard, and then used magic behind to add more momentum when they started to slow going up the next hill. By the time they made the top of that one, they were going far faster than they had been going down the first. Down again, gaining more speed. Wind blew their hair back and Tristan laughed—
"You are crazy!” Abby said, but he laughed as well. He couldn't help it. Up and down, up and down—no faster now, but the land slipped away beneath them. They would have had a long, hard journey the other way. And while Abby didn't care much for flying—even on the ground—he still felt a whisper of delight when he saw the large building finally come into view. They wouldn't be long in reaching it either—up and down, up and down.
Freedom, Tristan thought. Abby felt it, denying at first—and then agreeing. Freedom. They could ride on the wind, with no ties, no chains,—no needs but their own. For that time from one hill to the next, it was all they needed while they outraced the moon across an alien world...
They slowed as they neared the building, Tristan noticeably weaker from the magical use, even with the moon still on the horizon. He even had trouble standing when they reached the foot of the high, windowless wall.
"Can we find a door?” Abby asked, looking both ways—the moon had started to go down, and the wall looked endless and dark.
"There's an opening higher up,” Tristan said. He stood with his back against the smooth wall—not stone or brick—an odd building. It looked as though it had been formed by some substance that surely could not be natural. “I think I can get us up there."
"Think?” Abby said. “I'd like something a little more certain than that."
"Let me rest a moment,” he said, and lifted a hand toward the moon, low on the horizon. A large moon, yellowish—Abby thought he could see swirls on the surface, like clouds. He had never thought of a moon in the same way as a world. This place seemed all the more strange for it.
"It has a lot of magic, Abby. More than many places we've been.” He took a deeper breath and nodded. “I'm ready."
"We can wait a little longer."
"If we wait, I'll have to use magic to keep us warm, and that's going to defeat the purpose. Let's go up and get inside. I can feel warmth inside. Maybe ... maybe a single person, I don't think more than one, though."
"Just one? In a place this large?"
"This one and the one who left. Could have been more leaving.” Tristan shrugged. “I don't have the feel for this place yet. I'll do better after we've both had rest. Ready?"
Abby let Tristan wrap an arm around his waist. Lift—and they flew upward. Abby didn't think he needed more flying tonight, but the top of the wall did come quickly into sight. Tristan almost lost his hold on the magic at the last moment, and they dropped a few feet before he caught hold again and brought them high enough that they could both catch hold of the wall and slip over onto a narrow terrace, still snow covered, but with wide, glass doors at the far end.
"Well... not so bad,” Tristan said, breathless, and going to his knees despite the words.
Abby helped his friend back up and headed for those inviting doors and the promise of warmth beyond. The Janin seemed ready to shatter the glass to get them in, but as they neared the doors opened, and a wave of warm air brushed over them as they stepped into a room.
Then the door at the far side flew open as well and someone stepped into the room.

Chapter 2

Kadrien had gone back to his rooms after dinner, where he sat and wondered what would happen next. The more time he spent with Tabor, the more frightened he became, because he realized how little he understood about what was going on.
Gods, Demons, Magic: they had been only words to him before. He had never thought there would be truth behind those myths. He didn't know how to judge reality any more. Tabor had disturbed his world, and then left him alone to think about things he didn't want to consider. Better to think about how to deal with the IGs. Better to think about taxes and rebellion and...
And not think about the emptiness of this place. He had never been so utterly alone in his life. What if Tabor never came back? What if ... he lived and died like this? What if he spent the rest of his life, alone in this palace, with no way to reach anyone—
Just as that panic began to rise up through his mind, he heard a sound down the hall. Not Tabor—he heard a door open and close. He stood. Stopped. Afraid to go, afraid of what he might find.
When had he started fearing everything?
That realization made him angry. He had never wanted to be like the other emperors who feared to move without guards and weapons—feared to move from one room to the next without protection. When had he started fearing to see people, and at the same time fearing to be alone?
He'd survived his father's court. Many had not, and many of his friends had left with very visible scars that no one spoke about. He had stood up to his father, and survived that madness. When had he started letting his father's paranoia take over his life? He didn't want to be like the late, unlamented emperor. Gods, better to face something here and die then go on and risk becoming that which he had despised so much as he grew up.
He stood from the chair, careful still of his aching wrist, and went to the door. Paused—but only to listen. He could hear no one in the hall. He could hear the whisper of words somewhere else, though, as well as something far stranger—music. Someone singing.
That made him curious. Curiosity felt better than fear. Kadrian walked down the hall and found the room where he heard the sound. He pushed the door open—
The two standing in the room seemed an odd pair. Not what he had hoped to find, exactly, though he would have welcomed a squad of IGs at this point, as long as they got him out of this mess.
"Who the hell are you?” he finally demanded.
And they looked at him, stunned.
"I ... I understand your words,” the taller of the two said.
Not exactly the reaction he had expected. Kadrien had rather hoped for something that made a little more sense.
"I am speaking Basic,” he said. They still looked at him, stunned. Silent. Except—except that the staff the one held kept singing.
Oh hell. More magic. He stared at the staff, stunned, ready to back away because he knew this thing that smiled at him was dangerous, and alive and not some mechanical trick. Oh no. Magic beyond a doubt.
"I don't understand why you people are suddenly showing up,” Kadrien admitted, as much frustrated as anything just then. He wanted answers, not more problems. “I don't know why you are all coming to me!"
The second man tilted his head. “Understand... better with each line. Like... like almost somewhere we've been before. I don't know. I think it luck, though, that we can speak. Much easier this time."
"True,” the other one said. He leaned against the staff, looking worn and weary. And when she started to get louder, he tapped her against the floor. She looked sullen, but dropped her song to a slight hum.
"You are here alone,” the dark-haired one said. He waved his hand. It was not a question, and Kadrien didn't even think of trying to deny it.
"I am at the moment. I had rather hoped that you were here to rescue me."
"Rescue? You are in danger?"
Kadrien leaned against the doorway and looked the two over. He wondered how they had gotten here, since no one came over the snow on foot and he would have heard any kind of vehicle. More magic, obviously. And could they take him away again in the same manner? And would he trust them if they did? He couldn't say they looked any safer than Tabor, and at least he didn't carry something like that staff.
No, he could not trust them.
But—but if they had any reason to take him away, he suspected that they could do it as easily as Tabor had from the palace. Better not to lie to them.
And they were patient, at least, while he thought it out. Patient even while they looked like they wanted nothing more than to find a nice, warm place to rest. Well, he could be a good host, at least. It might help.
"I was taken from my palace by one of your kind,” he said, and that drew startled looks. “His name is Tabor—"
The name didn't get a good reaction at all.
"Tabor!” The taller one reached for his sword. His eyes had gone wild, and Kadrien stepped back, frightened by the sudden change. “Tabor, here!"
"No,” Kadrien said. Was it good to learn this madman was the enemy of his very polite kidnapper? “No. He left."
"The magic, Abby,” the other one said. “What I felt earlier. It makes sense now, when we've felt so little else around here of magic."
"Ah. Ah.” He drew his hand back from the sword and looked, if nothing else, contrite. “Forgive me. That was—a bad reaction. I had not expected to find Tabor here, already. And we have not been introduced. I am Abby and this is Tristan. And this—” He tapped the staff on the floor again to quiet her once more. “—and this is the Janin. Be wary of her. She does not like to be touched."
"I have no intention of going near her,” Kadrien said. That won a surprised laugh from Tristan, as though he understood the feeling quite well. “I am Emperor Kadrien."
"Sir,” they said, in unison, and bowed their heads.
But he had the oddest feeling that they didn't understand the implications of the title any more than Tabor did. He wondered where they had come from, and why they were here. Maybe they'd tell him, if he was polite enough.
"Come. There are good places to sit, and some food and drink."
"No meat,” they said in unison.
"No meat. I can manage that much. But come. Tabor isn't here now. I would like... I would like someone to explain all of this to me."
"Oh yes,” Abby said. “That I can understand. It must be terribly bewildering, to have us drop in on you like this."
He looked over at the Janin. She smiled and sang louder again, her eyes bright. He didn't understand the words at all.
"Bewildering doesn't even begin to describe it,” he admitted as they followed him out of the room.

Chapter 3

Etric had the duty as Captain when they came out of slide and into the Grant system, though most of the others arrived to watch as well. Crystal, Sand, Tamaris, and Sharton arrived just before they came out of slide, along with the crew working the stations. Istanan brought them out of slide easily, though, and in the next moment Banning already had data up on the screens.
Not at all the data that they'd expected though.
"That's odd,” Sharton said. He looked from screen to screen and shook his head. “That's very odd. There doesn't seem to be anything out of place. I would have thought—we'd have some sign of trouble here."
"The emperor is missing,” Tam said. He ran a hand through his hair—an old, nervous gesture that Etric hadn't seen very often in the last year. Sharton seemed to know it, too, from the look he gave the Crown Prince. “I would have expected half the fleet here, at the very least. I don't trust calm at a time like this."
"We did come in rather quickly after the news,” Banning reminded them. “It is possible that we've beat nearly everyone else."
"True,” Tam said. He frowned and looked at Etric. “But that would also suggest something odd."
"That the IGs are not part of whatever happened here,” Etric said. “That they are not the ones responsible for the Emperor's disappearance, because they'd be ready to leap in at a chance like this."
"Exactly,” Tam said. “Hell. I would rather have something going on that I can at least understand."
"So, what do you suggest?” Etric asked.
"That we keep going, of course. Whatever happened took place on Grant. Maybe we can learn something there. Maybe Kadrien's even back, or never went missing—but I won't count on that."
"It would help if we knew what was normal here,” Banning said from her place. She scrolled through data; as far as Etric could tell, nothing looked out of place, but how would he know?
Tamaris glanced at Sharton, and away again.
"I understand, Prince Tamaris,” Sharton said, drawing his look again. “I can be of help, Captains Etric, Crystal, Sand. I know codes. Far more codes than I should, in fact."
"Do you?” Crystal said, and looked intrigued. “I'm sure Banning would love to have someone like you working with her."
Sharton laughed. “I'm sure she would. Prince Tamaris? With your leave?"
"Oh, by all means. Give them everything you can,” Tam said. “Anything that you think will help, Shar. You can trust these people."
Sharton bowed his head and took the spot next to Banning where Tathis had been sitting. The smaller man stood and stretched, looked at the screen and back at his Captain, signing quickly.
"He says he doesn't trust this calm,” Etric said with a laugh. “None of us do, Tam."
By then the others had started back to work as well. Etric watched as Sharton worked with Banning. He could tell just from the way Crystal's second sat that the information he gave her intrigued and delighted her.
Sand stood by the doorway, watching the screens. She would be taking over now. He thought she looked a little more relieved than the rest of them.
"So far, at least, no trouble,” Etric said as he walked over to stand by her. Crystal was talking with Tam now, and he wondered what kind of trouble the two of them planned.
"And that's the way I hope it will stay,” Sand said.
"You're with the wrong group, then,” Etric said. “We don't get calm very often. And I certainly don't expect much of it here. But you're a smuggler. I would think that has its moments, too."
"Oh yes, but most of the time I get to choose them.” She looked up at him. He remembered that she'd gotten that bruise not in their battle, but in one where she lost her ship. Navic was still in the medunit with Rqua, recovering from the attack on their ship. He had not asked what kind of contraband they had carried. He suspected that they'd skirted the law in more dangerous ways than Crystal and his crew.
Seaton, her pilot, came in to take over for Istanan. They seemed to get along pretty well, and sat side-by-side going over the information before the change. He liked that. It gave him confidence.
Sharton stood and patted Banning on the shoulder. She looked up and grinned and waved him away. He looked amused as he leaned on his cane, and then walked over to Captain Etric.
"I think that Banning will not be leaving her post for a while,” Sharton said. He still smiled. “I fear that I may have given her codes that she's going to want to play with for a while. But they should help us to learn what's going on in Grant."
"Excellent,” Etric said. “You had a post in the government here?"
"Oh no. Not as a Guest of the Court under the old Emperor.” His smile faded for a moment, and he shifted his weight. Etric started to say they ought to go somewhere and sit, but then he realized that shift meant something else entirely. He hoped it didn't show in his face. “I remember things too well, Captain Etric. I remember everything."
"Photographic memory,” Sand said, with a startled look at Banning, as though she only now realized what sort of information had been passed.
"Perfect memory in all ways. Photographic and eidetic. I forget nothing. I'm glad it finally came to some use."
"People at court didn't know that you had those abilities,” Etric said.
"Most never realized. Prince Tamaris did,” he said, and he looked toward the prince. “It's nice to see that he got away without scars."
"You just haven't seen them yet, Prince Sharton,” Etric said.
Sharton looked startled. Crystal laughed suddenly and draped an arm across Tam's shoulders, and Tam laughed as well. That seemed to take Sharton even more by surprise. He looked back at Etric, shaking his head.
"How can you—How can you treat him as if—"
"As if he were just another member of the crew?” Etric asked. “That's what he chose to be, Sharton. That's what he is to us. It's not that we aren't aware of his other status. We wouldn't be here, after all, if we didn't know what it meant to be one of the three heirs—but while he is with us, he will just be Tam."
"I envy him,” Sharton said softly. He looked startled by his own words. Then he looked away from the two and back to Etric. “You should never have brought him here. He doesn't deserve to have been dragged back to this damned world. This place breeds madness, Captain Etric. We should never have even left Kadrien here."
Those words surprised him coming from Sharton, who had seemed so proper until now, and a follower of the emperor, the perfect prince of a world close to Grant. Etric saw darker things in the Prince's eyes before Sharton looked away again.
"I'm sorry. That was uncalled for. I don't like Grant."
"We'll do all in our power to keep you safe,” Etric said.
He looked surprised again. “I am not your responsibility."
"No, you aren't. I think you're our friend. You're helping us to get this settled. But I'll tell you something, Prince Sharton. If Tam doesn't want to stay here, we'll make sure he has the chance to leave."
"Even against the IGs?"
"Even against an entire fleet of IGs, if we need to."
He smiled. “Good."
Sharton obviously didn't quite believe that he would be included in that protection, but he would learn, if need be. It wasn't something Etric worried too much about. Even Sand seemed to have fit in well already, though she sometimes looked overwhelmed by the entire idea of what they were doing.
Or maybe that made her the only really sane one here.
"We're at least seven hours out from real time contact,” Etric said, loud enough to draw everyone's attention. “I suggest that those of us who are not needed get what rest we can. We know there is going to be some sort of trouble when we finally do reach Grant."
"Good point,” Crystal said. He still squinted a bit when he looked toward the screens; Ylin said his eyes had mostly recovered, though he suffered from some serious headaches still from the strain. “Why waste all this energy on calm? Banning—"
"I'm not going anywhere."
"Right.” He shrugged when he looked at Etric. “Yes, I know. I'm supposed to be her Captain."
"None of us were ever fooled,” Etric assured him. “Come on down to my quarters and we'll all have a drink—Tam, Prince Sharton, you too—"
"Kind of you to invite me,” Tam said with a laugh. “Since we share quarters."
"Give it a break,” Etric said. “You could find yourself in a pod floating toward Grant."
"And you think any of you could actually get me in that pod?” he said.
"He has a point,” Crystal said. They had headed down out of the control deck, which seemed to please Sand. Apparently crowds during her watch worried her. “But it might be interesting to come up with a plan on how to do it—without getting within range of his knives, of course."
Sharton looked startled, then contemplative. Oh... now, there was a look, and he saw Tam's raised eyebrow as well. Had Sharton not realized? Crystal dropped the conversation, and since they were going past the medunit they looked in—but both Navic and Rqua were asleep.
Etric worried about Rqua. He looked better then he had when they brought him on the ship, and Ylin had worked medical magic—and Etric had used actual magic—to heal much of the wound. It left Etric with so little power that he might as well not know magic at all at this point, but he had feared to go into this trouble with Rqua so badly injured that moving him might kill him. Rqua had been conscious more than once, and though plagued by headaches seemed just about himself.
Oddly, though, he too complained about hearing a psi on board. He and Kamil discussed it, and seemed to think that it might be one of Sand's crew, and that the person didn't even realize they had the power. No use berating them about it, and saying they were making it difficult for Kamil and Rqua. Both of them said that they'd have to learn to deal with it themselves.
And they had in the past, apparently. Etric hoped it didn't bother Rqua too much while he recovered.
The group talked about the ship on the way down to the quarters he and Tam shared. They still had some trouble getting used to running in a stolen IG fighter, but it seemed in reasonable shape. Damien, Kamil and Ylin had spent some time with the engines, getting them up to spec, though. It also helped to know the quirks and limitations. None of them had ever run a ship with this many armaments, and while they might help—
As they came around the corner, Etric looked up and saw Quan at his door. The man looked at them, startled, and then surly. He stepped away, and rubbed his hand on his pants.
"Came to ask what's going on,” he said, almost a snarl.
"Well, as you can expect, we were up on deck watching,” Etric said. He suspected that Quan had known that's where they were. And the way Crystal walked over to the door's pad and looked at it—and the way Quan reddened—said a number of things again. “I do believe that you have duty now, right? Or would you rather spend the time in your quarters after all?"
The man stalked away, pausing at the curve to look back, and then disappeared. Tam followed to the curve and they could hear someone hurrying away when he appeared.
"Was he trying to get in?” Etric asked.
"Oh yes,” Crystal said. “Amateur, too. That's one person I will be very happy to be rid of as soon as possible."
"Should we confine him to his quarters?” Tam asked.
"For being a thief?” Crystal asked with a grin, and got the door open that should not have opened to anyone but Tam or Etric.
"No. For being a stupid and bad thief,” Etric said, and pushed his friend inside.
"I don't trust him,” Crystal said. He stood inside the door and frowned. “I don't trust him at all."
"Then I'll have Otaka grab him and put him away for safe keeping.” Etric went to the comm equipment, and put the call to their unofficial security officer. She seemed quite pleased with the idea, in fact. Apparently no one liked Quan.
And while he did that, Tamaris got the others to sit down on the sofa against one wall and then got out the wine and goblets. Sharton watched, finally seeing the crewman rather than the prince, Etric suspected.
Etric dropped into a chair across from them and took the last goblet that Tam held out. “Thanks. Okay, we have Quan handled. What do we do now?"
"Good wine,” Sharton said, surprised.
"Oh yes. I know why the Admiral had been so reluctant to give up this ship,” Tam said as he settled into another chair, leaning back and looking comfortable. “I've found a fortune in expensive wines, as well as a few gems. It makes me wonder how many other high-ranking IGs have been using their positions to pick up a few things here and there. And I know they weren't bought."
"Oh no, not on what the IGs are paid, even high-ranking ones,” Sharton said.
"I suspect, when we've settled everything else, that I might want you to go over this room, Crystal,” Tam said. “I want to know what else he has hidden here."
"Hidden,” Crystal said. He looked intrigued by the idea. But he also looked unexpectedly pale.
"Are you all right?” Tam said, leaning forward—worried.
"Headache came back,” he admitted. “I hope that the wine will help, in fact."
He sipped, and leaned back against the sofa, frowning now.
"You should have Ylin look you over again before we get to Grant,” Etric said.
"Stop worrying about me. Gods, Etric, we have more than enough trouble already, you know."
"I don't know,” Etric said. “It looked damned calm. Did you find anything in your codes, Prince Sharton?"
"No, nothing unusual in the first sweep,” he said. “A bit of disturbance in the patterns, but not nearly as much as I would have expected with the Emperor gone."
"Maybe he isn't,” Tam said, and sounded hopeful. “Maybe the IGs on Silversun got hold of some bad information."
"That would be the best answer,” Sharton said. “but I fear it's not the one we're going to find."
No one else argued. Etric sipped his wine. He suspected that they wouldn't have another peaceful moment like this again soon.

Chapter 4

Abby had carefully listened while Kadrien told them everything that had happened from the moment he walked out of his private rooms and found Tabor, waiting to take him away, until they showed up.
It had not helped.
In fact, if anything, Abby felt even more confused by the stories. He had not expected Tabor to seem... confused? Polite? Worried? It was not the Tabor they knew, but before he could even ask, Tristan assured him that he could sense just a hint of the demonling in the fortress.
"I don't know why he took me,” Emperor Kadrien said. “He just says that things are too large here and that he needs help to find this Kiya."
"Yes. I understand that,” Tristan said. “Tabor often goes for those in power to help him get the Kiya ahead of us. But... he's never been quite so polite about it before."
"I don't understand,” Abby said. He had both his hands around a cup of tea. Bitter stuff, but warm at least. “I don't know why Tabor would seem so different."
"We're all different,” Tristan replied, startling him. “We thought that earlier as well. Maybe things have changed, Abby. I'm not going to try and figure it out, not now. The dawn is coming, and the moon gone. I can draw no more magic, and I am so tired...."
That feeling hit Abby like a wave, his own exhaustion and Tristan's as well. He could have slept right there at the desk in the room where Kadrien had taken them after dinner. Tristan badly wanted to lie down on the bed, not far away. They both stood, startling the Emperor this time.
"Your pardon, sire,” Abby said. He bowed his head, and nearly fell, just in that movement. Tristan caught him. “We're tired. We've come a very long, long way."
"From some other reality,” Emperor Kadrien said, looking up at them.
Looking in that moment like ... someone else. Like someone they had known before, in another place. Abby stared, feeling Tristan look through him as well, both of them startled, and trying to recall someone left behind....
"Is something wrong?” Emperor Kadrien asked, looking worried.
"Your pardon,” Abby said. He bowed his head again. “For a moment—you reminded us of someone. Gods, I am tired."
"Abby!” Tristan yelped, surprised by the choice of words.
Abby silently apologized to him, and followed his friend over toward the bed. Maybe he should have been more polite in his parting from the Emperor, but right now he just felt the need to lie down and sleep for a while.
"I'll know if Tabor comes back,” Tristan said as he threw himself down on the far side of the bed, curling up by the wall. “Don't worry."
Abby settled on the side of the bed and looked across at Emperor Kadrien, who still sat by the desk, watching them.
"We trust you, sire,” Abby said. “And I apologize. But... we must sleep."
Kadrien nodded. He didn't look inclined to leave. Abby didn't mind having him there, and Tristan gave a sleeping feeling of trust as well.
So he settled down on the very soft bed, pulled a blanket up and closed his eyes, falling almost immediately into some dark empty place with only a hint of Tristan still there. Even here the feeling that they should know... something intruded into their rest. That they should see something here, obvious—
Too tired to care. He let it go, and followed Tristan into the darkness...
Slept.
Awoke, in unison, both of them sitting up. Time had passed. Kadrien still sat at the desk, but he seemed to be reading, and the day outside had gotten very bright.
Emperor Kadrien looked at them, shocked at their sudden movement.
"What's happened?” Abby asked, his voice shaking. “I can feel—"
"It's like a door opened,” Tristan said. He stood and stumbled over to the window, putting his fingers against the glass. “It's like a door opened and let in more magic than I have ever felt before, anywhere."
Magic that he grabbed, used, grabbed more—like someone half starved. Even Abby felt it—or maybe he felt something different instead—something that frightened him. He couldn't stand in that moment of understanding.
"Gift of the Gods,” he whispered. Tristan, startled pulled back from the window. “It is a gift of the Gods, Tristan, and I don't trust it. I didn't ask. You didn't—"
"We didn't,” Tristan agreed. “We didn't ask, and they can't expect a payment from us."
"Gift?” Kadrien asked.
"No gift comes without payment,” Abby answered. He stood finally, and went to the window. He could feel the door closing, but the magic stayed, powerful enough to make even him feel stronger. It helped and he couldn't turn it away, even if he had wanted to. “I would not ask for a gift. I wouldn't want the gods involved in anything I do."
"But something happened,” Tristan said. He shook his head. “I don't trust it. But it's done, Abby."
"And now ... we can only wait to find out what it means."
Tristan agreed, silent and worried.
And waiting...

Chapter 5

Crystal had left the others to drink their fine wine, and retired to his own quarters—the ones he shared with Prince Sharton, though they were rarely in them at the same time. He tried not to feel annoyed about Etric hovering over him all the time. It wasn't Etric's fault that he'd been hit by another of those damned headaches.
And it wasn't Etric's fault that he'd felt so uneasy from the time they'd pirated the IG ship. He couldn't even say why it bothered him so much. He had done some rather... unusual things in his time. Dangerous things, and for far less reason than this.
He did know he wanted out of this ship. He wanted Fame back, and hoped to hell it hadn't already been gutted, the parts scattered to the gods knew where. He knew, no matter what, Tam would replace it. He knew Tam wouldn't even blink at the cost—but damn, he had worked hard for that ship.
But... but, he could not regret having made the decision to help Tam, even if it did cost him Fame.
He tried to keep that in mind as he looked over the logs, including a very amusing note from Ban saying that they needed to grab Prince Sharton for their crew before someone else did.
His head hurt. He thought about going to his bed, and ended sitting there, leaning back, and not thinking about much of anything at all for a while.
And that's where he still sat when Sharton came into the room, startling him. The Prince looked worried and bowed his head in apology.
"I'm sorry. I thought you'd be asleep by now, and wouldn't hear me. Why aren't you in bed?"
"I—I don't know,” he confessed. He started to get up. His head hurt too much, and decided to stay sitting after all. “Don't let me keep you up."
"You don't look well, Captain Crystal. Maybe—"
"I'm fine. Stressed, but fine. How are you doing? You don't seem happy about the idea of going back to Grant. Why are you here?"
Sharton looked startled, and then settled into the chair across from the desk, a bit more relaxed than usual. Crystal wondered just how much more of that very fine wine they'd had after he left—but he knew neither Tam nor Etric would go so far as to get drunk.
However, Prince Sharton certainly looked more relaxed then he had before.
"I'm going for Kadrien, of course. Just like Tam is."
"Kadrien was your friend."
"Yes, he was. And is. And he did something for me that I will never be able to repay. He let me go when his father died.” Sharton reached toward his leg, drew his hand back, but it had been too obvious a move, and the prince knew it.
"I won't ask,” Crystal said.
"The emperor enjoyed inflicting pain on others. And he liked ... to see the results. He was not an easy man to live with."
"We had no idea,” Crystal said. He felt a little chill, as though something evil had crept into the universe and he hadn't been watching. “How could he get away with it? Why would people let him?"
"Because he favored the IGs, and as long as he had the IGs at his back, no one could stop him. I don't think he quite planned on dying."
"And what do you plan on doing?” Crystal asked. “Are you going to take over the rule of Silversun?"
"No. I'm a third son, which is why I got shipped off to Grant to begin with. I think that might have been why the Emperor took such joy in tormenting me, too. He knew that it didn't matter if I never went home."
"But you did."
"Yes. And I traveled as well, and went home again. It was by chance that I had returned to Silversun when you and your friends showed up. And I don't know what prompted me to go see Tam. It's not that I ever sought out reminders of my stay on Grant."
"Maybe you just wanted to see another survivor."
"Perhpas. I bet you think I'm crazy."
"Yes, I do. And I think you fit in rather well. Banning left me a note. She says I should offer you a spot on the crew."
He looked startled. And looked away as though he feared what Captain Crystal would see in him.
"So, it would interest you? Working on the ship of a smuggler?"
"Prince Tamaris seems to think you're all right. Why should I judge you?"
"Because Tam is Etric's crew, and he's a very safe and sane free trader."
"I have had the feeling since I met up with you people that his designation as a free trader is more cover than reality."
"Well, probably true. But still, I'm the one asking you to crew with me."
"I was under the impression that princes make you nervous."
"They do. So do mages. I've managed to get used to both."
"Did Banning tell you that I have a perfect memory? That I know codes I've only seen once, and never forgotten?"
"Good gods!” That did take him by surprise. “Really?"
"That's what I was doing with Banning. I thought you must have realized."
"No. Not, at all."
"Then why did you offer me a post on your ship?"
"Because I think you would make a good crewman. Because you worked well with Banning, and she's damned hard to get along with. And because I like you."
He looked startled. Then smiled. “I... I think I might like to try it, Captain Crystal."
"Excellent! I'll key the good news up to Banning so she can stop fretting.” He sent the message up, smiling. Feeling better, though very tired. “And then I'm going to get some sleep for a couple hours. You know we might not survive any of this, and I can't even say I'll have a ship when we're done—"
"The only way you will not have a ship is if Tam doesn't survive. Or me, for that matter—or Kadrien, if we find him."
"Tam does not intend to give up looking."
"And how long will you stay on the search?"
"As long as Tam wants."
He nodded again. “And you're not doing it because he's one of the heirs, either."
"No. We'd do the same for any crewmember who was looking for a friend. And I suspect that's why you're so willing to sign on, because you had already figured that part out."
He nodded, and smiled. When Crystal finally crossed to his bed and threw himself down, he didn't feel like he shared the room with a stranger. Prince Sharton was now crew. He felt more at ease...
But he did not sleep well. He felt the nightmares slipping in around him, the subtle change in reality that made him want to pull back, want to wake up—but he couldn't. Couldn't wake up, and didn't want to be here...
The dreams pulled him back to the Midori fields where he and Etric had first met. He knew this to be a dream, no matter how lifelike it seemed. Etric had not died on those fields! He had not been trapped there forever...
Gods, get me out of this! Get me out of here! Don't let me go back to dreaming!
Home to Delson—but not. Not really. He tried to remember that as his few friends turned on him, as Fairchild held his arms as the slavers came for him again. No. They had not done that. No...
"Captain?"
A touch of true reality dragged him back. He sat up, gasping for air, aware that he had probably shouted something. Prince Sharton sat on the edge of his bunk, looking troubled.
"Oh, damn. Sorry. But thank you for waking me up. I hate those kinds of nightmares."
"Yes, I understand,” Sharton said. He pushed a hand through his hair, and Crystal knew that he meant those words.
"Go back to sleep. Sorry."
Sharton bowed his head and limped back to his bed, barely making it that far without his cane. Crystal watched him pull the blankets back up, and close his eyes. He did not, Crystal thought, actually sleep, though.
Crystal pretended to sleep as well. He wondered how long it would be until he could legitimately show up back on the control deck and not have the others berate him for not getting enough rest...
But somehow he slipped into a nap anyway, relaxed, resting...
Only to wake up again with a start. Someone at the door, hitting the entry buzzer, again and again. Crystal sat up quickly—and found Sharton slipping from bed, a small, thin-bladed dagger in his hand. He looked around, startled, and then embarrassed.
"Sorry. Bad habit for those of us raised at court,” he said, and pushed the knife back into the little sheath at his wrist.
Crystal nodded and went to the door, cautiously checking who was outside. He did not expect to find Etric standing there, looking half-crazed.
"What the hell,” Crystal said, and hit the door open.
Etric stepped in, looked at the other two with his eyes wide. “I—Crystal, I was asleep and I woke up. There's magic on Grant. A hell of a lot more magic than I ever felt before in any one place. Sudden. Just—” He waved his hands out toward the air. “Just there."
"Damn. Sharton, would there be a reason for that to happen?"
"None that I know of,” Sharton said. He pulled a suit on over his sleeping clothes, and started for the door. “Did you tell Tam?"
"Tam went to the control deck,” Etric said. He pushed hands through his hair, shaking. “Damn, Crystal. I've never felt anything like this before."
"What's the magic doing? Can you tell?"
"It's not doing anything,” Etric said. “It's just there. And... that helps, in fact. It's so strong that I feel like I hold more magic right now than I ever have before. But... I don't like things to happen that I can't explain. I don't trust magic that just suddenly appears."
"Let's go up and talk to Tam, and see if there's anything that the others have noticed on the control deck,” Crystal said. He'd slept in his clothing, and would have liked to clean up, but Etric this nervous made him uneasy. And he kept trying to believe that this wasn't another dream, that this was real, and he needed to act—
"Captain?” Sharton asked.
"Sorry. Just trying to think this through,” Crystal said. He went to the door and snagged Etric by the arm. He didn't like to see his mage friend so scatterbrained, but it would have been funny under other circumstances. “Anything else, Etric?"
"No. Nothing helpful. Sorry.” He had finally found his feet, and moved along with them without protest.
"It's all right. It's not like we thought things were normal here, you know,” Crystal said.
"Oh. True. Damn, what a mess. Only, it's not really. It's not bad, just ... unexpected."
"I don't trust anything unexpected,” Crystal said.
They already reached the crew's lounge—and there found something he should have expected. Rqua had left the med unit and, though unsteady, looked around with much the same wild look that he'd seen in Etric a few moments before.
"Etric,” Rqua said. He nodded and grimaced, a hand going to the back of his neck. “Damn. Well, glad it's not just me. What the hell happened?"
"We don't know,” Crystal said. “You should be in bed, Rqua. You don't look like you should be on your feet at all."
"Are you joking? I started twitching with all that magic. I have to move. Etric—"
"I know. Let's see if there's anything we can find out on the deck,” Etric said. “Then I'll see what I can do for you and Navic. If we're going to have this gift, we'd best use it wisely."
It sounded as though Etric had begun thinking clearly again, which relieved Crystal. He didn't want to head any closer to Grant with Etric acting crazy. They went the last bit of the curve up to the control deck, startling Tam and Banning, who stood by the doorway.
"What the hell has gone wrong now?” Banning asked.
"Magic,” Etric and Rqua chorused, drawing looks all around.
"There's magic on Grant,” Etric finished.
"Oh hell,” Banning said. She went back to the station where Wesna quickly got out of the way. “I don't want to know about magic. What kind? What am I looking for?"
"Some disturbance,” Etric said. “Something out of the usual."
"Let me see,” Sharton said and slipped into the chair by Banning. They began to work, going through the codes again. “I don't see anything. Whatever happened, it didn't show up on anything else."
"Not surprised,” Etric said. He had a hand on Rqua's shoulder—and he looked pleased to see his friend on his feet, so Crystal didn't berate them again. “Magic isn't likely to register. I just wondered if something else had happened at the same time. Damn. How far out are we?"
"Just over an hour from real time,” Tam said. He didn't look pleased by that or anything else. “I was going to call down for you in a few minutes anyway."
"I'm going with Rqua back to the med unit and seeing if I can do something helpful with this magic. I'll be back in a few minutes."
Crystal nodded, and watched as the two headed back out. But Etric stopped and looked back at him again, shaking his head. “I don't trust it, Crystal. I don't trust it at all."

Chapter 6

Abby sat at the desk, his hands still trembling. He didn't trust it, no matter how much Tristan tried to reassure him. He didn't trust anything that came from the gods.
His reaction to the gift of the gods obviously bothered Emperor Kadrien, who had already dealt with Tabor and the demons, to some degree. Now, finding that the champion of the gods didn't trust his own side could not have been very reassuring. Abby felt badly for that, but he could not—of course—lie about it.
"I'm going back to the kitchen and finding us some food,” Kadrien said. “No, both of you rest here. I can manage. And the idea of a few minutes alone suddenly appeals to me."
"As you wish, Emperor,” Tristan said with a bow of his head.
He left the room, glancing back at the two with a shake of his head, uncertainty in his face. Then he left, the door closing again behind him.
"Tristan—"
"Relax. It's done. I've studied the magic, tested it—and nothing bad came of it. We did not ask, and there is no price to pay. Just accept that for once something went right."
"Accept? Trust it?” Abby said, almost appalled at the idea. “I will trust nothing from the gods."
"Then trust me,” he said.
And there it was. The wall that had come up between them since Liora stepped into his life. Trust. Abby felt it with a start, and shivered. He had to—he couldn't not—he did trust Tristan. He knew he did.
He didn't trust himself.
"Well, that's nothing new,” Tristan said. “But at least you've faced it again. Gods, Abby, this has been such a mess. I think we're lucky that Tabor hasn't turned back up yet."
"I can't deal with Tabor. I can't... I don't know what we're doing here, Tristan. I'm not ready for this."
"We never are. However, we at least had a few hours sleep. And magic—Abby, it's good. I'm... I'm whole again. I haven't felt this much magic since Ishan, and it's helped.
"Oh.” He had not really thought about how it had helped his friend, even though he could feel the change in Tristan. “I wonder where Tabor is. I wonder if he knows we're here."
"That's a good question.” Tristan sat at the desk, his hand reaching toward the white world beyond the glass. “I can't sense him anywhere near. I don't know why he would go and leave the Emperor like this, unless he has already found the piece of the Kiya."
"Maybe so. Maybe we just need to sit here and rest a while before we go on. Is there a reason we thought that we'd win every race? And I'm still not certain why we are here rather than in hell."
Tristan gave agreement to that with a bow of his head. Rest, relax. Wait...
However, they didn't rest long. Abby had just started to wonder if they ought to follow Emperor Kadrien out into the building and check things out. It had seemed so large, and he thought they might get lost—
And something changed. Something—opened. Magic. But not the gods this time.
"Not good,” Tristan said, standing. “That's close, Abby. That's somewhere here in the building—"
Abby felt it in the next heartbeat, the rush of power over him: dark power, evil, demon blood. The curse that had remained dormant for so long swept up from the dark spot in his soul and grabbed hold of his mind. He leapt to his feet, his chair falling, and reached for the Janin and his sword. He could hardly feel Tristan trying to call him back—dragging him back to sanity.
He gasped, standing rigid, forcing himself not to follow the call of the curse and rush out after Tabor—
"Not Tabor,” Tristan suddenly said. The elf panicked in that moment, and nearly lost his hold on Abby. “Not Tabor. That's Gix, Abby. What's happened? What is he doing here—"
A cry of pain and fear. Emperor Kadrien.
Tristan didn't try to hold him back. They both hurried out of the room, Tristan leading into the hall and down a wide sweeping staircase. Somewhere within his embittered mind, Abby thought the place must be beautiful. He wanted to see it. He didn't want the curse to take him.
They reached a room at the bottom of the stairs and into a room: wide, golden, filled with riches. It would have taken his breath away at another time. He'd never seen such a place, where even the simple furniture was decorated with jewels. For a moment the glitter caught his eyes, held him still—
Gix stood in the middle of the room, the huge, misshapen demon holding the smaller emperor by his injured wrist, dangling him above the floor like a toy. Cuts already ran down the side of Kadrien's face, and as they watched, the demon ran a clawed hand down the man's chest, ripping cloth and skin.
Beyond Gix stood an open portal leading to a place that Abby had seen before. The sight sent him shivering with fear. He had been promised to that place and this demon—a slave to this creature that stood before them.
"Where is it?” Gix growled, a sound that set the room trembling with power, as though the very walls feared him. “Where is the damned traitor! I'll rip out your eyes—"
"Let him go,” Tristan said.
Gix looked up, unmistakably shocked. Abby registered that look, even while he fought to keep control, the Janin in one hand, his sword in the other. Not yet, Tristan whispered in his mind. Not yet. Hold on. Be wise...
"You,” Gix said, a growl of a word.
The demon tossed Kadrian aside, and he landed against the wall, stunned. Gix crossed a few steps toward them, so quickly that Abby nearly backed away. Hold, Tristan whispered within him. Wait.
"You are here, too. I've waited a long time, Godling—"
Tristan moved, but Gix knocked him aside, sending the elf sprawling. Careful! Tristan still said, keeping tight control of Abby in that moment when he saw his friend injured, and all he wanted to do was howl and let go.
"No temple here, bastard Godling. Nothing to hold it back this time. You I can control—” He reached out and ran a claw down Abby's face, drawing blood.
Touching him, demon touching him. Tristan couldn't hold him this time. Maybe he didn't try to. Abby swung the sword and cut deep into Gix's arm while the Janin reached forward and bit harder. The demon growled and clawed at Abby's arm, but he would not let the Janin go.
However, she pulled away and sprang out of his hand—and he thought maybe she feared that he would lose his arm if the demon cut again.
He tried to bring the sword around once more, but Gix hooked claws into his shoulder and his arm trembled with pain and fire. The sword dropped. Weaponless.
"Abby!"
"Oh no, little elf. Not this time. He comes with me now, finally."
Calm, Abby; please, calm. Fight the curse. Fight him.
Gix dragged Abby back toward the gate and the gray and red world that repelled and called to him. The maelstrom of pain, curse, and fear tried to drive away the last pieces of sanity left to him.
He didn't want to go there. He didn't want to be a slave to this creature, and lend it power through his godling blood.
Would not, at least, drag Tristan with him. He reached for the crown that he wore, remembering how Tabor had paused to let him remove it once—but not Gix. Oh no, the demon lord had other plans. He laughed, slapped Abby's hand away, and dug his claws deeper into Abby's shoulder. The pain that Abby would not acknowledge swept through Tristan, putting his friend to his knees.
"No,” Abby said. He tried to remove the crown again. He even fought the curse aside in that moment, determined that Tristan would not suffer more for his sake. “No, Gix. Not Tristan."
"When did you think you had a say in anything?” Gix said. He laughed, a dark sound that swept away anything happy in its path. “When did you think that you were anything more than a pawn?"
"You will not—"
But the claws dug deep again, and Tristan cried out.
"Take off the crown, Tristan! Do it—"
But he didn't think Tristan even had the sense left to obey. Tristan, fighting against Abby's pain, Abby's curse—
He gave up. He would go. He hoped that someone could help Tristan—
And something happened. Magic came, a new surge—for a moment he had hoped—but instead he realized Tabor had returned, a portal opening just the right of his father's.
Tabor lifted his head, brushing snow from his cloak—and stopped in mid-move when he saw the scene before him.
"Oh hell,” he said.
Gix growled.
Tabor drew the sword from his side and leapt forward, rushing past Tristan and Kadrien. Abby lifted his hands, despite the pain through arm and shoulder. He couldn't protect himself. He heard Tristan cry out—
Tabor swung the sword, his eyes blazing.
The sword cut through the fingers of Gix's hand, where they held to Abby's shoulder, nearly severing them. Gix howled as Abby dropped to his knees in a very unpleasant spot between demon lord and his son.
Abby didn't understand. He looked back at the howling demon, the madness nearly quelled in him by the shock of what had happened and the return of Tristan's control. Tristan didn't understand any better, but he kept Abby kneeling and didn't allow the curse to take him and interfere with this show. It had not gone the way either of them would have predicted.
Gix stepped back toward his portal. He had already healed most of his hand, and his blood-red eyes looked toward Tabor with such hatred that Abby would have thought even the demonling should fear it.
Tabor stood his place. He even stepped forward when Gix started to reach for Abby again. Protected him?
Abby could feel the winds of hell from that other place. He could feel the demon's rage like a force that reached out toward them. But Tabor stood between him and that danger, and that was... that was madness. True madness.
"Enemy,” Gix said, the words growled.
"Oh yes. Enemy,” Tabor said. “But no longer a pawn. No longer something you can throw to Braith to keep him happy. It's done."
"There is no going back,” Gix said. “You have chosen."
"Yes, I have."
Abby looked up at Tabor, shocked again. Chosen to stand against Gix? No. It had to be a trick. It had to be—
Gix stepped back again. “Not that easy, blood of my blood. Not that easy. I know your secrets. I will have you both as slaves—"
Gix's bloody hand reached toward Tabor, casting so quickly that Tabor could not even move before he cried out, a gasping sound of pain as darkness swept over him, through him—
But Tristan cast as well, trying to drive the darkness back even as Abby grabbed Tabor and pulled him away from his father's reaching hands. He heard Gix howl in frustration one more time, but the door to his world closed, and sealed him off again. For now. For the moment.
The darkness shattered around Tabor, and the demonling shuddered and dropped to the floor, nearly unconscious as he gasped for air, his hands going to his chest.
Abby knelt there for a moment, his enemy, his curse, this demonling in his arms—
"No, no,” Tabor whispered. He tried to pull away, but his own body barely obeyed him, and he ended up on his own knees, still well within arm's reach of Abby. Abby's hand moved toward Tabor's sword, but the demonling grabbed it out of the way, nearly falling again. “Elf, get control of your prince!"
Tristan arrived: shaky, uncertain, and hardly in shape to control anything. Madness, Abby thought again. He put a hand on Abby's shoulder and forced him to calm, though it wasn't nearly as hard as it had been in the past. Abby looked at Tabor, too stunned still to even speak.
"I don't understand,” Tristan said, which seemed to be enough for both of them.
"I—I wanted out of their game. That's all.” Tabor bowed his head. He bled, and his face looked far too pale. “I—didn't want to go on like this... forever."
Movement brought them all around with a start, as the Emperor staggered toward them, bleeding and unsteady.
"What the hell is going on?” Emperor Kadrien demanded.
"What an appropriate question, sire,” Tabor said, a little bow of his head. A little humor, even now.
Abby looked at him. He couldn't see much of the demon in Tabor. Had, in fact, never seen much of Gix in his rival. His enemy. Curse—
Tristan fought it down again. It wasn't easy. They were both weak.
"Will it come back?” Kadrien asked, waving a shaking arm toward the area where the demon had disappeared.
"Not soon,” Tabor said, which Abby found somewhat reassuring. Tabor still gasped, his hand on his chest. “Not for a while. But he will come back for me. And Abby."
Tristan had started to help Abby to his feet. He came up slowly, pain rushing through his arm and shoulder. Fire, illness, and the feel of the demon touching him, still there. He shivered so much that Tristan had to wrap an arm around his waist to help keep him on his feet.
Tabor stood more slowly, pulling himself up with the help of a chair. He leaned against it, his head bowed and his hand to his chest. Abby feared he would pass out. What would they do? Leave him here for Gix? Help him?
Curse, curse—he fought it down with Tristan's help, but he felt half-insane now, with the elf and the curse battling inside him.
"Take care of him, Elf,” Tabor said softly. He looked up. “He'll be very ill, he and the Emperor. There is venom in the claws. You can handle it."
Abby looked at the cuts Tabor had suffered. Who would take care of those? And gods help him—that was an entirely different madness, to think such a thing and worry for Tabor.
"I'll go... elsewhere in the building,” Tabor said, looking at them. “It will make it easier for him."
He moved away from the chair, grabbed another—waved away the aid of the Emperor, who looked just as confused and dismayed as he had moments before, but at least had stopped asking questions. Abby couldn't begin to decide what had happened here. He couldn't begin to explain it.
"Tabor?” Tristan said softly.
"We'll talk when he recovers,” Tabor said. He stood with a hand pressed hard to his chest, and Abby worried about that pain, that injury. Tabor's other hand went inside his cloak and pulled out a cloth bag. He held it up for a moment. “Here, you might as well have this now, Elf."
He tossed it and Tristan caught the bag—and looked up in such total shock that even Abby didn't realize what he had felt already. Tristan watched the demonling leave, and then he pulled open the bag and held it out to Abby.
The other pieces of the Kiya—all save the head.
"Gods,” Abby whispered. And then he sat back down on the floor again, too stunned to go on.

Chapter 7

Etric stood by the comm equipment as they finally came into real time range. Otaka had been running the board, but she gladly surrendered it to Banning and Prince Sharton. Those two seemed to be working very well together. Good.
He took a deep breath. The feel of magic had abated, at least. For a short while he had felt other magics, but they hadn't been nearly as strong. He worried over this and everything else.
Tam arrived. He had dressed for the part of heir to the empire, at least as best he could from the ship's stores. Black suit, some gold braid at the shoulders and collar. His hair was neatly brushed and he wore what had to be a very expensive emerald earring. He stood back by the door, frowning. Not happy.
"Standard acknowledge from Grant Port,” Sharton said. “They still seem to think we're just a regular IG flagship. They are noting that there will be a delay before anyone is allowed within the dome shield."
"Wiser and wiser,” Tam said. He shrugged and came forward, looking down at the world. They could see the capital city now, a huge glow of power that outshone even the light of day. “All right, Sharton, get me a line. We might as well do this quickly. I want to know what's going on down there."
Sharton looked back at him, and for once did not immediately obey the crown prince. Etric found that interesting, in this moment when everything waited in the balance.
"I have to, Shar,” Tam finally said, meeting that look. “I have to know. I don't want to be emperor, but I will not abandon Kadrien, if there is anything I can do to help him."
Sharton bowed his head and turned back to the equipment. Tam shook his head in dismay, plainly seeing too much of his future in that look—
"Hold on,” Banning said. “Problem. Below deck.” She said something into the comm equipment, and then looked back at them, anger flashing in her eyes. “Quan just broke into your quarters, Captain Etric. He hurt Tathis and Kamil—not certain how badly. Zoe saw him coming out, and she's trying to follow him—"
"Damn!” Crystal said behind them. “I knew we should have spaced that ill mannered little bastard. How are Tathis and Kamil?"
"Not sure,” Banning said. She paused for a moment. “Damn, damn! He's made it to the engine room and sealed himself in."
"We don't need this—” Etric began, half panicked at the thought of what he might do there—
Banning shrugged. “He may be stupid, but I don't think he's suicidal, Captain Etric. Leave him there for now. Zoe is on guard outside the door. There's nowhere else he can go."
"Ah. True."
"I'll go down to see about Tathis and Kamil,” Crystal said. Istanan, standing by him, obviously intended to go as well.
Etric nodded and looked back at Tam. “We'd better get this show over with now, in case we have other problems."
"Yes, good point,” Tam said. He looked back at Sharton. “Go ahead."
Sharton quickly keyed open a line, both audio and vid. Tam moved up by the cam, but for a moment they stared at what appeared to be an empty room.
Then a small, gray haired man suddenly leapt into view, startling them all. He looked at his own view screen, whispered a curse, and disappeared again.
"My,” Tam said.
Someone else appeared. Tall, frazzled—it half looked as though he had been shoved into the chair.
"Prince Tamaris,” the man said, breathless, and bowing his head several times. “We had not expected you. We didn't know where you were. We thought you might be dead, too."
"Dead?” Tam said, his voice gone cold.
"We feared that none of the heirs had survived,” the man said. “With Prince Markin and Prince Dralis already dead—"
"Dead?” Tam said again, this time with a little more force. “The other two crown princes are dead?"
"Yes, sire. It is unfortunate. Or not. You are now the last heir."
"What the hell happened?"
"Prince Dralis—well, he was very old, sire. He died of the shock when he learned that Emperor Kadrien had disappeared."
"Ah. And Markin?"
"An unfortunate set of circumstances. Prince Dralis's people killed him before they learned that their own prince had died."
Sharton looked ceiling ward, shaking his head.
"What about Emperor Kadrien? What happened?"
"We don't know, sire. We don't know what happened—"
"Prince, not sire. I am not emperor."
"Ah. Yes. Of course.” The man looked a little calmer. He tilted his head. “The council is in session, though we are having trouble with some... forces."
"I am in an IG ship, but it is not manned by IGs."
"Oh. Really?” The man's eyes brightened. “You have been traveling with rather resourceful companions."
"Yes, I have. And yes, we pirated an IG ship. No doubt word of it will soon arrive."
"Very good, s—prince,” he said, and even seemed to mean it this time.
"Tell me what I need to know."
The man leaned back. “We truly don't know what happened to the Emperor. He merely disappeared from the palace. None has ever done that before. The council is in session. They have managed to keep things going smoothly enough, with the reluctant help of the Queen Mother. The IGs have begun creating problems, but the Emperor's guard is holding the city, and we are... reluctant to let the IGs in."
"On my order, Captain Davar, you are not to let IGs into the city under any circumstances, until I order it otherwise."
"Yes, sire. Prince. Yes. Thank you."
"We'll be landing soon."
"I will prepare to have the dome opened. Thank you for arriving so quickly, Prince Tamaris. We are... unprepared for this madness."
Tam bowed his head and gave a little nod to Sharton, who closed down the connection. The screen darkened again.
"That went better than I expected,” Tam said. “I wish they could have given me more information on Kadrien, though."
"I got the impression that he really didn't know,” Sharton said. “A shame about the other heirs, too."
"Typical.” Tam dropped into a chair by the weapons station and looked longingly at the board, as though he wished he could blow the hell out of something right now. “I found it amusing that they have the reluctant help of the Queen Mother, though."
"I rather suspect that cooperation comes from sedation, myself,” Sharton answered, and won a little laugh from Tam. “She never took to sharing power very well, not after her husband's death. And with Kadrien gone—"
"Yes, she has to be near panicked. You know, she's the one person we can be absolutely certain had nothing to do with this. If Kadrien is not Emperor, she loses all her position at court. What's the word below deck, Ban?"
She had a hand to the link in her ear and frowned. “Crystal found Tathis and Kamil. He said they were both unconscious. Otaka is taking Tathis up to the med unit. Kamil is in your room right now, and Sand is with him. Crystal and Istanan are going down to talk with Zoe."
"Good,” Etric said. “We'll get him out of there when we're down."
"They're giving the go-ahead to come closer,” Sharton said, waving toward the comm board. “We can be down in a few minutes."
"You want to take us in, Banning?” Seaton asked, from the pilot's seat. “I've never landed on a site like this."
"I have,” she said. “Not here, but like it—"
Seaton started to stand—
And the ship... shimmered. Shifted. Etric had been looking at the screen and the view of Grant. And in the next moment he saw somewhere else.

Chapter 8

Crystal slowed down, knowing Istanan had a hard time keeping up the pace, and tried to calm his raging anger. But by the Gods, he intended to have his hands on Quan before long.
The coward had hit Tathis from behind, and probably Kamil as well, since both were deaf. And that angered Crystal more than he had expected.
In two more curves they would reach the engine room—
And the ship trembled. For a moment it seemed the walls had become unreal as the ship changed.
Gravity surged. Istanan went down with a gasp, and Crystal fell a moment later.
"What the hell—” Crystal whispered. He started to stand, but—it happened again. He felt ill. And afraid. He feared, for a moment, that the dreams had come back, and he had lost his hold on reality—
Istanan caught hold of his arm. The deck rolled in a way it should not have. Crystal feared that it wasn't a dream after all. Something terrible had happened—continued to happen—
"Captain,” Istanan whispered. “What the hell—"
"I don't—” It happened again. Gods! “Oh hell—"
He tried to reach the comm equipment, but he couldn't stand. Gravity kept changing, and his legs couldn't take the strain. The walls moved, and didn't move—and nothing seemed real.
Then he suddenly heard Etric over the ship wide system. “Hold on! Take hold! We're going down!"
Crashing! Crystal looked around in panic, trying to find a place for him and Istanan. They should grab handholds, but that would mean standing, and he knew they couldn't get that far.
"Damn!” Etric yelled again. But the words disappeared in the next fluctuation. “Pull us back to Grant again! Engine room! We're going again!"
This time the power surged, and the lights dimmed, went dark, came back in a different, greenish color. Crystal could only hear faint voices and frantic sounds. He grabbed Istanan, and shoved them both up against the slight indentation of a doorway, the only place—
And they crashed.
He felt the ship come down hard, bounce enough to tear them both free, and then slide—gods, they must have slid for half the world. But sliding was good, he thought, even above the bumps and pain. Sliding meant a long stop, not a sudden one. Sliding—
They hit something. Hard. The ship shuddered.
Stopped.
"Ah,” Istanan said. He sat up, slowly. A little auxiliary light brightened the hall, meaning they still had some power in the ship.
"Captain Crystal?” Istanan said.
"We survived."
"I think so,” Istanan said. It didn't look as though he wanted to stand. “We're down. What the hell happened?"
"I don't know. I don't—"
"Crystal!” A voice called on the comm. Distorted. It took him a moment to realize it was Etric calling him. “Crystal, are you down there?"
He pulled himself up to the comm equipment. Hit it three times before the link came on. “I'm here. What happened?"
"Are you close to the engine room?” Etric asked, and the panicked sound of his voice stopped Crystal from asking more.
"Close,” Crystal said.
"Get Quan the hell out of there! We can still read some fluctuations, and I don't want to know what will happen now that we're down and can't bleed the power off—"
Engine about to blow? Oh hell, hell. They'd never get away fast enough.
"Going!” Crystal said. He pushed away from the comm equipment, saw Istanan start to pull himself up—but didn't dare wait.
Zoe lay in a heap at the end of the corridor when he came around the corner. He started to reach for her, changed his mind. No time. She either survived or didn't—but if he didn't get Quan out, they'd all die. He could feel the rumble of the engines—something that never boded well, and especially not in a ship that should be down and virtually dead.
The door would not open to his touch. Fine. He grabbed his probe from his pocket—habit to always have that on him—and worked the lock as fast as he could with shaking hands.
He saw Zoe start to sit up and change her mind with a moan. Istanan came around the corner, limping badly. He kept working. The unsteady power didn't help. He had to—
The door came open.
Quan had been just the other side, which startled him. He hadn't expected it. He wasn't ready, but he reached to grab the man—
Quan screamed in rage. Mad, uncontrollable rage as he rushed forward. Crystal got a handhold on his clothing. Though Quan looked battered by the landing, he didn't seem to feel it—
And when he turned on Crystal, he lifted a hand—something in it, a tool probably from the engine room—
Cyrstal had expected a blow. He had not expected something to slam into his mind with a white fiery pain and send him to his knees. He heard Istanan and Zoe cry out as well, and knew that Quan kept moving away. He forced himself back up—
The rumbling of the engine had stopped. Istanan started past him into the room, looking uncertain.
"Do what you can. Shut down everything,” Crystal said. “Zoe—can you go with me? Follow Quan?"
"Yeah.” She stood up again, her face white, blood on her cheek. He couldn't tell if she had been badly hurt, but she looked steady. “Psi. We got hit by a psi blast, captain."
"Yeah. Figured that. Istanan—try to warn the others!"
"I will,” Istanan said going past. “Catch him."
Crystal nodded and forced his body to move against pains he had never felt before. Besides the ones from the crash, he felt his body react to the blow to his mind as well. He felt ill. He felt—
But Quan hadn't gone far. He had reached the airlock, and just gotten the first door open. He rushed out, hit the second—
Crystal arrived in time to see the door open to a world of white on white—cold—
Quan howled, a sound of anger and despair; he looked back at them, and Crystal could have sworn in that moment that Quan's eyes glowed red. Then he spun and ran out into the night.
Crystal hit the door closed... and locked. No one outside would be getting back in.
Zoe leaned against the doorway and took a deep breath. “I want to know what happened, Captain. I want to know—"
"Yeah. Think you can make it up top?"
"I hope so."
They started up the long curve. Someone had better have answers by the time they got there...

Chapter 9

"I didn't trust magic, when Tabor offered it,” Emperor Kadrien said softly. He didn't try to stop Tristan as he worked on the wounds. “I didn't—I didn't want to believe."
"I know,” Tristan said softly. “I understand. It cannot be easy, to have us come into your world and change everything you believe."
"It's madness,” Kadrien whispered.
Abby lifted his head and looked at the Emperor—mostly because the elf wished to see Kadrien's face just then. And he reminded them of someone again—but no matter.
"What happened?” Abby asked. He wanted to know. He wanted to understand. “I don't know what happened."
"Tabor made a choice, Abby,” Tristan said. He whispered magic, eased the pain from Kadrien, drew the poison up and out. The Emperor didn't realize how close he had come to dying in this battle. Tristan didn't explain. Kadrien had enough to worry about right now.
"He is demon-bred."
"Yes,” Tristan said. “and he's called down the wrath of not only Gix, but the other demons as well. I'm convinced that this isn't an act, Abby. The spell Gix sent at him would have killed Tabor if I hadn't deflected some of it."
"I can't—” he said. And quelled that thought. How could he not believe? Tristan said it was so. But it was still so hard to believe that Tabor could change so much—
"Maybe it isn't change,” Tristan said.
That startled Kadrien, who looked at Tristan and then Abby. “You do that sometimes—say things that make no sense. But I think... I think you're just answering questions that I can't hear, aren't you?"
"Ah. My apologies,” Tristan said. He sat back, gathering his power again, taking short breaths so that he didn't startle Kadrien by showing his weakness. “It is the crowns. They link us, mind-to-mind. It is second nature to us. We do not think to explain it most times."
Kadrien looked at him, at Abby, back again—and then laughed, an unexpected and welcome sound. “My apologies. I didn't notice."
"Notice?” Tristan said.
"The—the crowns. They're ubiquitous here at court. I never noticed that you even wore them. Forgive me. I suppose that really isn't so funny, but right now—"
"It is funny,” Tristan said, and touched the crown, grateful for the lightening of the mood. “We don't know your world. I hadn't thought about it either. But you don't wear a crown."
Kadrien grinned. “No, I don't. My father did, but then, he had to show power every moment of the day. I wear a crown for state occasions, but not the rest of the time. The lack of a crown upsets the people, sometimes."
"You really don't want to be emperor, do you?"
"Not often, no,” Kadrien said, with unexpected openness. He leaned back in the chair. “Thank you, Tristan. I feel better. I think you'd better see to your friend, though."
"I will survive,” Abby said.
"Surviving is not always everything,” Kadrien said. “Sometimes we should do better than just endure. Sometimes there should even be something to survive for."
Abby found himself staring at the emperor, startled to find such words from a man who seemed to have... everything? Or was it only that Abby, seeing him here, in this quiet place, envied him? This wasn't his place, though, was it?
"Abby?” Tristan said, a hand gently touching his friend's arm.
"He gave us the rest of the Kiya. We have all but the head and the piece that must be here, somewhere."
"Yes,” Tristan said. He began to let magic ease along Abby's arm, healing little cuts first, then worse. “He has done that. He would have to fight us to get them back. It's not a trick, Abby."
"I know. I know. But he knows that I can't work with him,” Abby said. He took a deep breath and looked at the Emperor. “I am cursed. A curse that makes it impossible for me to deal with anyone of demon blood. And no matter what side Tabor chooses, he is still bred of demons."
"As you are bred of the gods?"
"Yes, for all the good that does me."
Tristan gave a little shrug, too deep into the spell to comment this time.
"I know that what you say is true,” Kadrien said. “but it's not easy to accept, in a place where such things were only... myths. Why are you here? Why did this Kiya come to us?"
"Chance,” Abby said and stopped Tristan before he began to apologize for things that he really had no control over, and had happened so long ago, in another place. “We did the best we could, Tristan. I think—I begin to believe that we will win."
"Ha!” Tristan laughed. He leaned back for a moment gathering strength again before he started in on other wounds. Abby thought to stop him—and thought again. Gix could return. He dared not be weak. “Is that what happens when Tabor comes to our side? You actually begin to believe in your own strength?"
"Mine? No. But I have dealt with Tabor before, you know. I know his strengths, and they give me hope."
"You drive me mad some days,” Tristan said, and leaned forward again.
Abby grinned across at the emperor, who looked amused by the exchange. Good. Better. Yes, he could stand to feel a little optimism again.
"Again?” Tristan mumbled.
Abby just shook his head and let Tristan do his work. The world had gone dark outside and for a moment he thought he felt something dark on the sudden wind that swept past them. He started to go to the window, but Tristan held him down.
"No. If there is evil out there, it will come to us. It always does. Rest while you can, Abby."
"I know.” He could feel Tristan drawing the demon venom from him. He could feel himself growing calmer again, the taint of demon slipping away. “I want this done. I want this piece and then the head, and then we are done, Tristan. I really never thought that I would see the end."
"And what will you do when you are done?” Emperor Kadrien asked.
"I don't know,” Abby said. “I really don't know. I never looked that far."
"I suppose we ought to wait to see if we survive,” Tristan suggested.
"And he says I'm the pessimistic one,” Abby said with a little smile again.
But the wind came again, and the feel of evil... they still had battles to fight. No use to look too far ahead and to hope for something different.

Chapter 10

They all gathered in the crew's lounge. Etric had to drag Seaton and Banning away from the control deck, but they came at last and sat together, still whispering.
He didn't try to follow what they said. He wasn't sure he wanted to know.
They had several injured crewmembers—Tathis, conscious but obviously groggy; Kamil looked pale and half afraid to breathe too hard. Istanan, Zoe—even Tamaris had started limping rather badly. They'd have to look into that if they could get him to settle down long enough.
Crystal didn't look much better than Kamil, and apparently for the same reason. Psi blast.
"I did not realize he had any power, captain,” Kamil said softly. Had he picked that up from Etric's thoughts? No matter. “He never showed any sign of it. But I kept hearing someone. I just never realized it was him. It seemed... somehow more familiar than that."
Rqua nodded. He didn't look as bad as some of the others, but Etric had worked with him a bit, and knew the injury he had suffered back on Silversun still gave him trouble, even after medicine and magic. He had hoped to heal more, after they were down, but now...
"It's not your fault, Kamil,” he said. Then frowned, because Kamil looked away, unwilling to follow any more of the conversation. “We have only one person to blame for this—and that's Quan. I don't really give a damn right now. We survived that rather unusual landing."
"I want to know what the hell happened,” Banning said. She shook her head, looking angry and unsettled. “I want to know where we kept going."
"I want to know where we are now."
"Pardon?” Crystal said. He sat forward now. “What happened up there?"
"We kept getting pulled to somewhere else entirely, Captain,” Banning said. Her eyes blazed. “One moment we're looking at Grant, and the next we're some place dark, dry, red—and then back to Grant. Seaton pulled us away from the dome and the city, and up toward the snow fields when it looked like we would crash. But we got pulled away and back, and the vid equipment went down—"
"Well, you can relax. When Quan went out, it was too a snow field."
"Thank the gods,” Etric whispered.
"I am going to ennoble you, Seaton,” Tam said, startling Seaton, who looked at him with eyes wide. “Start thinking about what world you'd like. Or sector. I don't care who rules there. It will be yours."
"Oh, no, no, no,” Seaton said with such dismay that it got the others laughing. “No. I've seen how you people survive. I'd rather stay a pilot."
"He has a point,” Sharton said. “But we are on Grant. Good. And bad. We will have IGs coming after us soon enough. We don't dare stay here, defenseless."
"I don't think that's going to be a problem,” Wesna offered. “I was running comm during our ... landing. The people at the Capital thought the ship exploded when we disappeared the first time. I doubt they realize we ever came back, since we seemed to never be fully here until we actually came down."
"Ah. Good,” Banning said. She nodded. “We have enough power that I think I can get a shield up. But they're bound to have noticed that nice line we left in the snow, won't they?"
"Not here,” Tam said. He looked a little pleased, in fact. “There is no vid surveillance on Grant. The royal family rather likes having a little privacy now and then, and they're damned paranoid enough that they don't trust anything that can watch, even when they're in charge of it. That's been going on for generations, by the way. The paranoia goes all the way back to the foundation."
"So you're rather typical of the royal family, then,” Crystal said.
"Paranoid to a fault? Absolutely."
Sharton had looked dismayed. Now he looked amused again.
"I'll work on the shields. Sand, have you worked shield hide walls before?” Banning asked.
"Yes. Good plan,” Sand said. She nodded. “We might be able to hide us from anything but a real look for us, and if Wesna is right, no one is going to come looking. Good."
"There's bound to be some chaos in the city right now,” Tam said. He shook his head. “They think the last heir just died. I don't know that they'll have time for anything else."
"It's night out there, too,” Etric said. “Right?"
"Right,” Crystal said. “And must be a good moon from what I saw."
"That will help. I can bring up a snow storm, at least enough to cover most of our landing trail,” Etric said. “I would rather no one knows we're here—at least not until we're ready to be found."
"I think there might be somewhere else near here where we could stay,” Sharton said. “There's a fortress in the snowlands. If it's close enough, that's probably where we should go."
"Ah, yes,” Tam said. “I know that place."
He didn't look as though he liked the thought of it, but that might only be the idea of hiking over the snow. Etric didn't think staying on a mostly dead ship sounded wise, though, either.
"I will not leave this ship until I have some damned answers about what happened,” Banning said. She stood. So did Seaton. “We're going back up to the control deck, and I'm yanking out every computer chit I can find and taking them with us. We did the impossible. I want to know how."
"Good idea,” Etric said.
"Prince Sharton, perhaps we can get enough power into the scanners to find your fortress,” Ylin said, standing, though slowly. None of them had come out of this without bruises and worse—but they had all survived. Etric thought that miracle enough.
"I'd be glad to help,” Sharton agreed. He grabbed his cane and walked with Ylin back up toward the deck, trailing behind Banning, Sand, and Seaton.
Etric stayed in his chair. He looked at Crystal. “This is a hell of a mess."
"Yes, it is. But that's not a surprise, is it?"
"There is still a lot of magic out there, Crystal. And that worries me, given how odd things have been."
Crystal nodded. “I'm sorry, Etric. My head hurts like hell, and I really can't think this through. I have to keep reminding myself that I survived, and that I should be grateful just for that—but right now, I'm not sure I believe it."
Etric stood and put a hand on his arm, sending a weave of warm magic—
"You shouldn't do that."
"Yes, I should. There is still that magic, you see. I should use it wisely. And I need you, Crystal. We need to work this out. We need to decide what to do next."
Etric hadn't realized how close to panic he felt until that moment. Crystal must have seen it. He didn't argue any more, and he looked better with a little color back in his face.
"I want to know what Quan did,” Crystal said. He waved Etric back into the chair. “Just sit down for a few more minutes. Let our crews do the work they can. We need to talk."
"Yes. True. It would just get too crowded in the control deck about now anyway.” Etric sat, leaned back in his chair. Otaka brought them tea. “Gods, thank you,” Etric said.
"Relax, Captain,” Otaka said. “We're down and we're alive. Let's move wisely."
He nodded and looked back to Crystal. “Quan got out of the room where we had him locked up. I'm not sure how, and it doesn't matter. He broke into the room Tam and I shared, and tore it apart, including part of the wall. We think he took something—"
"That makes sense,” Crystal said. “You know, I've been an idiot. What did we find back at the warehouse?"
"You mean the black market—Oh. Yes. We were all idiots. He was the one running it."
"That would be my guess. And he's a thief, though not a very good one. He got something from the Admiral's room. Must have known it would be there before we took off. He certainly didn't seem to argue about going along with us. I don't know what he did in the engine room, but from the look on his face, he didn't either. It drove him mad."
"I don't hear the voice any more, either,” Rqua said. “That's a relief, you know."
"Knowing now that he has some psi ability, that doesn't surprise me,” Etric said. “But he's gone from the ship, out into the snow and cold without anything to keep him warm. I really don't think he's going to be a problem now."
"Ah. Good point,” Crystal said. “So, now let's think about how to get our people to this fortress the princes are talking about. That's our next step. Once we're there, we'll worry about the next one."
Etric nodded and felt a wave of relief. “Yes. Good. Rest for a while, Crystal. We'll be leaving soon."
Crystal didn't look nearly as happy about that part, but then, thinking about the snow, Etric didn't think he would enjoy it much, either.

Chapter 11

Crystal helped pack up what supplies they could carry, and finally met with the others at the airlock, preparing to go. Zoe, who had seen the white snow beyond the door, didn't look particularly happy about leaving the ship. Crystal just shrugged. They had no choice.
"Where the hells are Banning and Seaton now?” Tam asked.
"Packing up the last of the chits from the backups,” Crystal said. “Don't worry. They're on their way. They don't want to wander out there alone after we leave. And if Etric's magic works, they won't have a path to follow, either."
"We're here,” Banning said from somewhere back in the corridor. “Why aren't you people moving yet?"
Crystal laughed and unlocked the airlock, stepping forward, ready to open the next one. Not, however, before Tamaris moved up, laser rifle in hand.
"I don't have to tell you to shoot the bastard if he's there, right?” Crystal said, still feeling the dull ache of his last encounter with Quan.
"Oh, you needn't worry about that,” Tamaris said.
"Good.” He hit the lock open.
Cold, white, dark, cold...
"Oh hell,” Zoe said. “Can we go back to space now?"
Crystal regretted that Quan hadn't waited around the ship. Taking out his frustration on him would have been the only thing that could make this look even reasonably better.
Sand came up by Crystal and nodded. She held out a small round disk that showed signs of being hastily put together.
"It'll work?” Crystal asked.
"In theory,” she said with a grin. “I used one like it back... a long time ago.” She gave Tam one quick, nervous look. “I think I got it put together right, but since my engineer died when the IGs took my ship, I can't guarantee it. The only way we'll know is if we get everyone outside so I can set it up. This thing is going to be very touchy. Once we're out, we don't dare go back in."
"So, make sure everyone has everything they want."
"I have the rest of the wine,” Tamaris offered.
Everyone laughed. Crystal and Tam went out into the snow first. It was not pleasant, and he hated the way his legs sunk down past the knees. He could feel the cold already seeping in, despite the layers of clothing.
Ylin came out with Kamil, leaning on his cane and shaking his head. “This isn't going to work. I'm never going to get very far in this stuff."
"Yes, I agree,” Prince Sharton said behind him. “Maybe some of us—"
"No,” Etric said. “We can get you there. We came down damned close to the fortress."
"You could go and get help,” Istanan said. He already looked as though staying on his feet gave him trouble. Damn hard gravity for him.
"We can't be certain the IGs won't be here. Our best hope is to hide the ship, and we can't do that with anyone inside,” Crystal said. “Once this device of Sand's kicks in, the ship is going to go dead and ice cold, and pretty much look like just another clump of snow. Anyone inside would be damned cold."
"All right then,” Ylin said and sighed. “We'd better get moving."
"The moon is up,” Etric said. “That's going to help. I can get us to the fortress with the help of magic."
Sand didn't look assured by that answer, but then she wasn't used to it yet, Crystal supposed. Her crew gathered around her, but Etric and Crystal's people mingled. They started out, Crystal staying by the door with Sand. He waved the others on.
"Tam, you'd better get up on that next mound if you can, and make sure there aren't any surprises out there."
"Good point,” Tam said, and hurried away.
Sand watched him go, and then looked back at Crystal. “He takes orders very well for someone who is likely Emperor right now."
"He's still just crew for the moment,” Crystal said with a shrug. “That's the last of them, Sand. Let's hope this works."
She nodded and knelt by the airlock door, waving her people away; pointed the disk inside. Crystal could see another one on the floor on the other side of the lock, and knew that she had strung the devices all the way up and around the corridors. She hit the top of the disk and stepped back, obviously holding her breath...
The disk glowed blue. So did the one beyond it. And he could see the lights flicker and start to die. He and Sand began to back slowly away until they had a dozen yards between them and the craft. By the time they caught up with the rest of the group, Etric had a scanner out and pointed back toward the ship.
"Damn good work, Sand. You'll have to teach me that trick."
"Because we all know it's something Free Traders need to learn, right?” Tam asked.
"What, and you don't want to know the trick, too?” Etric asked.
Tam sighed and started away.
"I'll write up the diagram and have copies made,” Sand offered.
Tam looked back and laughed. “Thanks. That would be helpful."
Etric grinned as well. Then he looked over at Rqua and nodded. “We'll have to go set up the storm. The rest of you keep moving—"
"I'm coming with you,” Crystal said. “Me and Banning. Don't argue. You and Rqua are going to be busy with your magic. And we know Quan could be anywhere out here."
"I get the feeling, in fact, that you wouldn't mind running into him,” Etric said.
"True. The longer we take here, the farther we'll have to go to catch up with our friends."
Sand patted him on the arm. “Good luck. Be careful."
"I didn't say Crystal could—” Etric started.
"And who made you my captain?” Crystal said.
"Hell. All right. Come on. Banning—"
"I'm ready."
Rqua looked amused. He held out both of his hands in a gesture of peace when Etric looked his way. Etric said nothing.
They cut away from the others, heading at an angle away from the ship and toward a distant hill. Far too distant, Crystal thought as he squinted that way. He hadn't really thought much about that part.
But they did cross Quan's path, and that kept him on guard for the next three hours. He silently cursed the cold, too, and every ache in his abused body. This had been a damned hard journey, and suddenly he wanted nothing more than to get to the fortress and rest again.
Etric and Rqua quickly worked the magic, at least. It looked damned impressive, too, the snow billowing up behind them, drifting out over the dull gray hull of the ship and across the path they'd made coming down. Long path—Crystal remembered that part far too well.
But they had survived. That surprised him still.
The snow moved and moved... and then Rqua went down on his knees, pale white and gasping. Banning knelt by him, and put an arm across his shoulders. A moment later, Etric lowered his arms as well. He trembled.
"Still takes a lot of work, even with a moon that powerful,” Etric said, waving a trembling hand toward it. “And even with the magic still in the air from before. We'd better—"
"Rest a moment,” Banning said, looking up from beside Rqua.
"No. I can go on,” Rqua said. He stood and grimaced, a hand going to the side of his head. Crystal could still see part of the burn there, even under the cap he wore. “I'm all right. Just not quite up to all of this."
"I know that feeling,” Crystal said.
"I... I have a touch of psi power, you know,” Rqua said. He frowned again. “And it keeps going odd since I was shot. Off and on real strong. Gives me a headache, but it's not horrible. I just can't get used to it. And that's the worst of how I feel right now. Weak still, especially with magic—but not as bad as I could have been."
Etric nodded. “I hope that we can rest at this fortress. I think that will help us all."
Crystal nodded. He started to reach for Banning, but she stood without his help. Probably just as well. He might have fallen, the way he felt right now.
More walking...
Eventually they caught up with the others. Otaka spun round, ready, and then lowered her rifle. She looked happy to see them. “Spread the word that our captains are back!"
Others looked. Crystal saw Ylin sign to Tathis, and then Kamil, both of whom looked back as well. Good crew.
And, despite everything, they made good time. Those who had little trouble walking beat down a track for those with canes, and though Crystal didn't really like the path they left so clearly in the snow, he knew they really didn't have a choice.
They walked and walked, getting closer. They topped one of the damned hills and he could see the building, finally—far away, but visible.
"We can do that in a few more hours,” Otaka said, stopping there. “I think we should break now, though, Captains. Some of our people aren't really up to prolonged walking. And besides, I think Tam wants to pass around the wine."
"Good idea,” Etric said. “Break, people. Let's rest for a little while."
The others sprawled out in the snow, many of them cursing. Otaka did not sit. Crystal watched her scan the area and pause, looking back behind them.
"Quan?” Crystal asked, squinting in that direction.
"I assume so. But he's very slow and losing ground. Not dressed for this weather, Captain Crystal. We don't have to worry. I'm just making sure."
"Good. Thanks.” He thought about suggesting they go back and kill him, but that would be vindictive and stupid. The world would kill him for them. Crystal had far more serious worries to consider. He looked back toward the fortress and then down at their people. They had too damned far too go.
Tam came up and pushed a bottle into his hand. “Sorry, forgot the goblets. Take a drink, Crystal."
He laughed and did. Good wine—sweet, warm, well-aged. He sipped again, and then handed it on to Otaka. She shook her head.
"No, I don't think so—"
"Yes, Otaka,” Tam said. “It will help a bit. Etric... added a little something to it before we left the ship. It's one of the ways we hope we'll make it."
"Ah,” she said. She didn't lower her rifle as she drank, her eyes still scanning. Damn good soldier, Crystal thought. Good to have her on their side.
And he did feel better. Magic in a bottle, huh? They could probably make a fortune off of that stuff. He might have to talk to Etric and Rqua after they settled all the rest of this stuff about lost emperors and all.
When they started out again, he actually felt better than he had when they left the ship. Amazing. He wondered why the hell Etric hadn't given them this stuff from the start.
"Hey,” Crystal said, rushing to catch up with Etric. “This is far better. Why—"
"It's going to wear us down very fast when it wears off,” Etric said. “And we can only do it maybe one more time before it's too dangerous, and tries to draw energy from the body that none of us has."
"Ah,” Crystal said. “But it is going to help."
"I hoped so,” Etric said. He looked worried. “It's a delicate balance, but we need the speed to get to the fortress. I'm trying to match speed against stamina, and considering all we've been through—just go carefully, Crystal. You got banged up in that crash. You know it, and the magic I used on you—"
Crystal looked at his friend and suddenly frowned. “Damn, Etric. You're the one who is really wearing himself thin, aren't you? We'll make it. No more magic. Not from you or Rqua."
"And who made you my captain?” Etric said with a grin.
"I'm serious."
Etric nodded. “Yes, you're right. I won't use any more magic unless we absolutely need it. Tam has another bottle of the wine. That should be enough. And I won't let Rqua do more magic either. He's doing better, but it would be dangerous."
"We'll be fine now, Captain,” Otaka said. She put a hand on Etric's shoulder. “You got us here, and we'll get the rest of the way. Quickly, which is damned good. I hate the cold."
For a while Crystal watched the horizon, where stars rose along the edge of the snow, bright and glittering. He wanted to be back among the stars. He wanted his ship back, and to travel to far worlds, to see wonders, and to help others.
He feared he would not have Fame back in his hands again, but he could get another ship. He might fancy one of the IGs’ craft, in fact. They could stand to do without a few of them, especially the way they seemed to misuse the ships.
Pleasant thoughts, of robbing the IGs and going off into space again. It gave him a direction for the future.
But the snow went on forever, hill after hill of it. Up and down again. Up and down, and colder. He tried to ignore it as best he could. Just move on. Keep going, he and his friends. There would be safety and warmth ahead. At least they had a destination.
They stopped once more. Crystal hadn't realized how much he had begun to shiver until they sat down in the snow. He knew that at some point in the last few miles he had started moving purely by will power. He had slowed. They all had.
Tamaris knelt before him and held out a bottle of wine. The prince looked pale and feverish, which worried Crystal in a distant way. He sipped the wine, felt the warmth almost lull him into rest...
"Drink a little more, Crystal,” Etric said, a hand against his back. “Drink it."
"The others—” Crystal said.
"They're doing fine. You need a little more. Come on. We don't dare stay here much longer."
He sipped. Warmth became fire. He had the strength to stand again, but he didn't think he would go much farther, even with the magic, this time. He looked at Etric, and his friend waved a hand ahead of him.
"We're almost there. Not much farther to go at all, Crystal. Maybe another hour."
"Hour?” Crystal said. He couldn't decide if that sounded long or short. But it was a time he understood. He could move for an hour, surely...
And, in fact, it got easier—especially when they saw the walls of the fortress ahead of them across the even plain of snow. He heard sounds of surprise all around, and they hurried again. Damn long hard night. Crystal didn't want to know how long they had walked, or how far they'd traveled—not until after he'd rested for a while.
That building promised warmth. Shelter.
"Is there a way in?” Otaka suddenly asked.
"Ah...” Tam said. “I don't think there is a door. People come in by shuttle—"
"There's a door,” Sharton said. He walked with one hand on his cane and the other on Zoe's shoulder. “Not many people know about it, though. There's a bay door down at the middle of the north wall that leads to a storage area for snow equipment. The Emperor who had this place built loved the snow. He wanted to go out into it."
"Well, that confirms my one theory,” Crystal said. “All royalty are crazy after all."
He saw Tam look back at him, smiling. And then he learned that their Assassin Prince was very good with snowballs, too...

Part Three: The Gathering of Friends
Chapter 1

Abby settled back into the chair, breathing slowly, and hoping that the waves of illness would soon end. Tristan had worked hard on both of them, aided by the powerful moon, but even so, Abby had so feared for the life of Emperor Kadrien that he had all but forced his friend to work only with him in the end. Abby knew that he would survive, and while he regretted that Tristan had to suffer with him, they both agreed that they could bear it, if it meant saving their companion.
They had not left the huge room that night. Abby didn't think he could walk back up the stairs, and even Tristan didn't want to attempt them, though he was the least injured of the three.
Abby had studied the room to take his mind from how he felt. A strange place filled with lovely art, but empty of any feeling. Emperor Kadrien had said the place belonged to him, but he didn't know it well.
Riches. Abby looked at this young man who lay on the sofa, ill and hurt, and considered that he held more than a title, like Abby's own father had claimed. Emperor, he realized suddenly, might really mean something here.
Something that allowed the man to collect sculpture that he never looked at, and to own a building so large that they might get lost in it—but which was not the place where he lived. Until now, Abby had never really considered the full implications of human power. He'd known rulers on many worlds. Either he or the Kiya—or both—were too often drawn to them. But he'd always seemed to meet such people on the edge of transition, with their hold on power precarious, their world turned upside down. Except that Emperor Kadrien was not where he wanted to be, there had been little out of place here.
He wondered about the lands this man ruled. He might ask about them, later, when they had time and the Emperor felt better. Right now, though, Tristan stepped back from the couch and made his way back to an empty chair, nearly falling into it as he sat down. He'd used magic all through the night, whispering spells that helped them recover as much as they could. Now Abby finally convinced him to rest as well.
He tried desperately not to think about Tabor, or where he was right now. Tristan had taken God's Honor and put it—not quite out of reach, but not easily grabbed, either. The Janin sat and whispered a song by his chair, strangely comforting during this long, madness-filled night. Even she seemed disinclined to go searching out her mortal enemies.
Except Tabor didn't seem to be an enemy now. Abby couldn't be certain any more. He couldn't begin to understand what had changed, and even Tristan had stopped trying to think his way around it.
They rested quietly, accepting what calm they could find. Abby needed that to take control of his mind again, but Tristan stayed close, a stronger presence than usual, and comforting when he didn't quite trust himself.
Emperor Kadrien had been feverish for a while, but even that had started to ease in the later hours. He sat up, and managed to direct Abby to the place in the far wall where he could find goblets, wine and water. Emperor Kadrien mixed the two for himself, admitting that he didn't want to be drunk. Abby and Tristan had water, which he seemed to find odd—but he said nothing
And now, finally, he wanted to know who they were, where they came from, and what brought them here. He had the sound of someone who not only ruled, but was used to getting answers. So Abby and Tristan told him the tale.
"If you had come to me at the palace and told me this tale, I probably would have had you locked away,” Kadrien said.
"Maybe, but there is the Janin,” Abby replied. He patted her and she hummed. “She is rather hard to ignore."
"True.” Emperor Kadrien moved a little on the chair, obviously easing some ache. “Tabor at least showed his power right away. Rather convincingly, in fact. I wonder where he's gone."
"He's... here still,” Abby said. He had been trying to ignore that fact all through the night. The curse tried to rise up again, and he pushed it away with hardly any help from Tristan this time. “He's still in this building, but wisely staying clear of me."
"Because he is your enemy."
"No,” Abby said. “I don't think I can call him an enemy now. But there are matters beyond my control."
"Because he is born from demons and you are born from gods,” Kadrien said, and met Abby's look—wary, worried—and trying to fit all of that into his world that had held no magic, no gods and demons.
"No,” Abby said. And that only confused the man more. “No, that really has nothing to do with it. I am cursed, Emperor. I am cursed to kill all demons. I cannot bear to have him near me. I wish it were otherwise. Tabor might prove... might prove a powerful ally, if I could work with him."
"He has helped us already,” Tristan said. He held up the bag of the Kiya. “All but two pieces, Abby. He's given us everything he could, and it cost him. We do not trust the gifts of the gods, but he faces the wrath of the demons. I would rather stand before your mother than deal with the sort of trouble that he has brought down on himself."
"True. I don't know what he hopes to gain."
"I think... I think gain had little to do with it,” Tristan said. “He's helped before, Abby, in odd ways—or at least not been as aggressive in his work as he should have been."
"I know,” Abby said. He touched his crown again. “I wish—"
But he stopped.
Sound.
He could hear something coming from the far end of the building, away from the way that Tabor had gone.
"Magic,” Tristan said with a start. He lifted his hand, but it shook. “Magic there, Abby."
"Gix? Tabor?” Abby said, starting to stand. Panic began to well up. He wasn't ready for another battle.
"I don't—I don't think so,” Tristan said. He sounded shaky. “I'm too worn—Gods, I didn't think—"
Abby silenced him with a warning not to call on the Gods now. He lifted God's Honor, but the sword felt far too heavy in his hand. The Janin whispered a song, uncertain as well. Even Emperor Kadrien got back to his feet, his face paling a little. Abby thought to suggest he stay here, but that didn't seem wise. There were only three of them, and they would be safest staying together.
They moved slowly toward the sound. At the far end of the room they found a wide stairs curving downward. Abby could hear the whispers of words.
Keep him safe, Abby thought, and he felt Tristan agree.
Abby stepped down the first stairs, his sword raised, coming around the curve—

Chapter 2

Crystal had taken the lead up the stairs, not out of any need to get up there quickly, but only because no one else had wanted much to move at all. Tamaris and Sharton said they would find nice places to rest at the top the stairs. He wanted comfort again. He wanted peace, and the warmth of this place promised safety.
He took the next step around the curve of the stairs and found himself with a sword point against his neck. His heart stopped, and then pounded twice as hard. He dared not move, except to turn his eyes upward from the blade to—
Abby.
Aubreyan Altazar, and Tristan beside him, and both of them quite as stunned as Crystal felt.
Joy. He couldn't remember ever feeling such joy as he did at this moment. He had hoped to see them again. He hadn't really expected that it would ever happen.
"Abby,” Etric whispered, taking a step up closer. “Abby and Tristan."
Abby lowered the sword. He blinked, and then he smiled in a way that Crystal had never seen before. It was his own, true smile because it came a moment later to Tristan.
"Crystal? My Lord Captain Etric? I—we didn't know we were here again."
"That explains so much,” Tristan said. He reached out and put a hand on Crystal's arm, as though to make certain he was real. “How we understood the language so well, so quickly, without using the crowns. Why everything felt... so familiar."
People came running up the stairs, pushing past other stunned members of the crew. Sand and her people, and Zoe, didn't understand, of course—but Kamil and Rqua arrived at a run they could not have managed long before.
"We—we picked them up, realized,” Rqua said with a laugh. “I couldn't believe it! Abby, what are you two doing here?"
"I never thought to find friends again,” Abby said. He closed his eyes for a moment, and Crystal saw the torn clothing, blood and wounds for the first time. “I never thought we would be so blessed—"
He sat down, right there on the steps. So did Tristan. And someone stood behind them, leaning against the wall and looking rather confused and worried.
Tamaris came up beside Crystal this time and smiled as well. “So, there you are. When we found these two, I rather suspected you might be around here somewhere."
"You cannot begin to imagine how happy I am to see you,” the man said.
"Oh, certainly I can,” Tam said and laughed. “We've dealt with these two before. My friends, this is my cousin, Emperor Kadrien. And I'm damned glad to find you, Kad, probably even more so than you are to see me."
"He thought he was going to have to be Emperor,” Crystal offered with a laugh.
"Oh yes. That would certainly frighten poor Tam,” the Emperor said and smiled.
Abby looked up at him, and then back at Tamaris. “That explains it. We were going crazy, you know. Emperor Kadrien reminded us of someone, but we couldn't really believe that it could be true. You two are very much alike."
"Is there a reason we're gathered here on the stairs?” Tam asked. He looked upward. “We've just had a very long, rather cold walk—and I'd really like to sit down somewhere comfortable. Any hope of that?"
"Walk?” the emperor said, and looked down at the rest of the group for the first time. “Where did you people come from?"
"We crashed an IG flagship out in the snow,” Etric said.
"Ah. On purpose?"
"No. Not this time,” Etric said.
Tam laughed and offered a hand to Abby. “Come on. You look like you've faced trouble. Maybe we'd better go some place and talk about it. Why did you take Emperor Kadrien?"
"We didn't,” Tristan said, standing slowly on his own. “Tabor did."
"Tabor is here?” Crystal said, worried again.
"Yes,” Abby said. He didn't sound particularly worried. “But—"
Movement at the top of the stairs, a shadow forming, someone coming around the curve. Tabor appeared, frozen in mid step, his eyes gone wide. He looked just as torn and battered as Abby and Tristan—perhaps even worse.
Abby's hand went toward his sword—and drew back. Tristan lifted his hand to stop the others, including Tam, who had already drawn a knife from somewhere.
"No. He helped us defeat Gix,” Tristan said.
"Helped you,” Tam said, his eyes still narrowed, his hand ready.
Tabor lifted both hands and backed away. “I heard sounds. I thought... I thought there might be trouble. I didn't expect—I never expected this group to be here."
"But you knew where we were,” Abby said, looking at Tabor. “You knew we were back here."
"Oh yes. But it's a damned wide reality, Aubreyan. I had no reason to believe that they would come here, to us."
"But I told you that my heir would be coming,” Emperor Kadrien said, waving a hand toward Tam.
"Your... heir? I was going to pit myself up against you again? Oh no, no, no.” He had begun to back away, though he nearly tripped this time. Crystal watched with amazement. This was not the man—the demonling—they had encountered on Taru. He'd changed.
"He gave us his pieces of the Kiya,” Tristan said. “And he stood before his father with us."
"Kiya,” Crystal repeated. “Oh hell. Damn. I'm an idiot!"
"Crystal?” Etric said.
"That's what Quan stole from the Admiral's room! That's what Rqua and Kamil kept hearing. That's what kept bringing back the old nightmares—"
"You have the Kiya?” Tristan asked.
"No, but it is here on this world now,” Etric said. He put a hand on Crystal's shoulder. “It's all right. We never would have thought of it without realizing these two were here, Crystal. It's in the hands of someone who traveled with us, and who ran out into the snow—with no protection. I suspect, all in all, that he won't be hard to find."
"It's a relief, you know,” Crystal said. “I thought I was going crazy."
He looked up the stairs again, and saw Tabor take another step back, though he put his hand to the wall this time, and looked as though he would fall.
Abby's hand had gone to the sword once more, and he picked it up—slowly. Tristan took it from his hand and handed it to Tam instead.
"Is that supposed to make me feel safer?” Tabor asked, a slight smile on his lips.
"No,” Tristan said. “It's supposed to make us feel safer."
Tabor bowed his head in agreement, but even that looked difficult. Tam, in fact, had lowered the sword and put away his dagger, though he didn't look particularly happy about having Tabor standing so close to his cousin.
Tristan had a hand on Abby's arm, obviously forcing calm. Crystal wished the demonling would go away and leave them alone. Go back to whatever hell he'd crawled out of—
Or maybe not. He'd help them fight Gix? The realization of what those words meant finally reached him. He could see the battle had not been easy, and Tabor seemed to have gotten the worse of it.
"I will go now,” Tabor said softly, though he nearly fell again when he started to move. Tristan reached for him, but Tabor waved him away. “No. You have Abby to hold. I'm weak, but I'm not helpless. There's still magic enough to help."
"We felt the magic, even out in our ship,” Etric said. He looked as though he too tried to fit all of this knowledge into something that made sense. Crystal had given up on that part. “For a moment, the world filled with magic. What happened?"
"I don't know,” Abby said. He sounded worried.
"I—” Tabor began. He straightened. “I went away from here, out into the snow fields, and I prayed to the gods for help."
Well.
Tristan looked stunned. Abby looked startled and then frantic. He pulled away from Tristan and moved so quickly that Tabor hadn't time to get away before Abby caught him by the arm.
"Are you crazy! The gods never give without a price! You know—"
Abby's breath caught in mid speech, his shoulders stiffened. Tristan scrambled upward and began to pry Abby's hands away.
"I did what I had to, Aubreyan. And I offered to pay the price for what I did. The surge of magic is all that allowed us to defeat Gix, who already knew I had taken all but the head of the Kiya—I couldn't get it, I'm afraid. He knew that I had come here, and he knew you were here. That magic is all that kept us from failing."
"What's the price? What did you agree to?” Abby demanded, his voice harsh, his hands reaching again while his body trembled against the powers that tore at him.
"They have not told me. Does it matter? I can't go back to Gix. I'll do what I must."
"No—demon blood—"
Tabor shook his head and looked at Abby, his face changing. Then he looked at Tristan. “I can help,” he said.
"Help?” Tristan looked back, and Crystal could see that he didn't even like to hear what the demonling said. Damn, he wished they could all agree to go talk somewhere else—somewhere with chairs. But he said nothing for the moment.
"There are matters you've never really taken into account, aren't there? Have you ever thought that the curse might be ended?” Tabor asked.
Abby started to reach again. Stopped. He stood very still in that moment. “Ended?” he whispered.
"The gods give blessings, but the demons reign over curses,” Tabor said. “Even those created by insane high elves. It's the balance, Abby—Tristan. Everything must balance."
"I don't understand,” Tristan said, shaking his head again.
"Give me your crown and I'll end the curse."
"No!"
Tristan panicked in that moment—and lost his hold on Abby, who snarled and leapt straight at Tabor. Tabor saw him coming and did nothing more than lift an arm in a vain attempt to hold him back. They both went down, tumbling on the stairs.
Abby tried to kill Tabor. Tabor made hardly even a feeble effort to fight him off as they slid down past Crystal. In fact, he saw Tabor close his eyes ... go still. Accept—
"Oh hell!” Tam shouted and leapt in to try to help Tristan, who grabbed Abby again.
Crystal did the same, shocked at how strong Abby could be, even in the shape he was in. In the end, Crystal ended up pulling the nearly limp demonling out of Abby's reach, and helped him back to his feet. Tabor couldn't have stood on his own. Blood ran down his chest.
Tristan had Abby. But in that moment Crystal saw Abby's eyes and the pain there seemed to reach out and grab his own heart as he looked up at them.
"I can not bear this any longer,” Abby whispered. “I cannot stand... the feeling that I cannot control my own life. It is not fair to Tristan. It's not right."
"Abby?” Tristan said softly.
But he didn't look at Tristan. He knelt there on the stairs and looked up at Tabor instead. “Please. Help me."
Tabor looked at Tristan. “I can do it, Elf. But you have to trust me. And you have to help me."
Tristan shook his head. But Abby reached up and put a hand on his friend's arm, drawing Tristan's attention back to him. “Please, Tristan. I cannot bear the madness. I want to be free of the curse, even if there is nothing else that ever—” He looked at Tabor and shuddered. His breath caught. “I want it to end. I want—I need sanity again. The battle is not made easier for—this curse. Please, Tristan—"
"Gods,” Tristan whispered. He looked at Tabor. “It's what he wants. Let's do it quickly."
Tristan reached down and helped Abby up. Abby and Tristan started up the stairs, Tabor pulling away from Crystal with a bow of thanks, and limping away.
Tam came up and stopped, looking at the man who still stood by the wall, watching everything with a look of worry.
"Stay with Crystal, Kad,” Tam said. “Just stay with him for now. If this goes well—it will be very good. If it doesn't, you don't want to be too close."
Kadrien nodded. The others had already started to go past, the crew looking worried and weary. Crystal wondered if they even considered the person they passed there on the steps. Sharton did—he bowed and nearly lost his balance, but Tathis caught hold of him and helped him on even before Emperor Kadrien could do more than look surprised.
The others had gone by. Crystal pushed away from the wall and bowed his head to the man who finally took a limping step upward. He didn't look ready for even the four steps to the top of the landing.
"We've not been properly introduced,” Crystal said, and dared to put a hand under the man's arm, helping him up the stairs. “I'm Captain Crystal of Fame."
"Ah yes,” Emperor Kadrien said with a nod of thanks. “The smuggler."
"Yes, the smuggler."
And that was the end of it. Somehow, in the midst of all of the rest of this madness, being either a smuggler or an emperor really didn't matter much.

Interlude in Hell

Gix pulled himself back through the portal, watching the world behind him with increasing rage as his hand bled acid where he passed. The elf saved Tabor. Tabor saved the godling. Tabor had taken all but the head of the Kiya to them, and he would have even given that had not Gix found favor in the little face, and always kept her, whispering, near him.
Tabor had gone to them.
The shock of it had sent Gix racing after the bastard, with every intention of destroying it before it could do more harm. That had been... unwise. Even as he started to step foot on the world, he knew that something he did not like had happened. He could feel the bright, burning magic of the gods in the air, already there, already working against him. He should have turned back—but he found the powerless human first, and that looked like an easy way to extract answers.
He had not expected Abby. And Abby worked as bait against him, holding his attention, with his lust for that godling in his hands, with the knowledge that he could have it, and the emperor to tie him to that reality. He wanted—
But even knowing Tabor had taken the pieces of the Kiya with him to this place, he had not been truly prepared for the depths of Tabor's treason.
His hand bled and ached. He had nearly lost his hold on the portal back to his own domain. Something that shouldn't have been here moved—something large, dancing in and out of realities, sending eddies of powers out of balance. Gix found that he needed all his attention focused on getting back to his own domain. For a moment he had even felt fear... that he would be lost, powerless, nothing but a voice upon the wind in places with nothing he could touch or control moved.
No. He would not fail like this, destroyed by something that he had created, weakened by his own rage.
He reached for home again, found his path—not clear, but each step closer brought the hill into sight. He would have preferred to go straight to the tower, but he knew the winds that such an arrival would make, and right now he was not in the mood to repair the damage they would cause.
But he did reach his world, and that itself gave him new strength. He looked back, watching the portal close again, losing any touch with Tabor. But he knew where to find him and the others.
He went to his tower then, using lesser magics. He flew through the storm-filled sky, raining the acid agony of his bleeding hand on everything below, especially the green that grew where Brendan had passed. It would only wither a few leaves, of course. Gix could not root that patch of hope from his world, and that angered him as well.
But now... now he had reached his home. Safety. He passed through empty halls, up and up to his place. And there Braith waited, kneeling already, the piece of mirror on the floor before him. He knew what had happened.
Thunder rolled through the air and lightning struck at the tower, again and again and again. When Gix cursed, the world trembled, and creatures cried out in pain and fear.
The world grew darker in those moments after Gix returned, enraged and wounded. Torment swept from the tower in beat with his inhuman heart, and he reveled in it.
He healed his hand. But for every moment of pain he had suffered, others suffered a thousand times more. He grabbed at the suffering of others and swept it up into a new level. Some would have died of it, if he had allowed such a kind thing to happen in his domain.
No, not here. Nothing here would die and be set free.
Tabor. The mere thought of the vile creature brought a new wave of anger to him. He thought about his son. Too human, it had been. And too trusted. He should have killed it as soon as it first failed, but he had set it out on a simple task that needed to be done, and he had liked having the lackey.
He opened the box at his right hand and looked down at the face of the Kiya. Sleeping now. She remained too weak most of the time to do more than whisper to him, and to call to the other pieces, but at least Tabor hadn't been able to get her as well. Gix brushed a newly healed finger along the edge of her face, and she opened her eyes and smiled, her mouth opening to show a row of sharp little teeth, perfect and sharp. He held his finger down and allowed her to bite and draw a little blood. Not too much. He didn't want her too strong. After all, she had been made of demon souls, and she might yet yearn for the taste of another.
He didn't trust her. He trusted no one and nothing.
Braith, kneeling before his master, his body bathed in sweat, told him about the ship that had come swooping into their world, and the winds and destruction left behind.
Braith expected punishment. Braith expected, in fact, not to survive this meeting. And although it would give Gix some pleasure to pull this creature apart atom by atom and let him feel the fires of his rage for a thousand years... he did not have time.
Because Tabor had gone to Abby, and he knew that shifted the balance in favor of the gods.
"Stand,” Tabor said. He closed the box again. He would not let it out of his reach. Tabor would not sneak off with this part of the Kiya as well, just because Gix had been lax. Fool, he thought to himself.
And the world trembled again at the thought.
"Lord Gix,” Braith said. He bowed his head, took a deep breath, and dared to look up.
"Tabor is too human. You were human once. Tell me why he has done this, and how we can use it against him."
"Yes,” Braith said. He stopped and stared off toward the wall for a moment. Impatience started to rise and the wind with it—but Gix tempered it again. Braith had not been human for a long time. It might well be worth letting him think this through. They had time. Tabor would not be coming quickly.
And besides, there was a reason why Braith was still his creature. Despite his failings, Braith had always held a mind as corrupt and dark as any that Tabor could find in the other worlds. Gix had nurtured that mind and given it power through the ages, preparing this moment, though even he had not anticipated such an event as this.
Tabor had gone to the humans. Not only had he gone to them, but they had accepted him. Gix had seen that already. The elf saved his life. The humans took him in.
Tabor was... dangerous.
"He did not go to them for power, my lord,” Braith said. “Given all I know about Tabor, I do not think he believed that he could win them to his hand. He will not be the one in charge, nor could he hope to reap any personal gain in the future."
"Vengeance, then?” Gix asked. Perhaps... Perhaps it had been a mistake to give the demonling to Braith. Perhaps if he had put Tabor in Braith's place...
No. A traitor now, he would have been a traitor anyway. It had been in his soul.
"Perhaps vengeance plays a part,” Braith said. Something lit in his eyes. “But there is something else. He went, I believe, because he wants to be one of them."
"One of them,” Gix said. The words made no sense at all. “He cannot be one of them. He is demon-bred."
"Demon and human, my Lord Gix. I think he has turned to his human side, and joins with humans to be one of them."
"Human."
"Yes, Lord Gix."
"He would be a fool to turn away from his demon blood in favor of powerless humans."
"He is a fool, my lord,” Braith said. Brightness had come to his eyes again, the mind awakening from a long sleep. “But it is a thing a human would do."
"Have you ever turned away from power for the companionship of humans?"
"Once, in my youth—so long ago I hardly remember,” he said. His eyes narrowed again. “I did walk away from the dark arts, to join the others whom I had seen in the village, to be one of them."
"What happened?"
"They shunned me. They turned me away and said I was evil and could never be one of them. So I went back to my tower. A few days later I rained such horror and destruction on them that even the handful of survivors were maimed and insane."
"They could turn Tabor away."
"They could. I don't think they will. They are not like my villagers, Lord Gix. They are people who know about good and evil, and who can feel the change in him. No. He will be one of them. We must move slowly, Lord Gix. We must think this through carefully. They will be Tabor's friends, but, my Lord Gix... friends make very easy targets."

Chapter 3

Abby looked down the long table where the others sat. Wonder—Gods, the wonder to find friends again. If only other things didn't plague him so much right now—
"You look battered,” Abby said. “You crashed your ships?"
"Ship,” Etric explained. He sat down, slowly, like someone who felt the weight of the world in every bone. “We had to leave Freedom and Fame on Silversun when the IGs took an unhealthy interest in Tam. We crashed an IG fighter we—picked up for the journey."
"Shot down?” Emperor Kadrien asked as he sat by Tam.
"Oh no. That would be too normal for this group,” Tam said. “We had some very odd engine problems. We kept going... somewhere else."
"Pardon?” Abby said, and even Tristan, who had started to reach for a chair, stopped.
"We kept jumping from this world to somewhere else entirely. I don't know where it was. We had the snow fields here, and somewhere—dark, red, gray. Dead."
"I saw some sort of tower on a hill,” Banning said.
"Gix's domain,” Tabor said. They looked at him, Abby feeling his heart pound. “It sounds very much as though you went to Gix's world. I should like to know how you did it."
"If that's true—” Etric said. “Yes, I would like to know how we did it as well."
"It may have been the magic of Gix's coming here before,” Tabor said. He leaned against the back of a chair, his face pale and damp. Fever? Abby worried for a moment—but he closed his eyes again in the next, for fear that the curse would take him again. He had nearly killed Tabor. He didn't want to.
"Sit down, both of you,” Tristan said.
The elf sat first, and pulled Abby down beside him. He shivered as he realized that Tabor had sat in the chair just the other side of him, and he had to keep his attention focused on Tristan.
"This won't be easy,” Tabor said softly.
Abby almost looked, and stopped himself. The others took chairs as well. Abby looked down at the table, at the lovely inlay of stone, at the carved wood. He let his fingers rub across it. Anything to keep himself from thinking about—
About the demonling sitting at his side. Enemy, curse—He felt it starting to rise again, and Tristan clamped a hand on his arm, forcing calm so quickly that it almost hurt. But he felt grateful.
"I want—I want escape from this madness,” he whispered. His hand had become a fist. He opened the fingers again, and rubbed them over the wood as a distraction, so he could be intent on something other than the world around him.
"I know the rest of you don't trust me,” Tabor said, his voice still soft. “I understand. But believe that I've thrown myself into this side of the battle, and there is no going back. The only way I can hope to survive is to fight with Prince Aubreyan Altazar. And I cannot do that if he cannot bear to have me near him."
"Abby and Tristan seem to trust you,” Etric said from across the table. He didn't look as certain. “I'm going to do what they think is best."
But Abby saw the way he looked to Tristan, and not him—because—
"You cannot trust me right now,” Abby said aloud. Etric looked back, startled, and perhaps embarrassed. “No, it's all right. It's true. You cannot trust me right now, and it is why I want this done. Whatever Y'may thought, he was insane when he cursed me. It never helped our cause."
"True,” Tristan said.
"Prince Tamaris, would you be so kind as to stand at my back with a weapon in your hand?” Tabor asked. Abby looked at him this time, startled. “It's the best protection I can give to the rest of you. If there is a sign that this has gone badly, then he can grab the crown and kill me."
Even Tam didn't look particularly pleased with that idea, though he did stand and take that place.
"Kamil and I—” Rqua said, lifting a hand to the side of his head. “We can still hear you, especially this close. We can... watch things."
"Rqua?” Tristan said softly. “You are not well?"
"I'm better. An injury, and it's messed with my psi ability. Right now that works in our favor. I'll watch as I can—though keep in mind that we don't always understand your words."
"Ah,” Tabor said. “Is that enough for the rest of you?"
"It doesn't matter,” Abby said. He had closed his eyes again. “I want it."
Tristan put his hand on the crown. For a moment he felt fear and hope that mixed so strongly Abby didn't even realize that the elf had taken the crown off.
But then he lost the solidarity of Tristan's hold on his soul. The curse surged up and Tristan's hold on the crown was barely enough to keep him from going mad.
And then... it became worse. Worse than having Tabor in the chair next to him. Tabor had his hand on the crown—the three of them there in that link. Abby gasped at the feel, a demon there in his head. Demon, enemy—
But Tristan stayed still. Tristan made sure that this would work. He would not let go of the crown yet, his free hand holding Abby to the chair.
Madness beyond anything Abby had known. Tristan started to pull the crown back—
"Calm, Aubreyan,” Tabor whispered. “Calm. I don't have much strength. I can do this, but you must be calm."
Abby shook his head, denying the calm that Tristan still urgently wished at him, working with the enemy this time.
"Then kill me,” Tabor said. He started to let go of the crown. “Kill me now. I will not fight you. Better to die now, by your hands, than to wait for my father to take me. I cannot fight him alone. I have given you the pieces of the Kiya. That's the best I can do."
"No!” Abby called out, afraid that Tam would obey. He could not bring full calm, but he could force himself still. Not to fight. “No. Do it."
Tristan let go of the crown.
Gods, gods—but he didn't dare say it aloud. Tristan had both hands on his shoulders now. Will not hurt Tristan. Still. Be still.
Tabor put the crown on his head. He already had the feel of the demon in his mind, and it wasn't much of a shock, the full contact. He felt Tabor's weakness, and the knowledge that he had no future, not after he defied Gix.
But I never had a future anyway, did I? Tabor's thoughts, oddly calm. The gods may be capricious, but they are not evil. They are not purposely cruel.
And for a moment Abby saw Tabor's life. The days in the hands of Braith—
Don't look. How can the two of you bear this closeness?
Tristan!
Calm, Aubreyan. Calm.
But he could feel a demon in the places where only Tristan had been allowed before. A demon pressing, pressing—but not pushing. Gentle. Not a demon's touch. Tabor. Tabor, Abby reminded himself, and he took a shuddering breath again.
Better, Tabor thought. Abby could feel weakness there again. The pounding of Tabor's heart, too hard and too painful. Poison?
No matter. Be still. Calm. I can do this, but we must move quickly.
Tabor moved deeper into his mind, following paths back through Abby's thoughts to a time when they had both been on Ylant and following the call of their blood; fools and pawns for powers that dared not move openly on any world. Games—and Tabor liked it even less than Abby did.
Back, back. Walking through a city of ruins. Tabor felt an echo of Abby and Tristan's shock at what they had found. No reason for such destruction.
The elf was mad. Quite mad. All that power, wasted, because he hated humans. He cursed himself, Abby, long before he cursed you.
And there is was, the curse itself, like a wall of black, malignant and evil, sitting on his soul. Abby could see it clearly for the first time. He wanted it—gone.
Good.
He felt Tabor testing the curse, feeling it. Tabor did seem to have some control over it. Abby could almost stand aside and watch, though he could feel the curse reacting as well, like something alive and ready to snap.
Tabor hadn't much strength. Abby knew that and realized it more now as the demonling gathered what power he had in that moment before he moved against the thing that ate at Abby's soul. It had grown, Abby thought. It had started to expand since the first day that the elf cursed him—
Yes, Tabor thought. They have powers of their own. They spread in fertile fields. I'm sure Y'may's own self-inflicted curse had darkened his entire soul. Be still, Abby. Almost done.
But he felt Tabor's fear in that moment; fear of his own weakness, and fear that he would fail in the one thing he could do to help.
Such a strange thought that it drove the madness away again in that moment.
Tabor reached, grabbed the darkness, held it in his grip and tore it apart. Like a curtain had been pulled aside, his mind cleared—Abby felt even Tabor's wonder at what he saw there, in that moment. Bright, pure, powerful. Free of curse—though it struggled in Tabor's hands.
Abby wanted it away. Abby shoved at the curse, and Tabor pulled it along, out and out—but in that last moment Abby faltered. Set it free?
No. It cannot survive without you to feed it. Let it go. Be rid of it and be free at last.
Abby had never been really free. The idea intrigued him. But the curse had gained a little power in that moment. It tried to burrow back into his mind, a painful shock that made him shudder.
"I almost... almost have it,” Tabor whispered aloud. Perhaps the others had thought Abby in danger in that moment. Perhaps Tam had—
"I'm still safe Abby. I'm fine. Don't think about it. The curse. We must rid you of this. I fear I could not do it again—"
"Quickly, Tabor,” Tristan whispered. “I can feel him tensing again. I won't be able to hold him this time."
Quickly, Abby agreed. Tristan was right; he wouldn't be able to hold back much longer, to divert himself from the madness. He feared the curse would come back on him again, and grow darker. He could see the brightness and the freedom that lay beyond it. He would not let it come back. No. He shoved it away.
And it went. Went out into Tabor's hand and then shattered in the demon's own mind—painful, sharp shards that drove through his head.
Gone.
Tabor gasped, and before Abby saw more than a glimpse of fire in his mind, he took off the crown and held it out to Tristan, his arm shaking.
"Take it! Take it quickly! I can't hold back any longer—"
"Tabor?” Abby whispered. “What—you're hurt—"
Tristan had his hand on the crown again. The three of them once more, but so different from just the moment before.
"Take it, Elf!"
He dropped the crown. Tristan barely kept it in his hand, startled. Tabor had started to fall forward already, moaning softly this time. Blood ran down his arm.
Tristan had the crown in his hands. He feared to put it on. Abby understood that suddenly, and looked back at his friend.
"It's all right, Tristan,” Abby said. He put a hand on the elf's arm. “It is well and truly all right for the first time in a long, long time."
Tristan's face brightened. He pulled the crown up and onto his head—and he smiled.
"He did it."
"Yes. And now we had better help him, or I fear our demonling ally is going to die right here in this chair. Tristan?"
Tristan came around and knelt by the chair, a hand on Tabor's arm. Magic moved up through the wounds. Hard work. The wounds had been far more serious than even Abby had realized.
But Tabor moved, lifted his head. Abby helped him sit up again.
"Thank you, Tabor."
Tabor blinked, and smiled.
And there was a new madness and a strange hope in that look that made demonling and godling allies.

Chapter 4

Etric watched the actions of the three with a spell on the tip of his mind, ready to act if he thought it would help. He didn't know what to do. He didn't know what to trust—
The silence had gone on too long, and then he suddenly knew when Tabor destroyed the curse. He saw it in Abby and Tabor—the immediate change in Aubreyan's face, and pain in Tabor's that he hadn't expected.
By the time Etric came around the table, still ready to help, Tristan had already healed some of Tabor's wounds, and their new ally had regained consciousness. He did not look well.
Etric reached out, startling Tabor.
"I won't hurt you, but I do have magic as well. I can help Tabor."
"Why?” Tabor asked, his face damp, his chest still bleeding.
"Because you are one of us now,” Etric said. “But then, you have helped us before. You told me to shoot that creature that came from your father's realm, didn't you?"
"What?” Crystal said, startled.
"Back on Taru,” Etric said. He put a hand very softly on Tabor's shoulder. He still looked oddly afraid. “In those last moments—"
"Braith,” Tabor said. “He would have cast—but I wasn't really certain you understood what I said. I had thought, perhaps, it was only wisdom on your part."
"I would never have fired into the heart of such magic. I have two deaf crewmen, Tabor. I read lips very well."
"Ah.” He leaned his head back. “Careful. Don't waste magic now. We may still have need of it soon."
"No waste,” Etric said. He whispered a little magic that eased the pain away from Tabor, and helped him to rest, at least. Peaceful, even with the pain still there in his body. Tabor had suffered a great deal, and silently.
Etric drew his hand back and looked at Abby and Tristan—and stopped again, shocked at the change. He never would have thought that there had been something wrong with Abby before this. Considering the war he fought, it had seemed only natural that he should be reserved.
But now—now his eyes showed concern. He and Tristan both looked years younger.
"I'm glad to see you two again,” Etric said, smiling at Abby's look of pleasure. “I must be mad to think so, but I am glad. And Tabor—he's really working with us?"
"Oh yes,” Abby said. He reached out and touched Tabor's hand, as though testing to make certain he could. “He could not lie to me, not on the level where we worked. He saw more of me than I did of him, but still—"
"Yes,” Tristan said. He dropped suddenly into the chair behind Abby, looking worn again. “I can still feel it there, too. He's not lying. He's working with us. Gix never trusted him, and I think he knew for a long time that he would never do any better with the demon. But that's not why he came to us. It would have been as easy for him just to walk away, to disappear. He didn't have to bring us the Kiya."
"He didn't want Gix to win,” Abby said. “He didn't want the rest of humanity to suffer what he had."
Tristan nodded. Etric looked back at the figure slumped uncomfortably in the chair. “His heart is labored. We can help him, but he does need rest. Anyone here able to help me get him to a bed?"
Kamil and Otaka came and carefully lifted Tabor from the chair. He came partially awake, startled and afraid—but Etric used magic to send him back to sleep again. The demonling obviously didn't particularly like that part, but he didn't fight it—not yet.
"There are rooms,” Kadrien said, slowly standing as well. “There are rooms throughout the next floor. I suggest, if it is wise, that we all go there, and rest. You all look weary."
"We are, sire,” Prince Sharton said, standing slowly as well. “And I would be grateful for your hospitality."
"We all would,” Tamaris added.
"How did you come to be with this group, Prince Sharton?” Kadrien asked as they started away.
"I came to warn Tam about some trouble stirring with the IGs on Silversun. I'd come home not long before, just for a visit. I would think it luck, but I'm beginning to think more in terms of fate and gods these days. I had codes that helped, you see."
"Ah, of course,” Kadrien said. Etric saw him take hold of Sharton's arm when he started to falter. Sharton looked shocked. “It's all right. I'm not my father, you know."
"I know. I'm sorry. Forgive me. Everything has changed so much. I am a member of Captain Crystal's crew now, Emperor."
"Are you?” Kadrien said and smiled suddenly. “My, you and Tam do keep odd company."
"Exciting company,” Tam said. “And you certainly can't say anything considering who we found you with."
"Can't argue with that one,” Kadrien said. “The world has gone mad."
"Oh yes. But that always happens when Tristan and I arrive,” Abby replied.
And he laughed. Etric looked at him and grinned, and tried very hard not think about a future where they might have to part again. Right now... right now he need only consider being here. No use thinking to the future.

Chapter 5

Kadrien took the others up to the rooms and got them settled. It helped, in an odd way, for him to play at being a host, even without the usual myriad of servants to take care of everyone's needs.
Ah, but these were far from the usual types of people he entertained at court, nobles who couldn't find their way from the bed to the bathroom without a servant to lead them. These people knew how to take care of themselves.
Tam helped him, and knew what some of the others needed. Tam told him not to worry about Abby and Tristan. He introduced Kadrien to the others, just a few at a time as they settled into rooms. Kadrien saw the looks of shock in some faces as they finally came to the realization that they were talking to the emperor.
It amused him.
He could move among these people without fear. He'd never had that before, but he took his cue from Tam, who had been at least as well trained in paranoia as he had been. Tam treated them as equals, these free traders and smugglers.
Even Prince Sharton of Silversun, who had grown up in court in circumstances that the crown prince had been spared, at least, seemed at ease with everyone.
Kadrien made sure Tamaris had the room next to his, and their rooms connected by a door. He wanted Tam close by today, and Tam didn't argue. In fact, when Kadrien started to head back toward his own room, he put a hand on the emperor's arm and stopped him.
Kadrien looked at him, worried, shocked—
"Sorry. You're still living partly with the court rules."
"Yes,” he said. He dropped into a chair by the bed and waved Tam toward the bed. “Sit down. Don't worry about it. I'm just shaken still. Until you and your friends showed up, I didn't know what to do, Tam. Until you showed up, I wasn't entirely certain that Abby and Tristan were any better than Tabor."
"Well yes, I can see where you could be confused,” Tam said. He sat on the bed, and looked as though he had to fight not to fall over and just go to sleep right now. “If we hadn't dealt with Abby and Tristan before—"
"You never sent word of that part. I knew that you traveled with odd people, but—"
"What could I have told you? I fought on the side of a godling in the battle against evil, but he and Tristan are gone now... No. It sounded quite mad, every time I started to do a note."
"I would suppose so,” Kadrien said. “Tam... I'm lost in all of this. It's far beyond anything I can even remotely begin to understand. What should I do?"
Tamaris looked at him, his head tilted a little. And then he smiled. “You want a very truthful, but probably difficult, answer?"
"Yes."
"Pretend that you are a member of the crew and follow orders."
Kadrien started to protest. Stopped and thought about it and all the people he had seen out there. Thought about the trouble and the battle they'd already fought.
He nodded. “Yes. Yes, I imagine that would be the best and safest thing to do. You people have survived a great deal."
"Exactly,” Tam said. He leaned back on an elbow, as though Kadrien's acceptance of the idea suddenly made him... one of them. He looked at ease. “We can survive this, Kadrien."
"I hope so."
"I'm damned glad to find you here,” Tamaris said, more emotion in his voice than Kadrien expected. “Have I said that already?"
Kadrien laughed. His cousin had changed for the better, it seemed. He remembered Tamaris as quiet, afraid in ways that he seldom showed, taciturn, but loyal. “Well, now you don't have to be emperor. I imagine it is quite a relief."
"I wouldn't have been emperor anyway,” Tam said and looked up at him. “You always knew that, didn't you?"
"Yes,” he admitted, what he had never said aloud before. “And I always knew that you would be the one to make the choice. The other two—"
"Dead. One died of the shock, and the other was killed by over-anxious courtiers who didn't know their own man had already died."
"Not a surprise there,” Kadrien said. “So, you are the last one."
"Why don't you have other heirs? Why haven't you married?"
Kadrien hadn't expected that question, but it didn't entirely surprise him either. “Because I have been thinking for a long time now that this is the generation that should let go. They don't need an emperor, Tam. The council, yes. Representatives—but not an emperor. There have been too many like my father in our history."
"You don't intend for anyone to follow you."
"I also intend to take the IGs down before I let go."
"Good,” Tam said, without even a pause. “You fell in with the right group. If you need it, we'll help you take them down—after we've settled this matter with Abby and Tristan again."
Kadrien leaned forward, startling Tam this time. “Tell me the truth, Prince Tamaris. Do you truly believe in gods and demons and all the rest of this?"
"Oh yes,” Tam said. He sat up again. “I believe in it all, Kad. I believe in the battle, I believe in the war—and I believe that we are fighting for good against evil. But then, that's a war I've been fighting for a long time already, you know. And they know what I've done, most of them."
"They know about your work?"
"Yes. Abby and Tristan knew. Many of the others do.” Tam frowned a little this time. “I worried at first—but once I knew that Abby and Tristan accepted me—"
"It changed you,” Kadrien said.
Tam looked startled. Then he smiled. “Yes, I suppose it did. I accepted as they did. I haven't worked as an assassin for a long time. It wasn't so hard for me to side with them, Kadrien."
"Good."
"Now go rest. Sleep while you can. I have been through this before. You're going to regret the loss of any sleep you don't take now. Things are never calm when Abby and Tristan are around—not for long anyways."
Kadrien stood and gave his cousin a little bow of his head before he walked to the door, pausing there to look back. He felt better, though no less confused. Tam had kicked off his boots and even pulled off his jacket, leaving only a shirt and a harness for the knife he always wore on his right arm. Odd to see that—he had always been so careful in the past. But it also made him seem more like the Tam he had known before—the Tam who had been his only true friend at court.
Tamaris looked over at him, standing there in the doorway, watching.
"I'll be here, Kad. You're safe."
And that helped, too.

Part 4: Following the Storm
Chapter 1

Resting should not have seemed so alien. The mere idea of resting should not have sent him pacing the floor—but Etric couldn't help it by the third day. Everything had been calm. Everything had been quiet. And he knew that it couldn't last much longer.
They had needed the time here. He felt grateful for it... but at the same time...
He went downstairs again, and wandered finally into the computer room, where he found Ylin and Damien this time. It had been Istanan and Kamil the last time he came through this area. That amused and annoyed him. The crew found things to do. Only the captains—and mages—went mad, pacing.
"Good news, Captain,” Ylin said looking up from the floor where he sat, his braced leg out in front of him and pieces of equipment spread out around him. “I can make something work here in the communications equipment. But then there's a more important question to answer."
"Whom to call,” Damien said with a grim nod. “Somehow, I don't think we want to put out a call to the IGs to come and get us. And they are out there, Captain. We've started picking up a few broadband transmissions. It sounds as though there's been some trouble on world."
"Have you mentioned this to Kadrien?"
"Oh no,” Ylin said. “We thought we'd leave that for you. Give you something to do."
Ylin always claimed he had no psi abilities but at times like this Etric doubted that story very much. He left them to the work, and as chance would have it, he found Emperor Kadrien up in the main hall, stretched out on the sofa with a book reader in hand. How very odd. He looked relaxed while the rest of them went insane with the waiting.
"Captain Etric,” he said, setting the book aside and swinging his legs over the edge of the sofa. He gave a bow of his head. “You look well. Is everything going all right?"
"Yes, sire.” Oh, and he winced at that, did he? How very telling. Their emperor had already spent far too much time with Tam and Abby, at the very least. “Ylin and Damien think they can get some communications equipment working. They're not entirely certain what they will do with it, though. They think that there may be more IGs in the area, and that there's trouble elsewhere on world."
"I'm not surprised,” Kadrien said. He leaned back. “No, we do not want to bring the IGs here. I'm not sure even Abby and Tabor could deal with all of that trouble. Or that they need to, just now."
"True,” he said. Kadrien didn't look particularly upset at the idea that they couldn't get him back to his throne right away. “I'll leave you to your book and let you relax. Take advantage of this quiet time. We're not likely to have it for long."
"That's what Tam keeps telling me. Maybe you ought to do the same."
He agreed with a bow of his head. Well, agreed at least in theory, but as he started back up the stairs, he kept wondering what—
Finding Banning, Tabor, and Seaton waiting for him by his door made him rethink everything. He maybe didn't really want something to do that badly.
"Good. I'm going to get Crystal,” Banning said. Quietly. “I'll be right back."
"Am I going to like this?” Etric asked as he pushed open the door to his room.
"I don't know, Captain Etric,” Tabor said. “It's madness. But you people seem to live in madness."
Another good point.
Seaton looked excited. Tabor looked worn and still too pale. Etric had been trying to help him with little bits of magic every day, but Tabor had told him to save the powers he had for the battle they must surely soon fight. He worried that the demonling still had trouble with his heart—
Crystal came back with Banning, and they went into the room and closed the door behind them. Crystal looked confused, too, which didn't help really. He liked to think one of them had a clue what their crews were up to.
"Captains,” Seaton said with a bow of his head. “We've been using the rebuilt fortress's computers to study the chits from Justice. I think we've found out what happened when the ship jumped from here to Gix's world and back again."
Banning leaned against the wall and looked from one to the other. “I have a degree in tri-dimensional temporal physics,” she said.
"Damn. You never put that on your resume,” Crystal said, dropping into the nearest chair. Etric, still feeling confused and curious, sat down next him.
"Well, you were looking for someone with a background in black markets, as I recall,” Ban replied with a bright smile. “But never mind. I wouldn't have even begun to understand what happened to us if I hadn't had that degree. What happened—as far as I can tell so far—is that magic interacted with the engine and its power source—a large amount of magic, so it must have been from the magic the gods created. I don't know entirely what Quan did. I keep thinking he tried to fire the slide engines and blow us all to hell—but that just doesn't tally with the sequence of events. It doesn't matter, though."
"Why the secrecy?” Etric asked.
"Because I can see a way that we can recreate the event,” Banning said. She looked at him, and then at Crystal. “We're being secretive because there are two people who may find this troubling. We can go with Abby and Tristan. Even to Gix's own hell."
Etric looked toward the door, as though he expected Abby and Tristan to come through right then. He turned to Tabor. “You haven't told them."
"No,” Tabor said. “It seems... unwise to burden them with this sort of knowledge right now."
"Right,” Crystal said. “They'd tell us that there is no way in hell—so to speak—that we are going with them. But if they don't know, they don't have to worry about it."
Tabor bowed his head in agreement, and leaned against the wall, obviously worn. Etric stood and waved him to the chair and shook his head when Tabor started to argue. “No, just sit down. I need to walk again. We need to think this out. How certain are you three?"
"We've ran all the comp simulations we can, and they read true,” Seaton said. “We've done recreations as close as we can without actually firing up a ship engine and having one of you shove magic into it."
"We'll do more tests,” Banning said. “But I wanted both of you to know before this went any farther."
"Yes,” Etric said. Crystal nodded, still looking a little stunned. “Keep us both informed."
The three nodded and Banning started back out the door, the other two hurrying to catch up with her. Etric watched them leave and then turned back to Crystal.
"That's a dangerous group,” Crystal said. He leaned back in the chair, still looking stunned. “Go with Abby and Tristan? Do you think that would be wise?"
"No, not wise at all, but that's what I want to do. Why do you think they didn't bring Sand in, since Seaton is her man?"
"Sand has somewhat distanced herself from the rest of us,” Crystal said with a shrug. “Seaton is in the thick of things with Banning and Tabor. But I'll ask him to be certain. I'm going to go get some rest. I'll see you at dinner."
Etric nodded, though suddenly he didn't want to be alone in his room. He ended up standing by the window for a long time, staring out over the snow-covered fields toward the distant mountains. The deceptive peace of this place lulled him and others into thinking they had found rest and an end, but they couldn't stay here.
He stared at the mountains for a long, long time. When he went down to dinner he had a plan ... but he didn't think the others would like it much.
Etric watched the people as they gathered around the fancy table where they had sat that first day. Magic, medicine and a few luxuries like baths and very nice clothing certainly hadn't hurt anyone. Staying longer would help... but he feared that they might not have that kind of time.
Kamil and Otaka brought out the food tonight. They had done a wonderful job with the fortress's extensive stores. And they didn't bring out a meat dish, not with Abby and Tristan at the table. The soup looked like a medley of a dozen vegetables and spices, and it smelled heavenly.
Etric waited until everyone had their food. How the hell had something this important fallen into his hands?
He looked down the table, his food untouched. Crystal watched him curiously, and then with more worry. So did Rqua. Decisions to make, but the first one would not be in his hands.
"Emperor Kadrien?"
Kadrien, sitting between Tam and Sharton, looked up with a start, as though hearing his title came as a total surprise. And now he looked worried as well, which rather amused Etric.
"Yes?” he said, frowning.
"Before anything else is settled here, I think it wise to ask what you want."
"What do I want?” he said. He put down his spoon. Tamaris did as well, but he looked a little amused by it all. The others seemed surprised to find the emperor didn't have a quick answer.
"As is often the case,” Kadrien said at last, “what I want and what I must do are two entirely different things."
"Yes,” Etric said, understanding, although he would have preferred a different answer.
"I must go back to the Capital,” Kadrien said. It didn't surprise anyone, though Etric saw the way Tam shook his head, as though to deny it. “I can't turn my back on what is going on, either there or in the rest of the empire, and just hope it works out for the best."
"My fault—” Tabor said.
Kadrien waved a hand toward Tabor, silencing him with that rather imperial gesture. “You just happened along and set things in motion. They were already primed. Tam got my message. I had asked you to come here."
"Yes,” Tam said. “I forgot that—"
"The IGs were starting to gather forces. I had heard rumors. I already feared they would get to me before you did, especially if I did not contact you right away.” Kadrien turned away from Tam and back to Tabor. “You only moved faster than my true enemies."
"Chance, circumstance, fate—and probably the gods, all played on our side,” Tabor said. Abby looked uncomfortable at that line, but he didn't deny it, either. “But now you think you must go back?"
"From what Ylin told me, the IGs seem to be moving against the government. Maybe they think my disappearance is fortuitous for them. I'd rather they learned differently."
"Oh yes,” Tam said, agreeing at last.
"You have a plan, don't you Etric?” Crystal said, and put down his own spoon this time. He looked even more worried. He probably remembered Etric's look from years ago in the Midori fields. That had been a time for daring actions as well, and very nearly as dangerous, when it came down to it.
"We obviously can't call the IGs in for help,” Etric said. “And from what we've learned, there's no one else who is going to get in past them. So we are going to have to do something different. The only choice left is to hike out."
That drew all the reaction Etric could have hoped for, if he had wanted dramatics.
"You've gone totally mad!” Tamaris said, louder than the others.
"There are hundreds of kilometers between us and the nearest settlement!” Banning added, shaking her head in absolute negation. “I've looked at the maps. The closest settlement is clear on the other side of the mountains!"
"Palin,” Kadrien said, nodding. “One of the few cities outside the dome and popular with councilors as a getaway. I've been there a few times."
"The other side of the mountains? We'd never make it that far—” Crystal said, but then he stopped. He looked toward Tabor, Abby, and Tristan.
Oh yes, Crystal understood. They'd used magic to escape the fields and slavery, too.
"I would not even begin to consider something like this, except for one thing,” Etric said. He lifted his hand and let a pretty blue fire dance along his fingers. None were used to such blatant magic, not even his crew, and they all fell silent at the sight. “We have mages that will help us through this. Several people, in fact, who can provide us with magical help—if Abby, Tristan and Tabor are willing to come along."
"I've no intention of leaving, or going after the Kiya, until I'm certain the rest of you are safe,” Abby said. He gave a little shrug and even smiled. “My battles will wait. They aren't going to get any worse for it. This Quan may well just be lying dead out there somewhere, and it will only be a matter of letting the Janin find the Kiya and leaving. I can wait a while longer."
"I am embarrassed for having gotten Emperor Kadrien into this mess, even if it did work out in the end,” Tabor said. “And I will gladly help in any way I can. However, I am not nearly as powerful as I was when I first came to this world. I've lost my ties to Gix's domain, and what power I could draw from there. I'm not helpless, however. I could, very likely, transport the Emperor and myself back to his palace—"
"No!” Tam said, startling them all. “No, that's not wise. At this point we have no idea what he might drop back into."
Sharton nodded emphatically as well, though as usual, he held his peace. Etric wondered if he would ever open up like the others.
"What do you think, Emperor Kadrien?” Etric asked.
"You don't need to look to me for answers,” Kadrien said. “In fact, under the circumstances, it's better if we understand right now that I am not the person in charge.” He stopped and shook his head. “Look, people, I am, at best, a rather high-ranking clerk. That's what my work consists of—sorting through data and finding the best ways to make things work for the most people."
"And you've done a damned good job of it, too,” Tam said.
Kadrien laughed. “Thank you, Tam. Etric, Tam told me the first night that I should pretend that I'm crew and just obey orders."
That drew looks of appalled shock from everyone but Crystal. Sometimes Crystal still amazed him.
"We need to decide,” Etric said. “We need to do something rather than just sitting here. We do have enemies."
"Too many of them,” Tabor agreed. “I do not expect Gix to come back too soon—but he will eventually, especially if he thinks he can grab Abby and the pieces of the Kiya. And the rest of you would mean nothing to him. I can guarantee that he will not be happy."
"Ah yes,” Abby said. “An excellent point."
"And the IGs will only grow stronger the longer we wait,” Sand added.
"We should finish dinner and enjoy this meal,” Tam said. He picked up his spoon and looked at it. “I have the feeling we're not going to have very many more times like this."
"Too true,” Banning said. She frowned. “I'll start inventory on what I can find that we'll take with us. We'll need to check those snow sleds in the bottom of the fortress, too. It may take a bit to get them powered but that will at least get us some distance."
"Good,” Etric said. He had started to feel not quite as panicked over this idea. “Eat. Relax. Rqua, Tabor, Tristan, Abby—we'll need to discuss what we should do."
Abby and Tristan bowed their heads in unison. Etric wondered what went through their minds right then. They probably considered this all madness.
But the others had apparently all agreed. He almost regretted it. They would be leaving this sheltered paradise soon, and he knew they weren't going to find any place safe or comfortable again for a long, long time.

Chapter 2

Abby sipped his tea and looked out the window. White on white—he could feel the cold even through the glass. He did not want to go out there.
Tristan, across the room placing food away in a pack, nodded.
"I do wish you two would stop doing that,” Tabor said as he slid into the chair beside Abby.
"Not likely to happen,” Abby answered. He pushed his cup over toward Tabor. “You look cold."
"I went outside with Kamil and Otaka.” Tabor took the cup and wrapped his fingers around it, holding onto the warmth rather than sipping it. “You know, other than the fact that my father's realm is rather dry and hot, I was also born in the southern lands, where it never snowed. What am I doing here?"
"Ha. You're the only one who really had the choice, you know,” Tristan said.
"And you didn't, Elf?"
Tristan laughed even before Abby could think to say anything. He let it go and reached over to tap the Janin when she started to get a little too loud. He saw the way her eyes narrowed when she looked at Tabor.
"I don't have to warn you about her, do I?” Abby said, looking at Tabor.
"Oh no. Don't worry. I have no intention of going near the Janin. I've found that I've developed a phobia about intelligent staffs and enchanted swords. I want nothing to do with them. I do, however, rather like the little laser pistols these people have."
"Dangerous weapons,” Tristan said, shoving the last things into the pack. “I prefer magic. Far less likely to kill unintentionally."
"True.” Tabor finally sipped the tea and then pushed the cup back toward Abby. He frowned. “What do you expect of me?"
"To help as best you can,” Abby said. He waved a hand out toward the snow and the far distant mountains. “These friends of ours have a long and dangerous journey to undertake, Tabor. They will not survive without magic, and Etric and Rqua cannot provide enough on their own, especially since Rqua is still recovering from his injury. I expect that you will help us get them to safety. And now I have a question for you. What do you want, Tabor?"
Tabor put his hands on the table and looked at them for a moment, then finally turned back to Abby. “I want to change things that cannot be changed, Aubreyan Altazar. I want to go back to a time when I could have made all of this different. But barring that impossibility, I want to make certain that I do what is right in the future. I do not want to fail again."
Tristan came back across the room and put a hand on Tabor's shoulder, startling him. Not used to having anyone touch him? Abby had not thought about it until then, but Abby knew he'd been lucky to have Tristan with him. It was all that had kept him sane.
Tristan did not laugh.
"You will not fail, Tabor,” Tristan said. “You made the right choice. And besides, you are too human. You will not fall back to demons, even if they offer you the possibility. You would not let them do to these people what they did to you."
"Tristan—” Tabor said.
"I have seen it; an echo in Abby's mind of what he saw in your mind. We know. You will not fail, Tabor, because you turned away from what the demons offered and chose your human side instead. Abby feels he's not human enough anymore, but you are both linked by your humanity and that's what drives you to help others."
Tabor looked at Abby, and finally bowed his head in agreement. “Yes. You are right. I hope."
"Never argue with him,” Abby said. “He always wins."
"Maybe you just give up too easily,” Tabor suggested.
"You don't live in his mind,” Tristan said. “You just don't hear the arguments. And that, truly, is a blessing for the rest of you."
"I do not argue!” Abby said, appalled.
Tristan laughed. “You argue about everything from eating to letting me do whatever work I need to do."
"Well, yes, but..."
Tabor laughed. “I didn't realize. I thought ... The way the two of you act in unison so often, I assumed that you just naturally never argued. You know, it's good to realize that you two are less than perfect after all. But I won't tell the others. It might frighten them."
"Ah yes,” Tristan said. “Best not to disillusion them about our perfection."
And Abby laughed this time. He had not realized how little sense of humor he'd had for so long. It was good to sit here with Tristan and Tabor and to feel... human again?
Banning arrived at the door, gave the three odd looks, and nodded. “I'll be right back."
She stepped back out of the room. Tabor looked to the door, and then back to Abby again.
"I have no idea what that was about,” Abby said. “I can't even begin to understand these people."
However, she came back a few minutes later with an armful of heavy clothing. “These should fit you. If they don't, let me know."
"Thank you,” Tristan said.
She smiled. “We'll be leaving in the morning. You three should get some rest. We're going to need your help."
"We'll be ready,” Tabor said.
Banning nodded, and left again.
"They seem to be ready,” Tristan said. “Good. We need to get away from here before enemies catch up with us—ours or theirs."
"Maybe so, but it has been a pleasant place to rest. I wish we could have stayed longer. We leave too soon,” Abby said, waving a hand toward the snow again. “I don't know that I'm ready to go out there again, even with magic."
"Ah, and we can agree on that,” Tabor said with a quick nod. He looked back at the door. “It bothers me, Abby. They are too trusting, your friends."
"And you're not?” Tristan asked. “You made yourself an enemy of the demons in the belief that Abby will win."
"Oh no,” Tabor said. “I did far worse than that. I did it only in the hope that he will win."

Chapter 3

Crystal trudged over the snow, silently cursing. He knew that it wouldn't do any good to say aloud the things he felt right now. He had heard them all in the last hour, anyway, from the rest of his companions. No one liked being out here.
When he looked to the man who walked by his side, he did feel a certain amount of ironic amusement. He wondered who had decided to team him with Emperor Kadrien. It had the feel of something Etric would do, but he couldn't begin to decide why. Surely Tam would have been a better companion—
Or maybe not. Tam had gone with Tabor. That would be a dangerous team to anything that turned up.
They topped another of the damned hills. He looked ahead, seeing that they had already climbed the highest in the area. He did not find the view inspiring—snow and hills and more snow, and there in the distance the line of mountains. He tried not to think about how long it was going to take to reach them, and that not even the hardest part of the journey.
The closer view actually looked more promising. Down and up and down another hill ... and he could see that the sleds had stopped in the next hollow, and the people who rode on them had begun setting up a quick camp. Etric had insisted that they stop every few hours on this first day. He did not want to get too far from the fortress and find that none of them were in condition to go on. It seemed wise. And welcome.
"Ah, good. The sleds are parked again. I think they'll have tea by the time we arrive,” Kadrien said. He even smiled.
"You cannot possibly be enjoying this,” Crystal said.
"It's been a very interesting few days for me. I've had more adventure then I ever thought I would have,” Kadrien said with a shrug. He started to slip on the trail the sleds had made, but Crystal caught his arm. “Thank you."
"It's cold out here,” Crystal said. The feel of ice had crept in around his warm clothing. “It's going to be a long time before we are warm again."
"True,” Kadrien said. “But for the moment, I would rather enjoy this walk in the snow than dread the future. Being cold is not the worst that could happen."
"Yes, I suppose you're right,” Crystal said. He looked back the way they had come, but he could no longer see the fortress. He sighed despite himself. “But it is a damn long ways to anywhere."
"Do you have doubts, Crystal?” Kadrien asked softly.
"Hell yes,” Crystal said. They hurried down the other side of the slope, nearly catching up with Kamil and Wesna. “We'd be fools not to."
"Then you don't trust magic to get us through?” he said, looking worried now.
"I'm a thief and a smuggler. I trust what I can do with my brain and my hands. I'm good with them, and I try very hard not to get into situations where I cannot use either to get me out of trouble.” He looked at his gloved hands and shook his head again. Then he looked at Kadrien, who waited patiently for the answer he really wanted. “No, Emperor, I do not trust magic. But I do trust our mages."
"Ah. I see. They are good, aren't they?"
"Etric, by himself, is likely the best mage in our reality. The others—well, Abby doesn't really have magic of his own, you know. But linked with Tristan, he's very powerful. And you've had experience with Tabor."
"Oh yes,” Kadrien said with a quick nod. He still looked bothered by that. “He is quite good."
"Our experience with Tabor and magic has been... well, rather more of observing it than being part of it. It's good to have him on this side now."
They reached the bottom of the hill, and started across the short flat ground toward the next hill. Tristan wondered if any ground actually lay under those mounds, or just more and more snow, pounded down through the ages. They started upward again; it was going to be a damned long walk.
Tristan and Etric came back down the trail, and all four stopped for a moment. The elf did not wear a hat like the others. He looked, in fact, as though the cold couldn't touch him, which almost annoyed Crystal.
"We're going back to cover the trail. The others are setting up for a break. This shouldn't take long,” Etric said. He smiled, despite the fact that his lips looked cold. “The journey is going very well."
And then the two went on, past the rest of the stragglers.
"You have odd companions,” Kadrien said.
"Oh yes,” Crystal agreed with an emphatic nod. “It's amusing, really, how most people focus on Tam, and miss all the others."
"I cannot imagine it,” Kadrien said. “But then, Tam doesn't seem so strange to me. May I ask another question?"
"Ask as many as you like,” Crystal said. “It helps pass the time."
"Yes, it does,” Kadrien said. “I just wondered... do you like your work?"
"As a smuggler? I like that I can help sometimes."
"You've had an unusual career. Yes, I do look into it, of course. Curiosity, more than anything—or living vicariously through Tam's adventures."
"Ah. I hadn't thought of that part,” Crystal said. He tried very hard not to feel anxious that the emperor knew so much about him. “Do you like your work?"
Kadrien looked surprised by the question. And pleased. Crystal wondered when he had last had the chance to just talk to anyone. Likely not since Tamaris left court.
"I like the work,” Kadrien said. “I don't like the imprisonment that goes with it. My father left the state of trade in a precarious condition with small groups controlling too many vital interests. Ah, but you know that, don't you?"
"It did rather affect my choice of a profession, yes."
Kadrien nodded. “Emperor Overin wanted every credit he would wring out of people, and set the IGs out as tax farmers to make sure it got collected. Not a good combination. The IGs liked having the ability to legally take money wherever they wanted. They do not want to quit the work. It's proved far too profitable for them."
"Not all the money made it back to court, right?"
"Oh, I'm sure my father got at least half of it,” Kadrien said. “He left a very sizeable personal fortune, along with considerable imperial funds. Enough to keep him happy."
"He didn't care that the IGs were stealing?"
"Actually, I suspect it appealed to him. It made them less popular than him."
"Do you have any control over them?” Crystal asked.
"Only in one respect: I can order them disbanded. Oh, don't worry—I know that they wouldn't do it, of course. It would take far more than my word to make them give up their weapons and their ships. But I could clear the way for others to take them on without having to face imperial censure. And I would cut off their funds, of course. They have income, but they'd have to be far more blatant about their stealing."
Crystal looked at him, nearly tripping on the snow. He felt a cold that had nothing to do with the world around them.
"You've considered doing this,” Crystal said softly, as though he thought an IG might be close enough to hear.
"Yes, I have. For some time now.” He said nothing the rest of the way to the top of the hill. Their camp lay at the bottom, but he paused and watched for a moment, apparently forgetting the tea he had craved not long before.
"It could put them in the position of outlaws, and any world with a fleet could take on as many of them as they dared. It would likely be enough to decimate them. Yes, I have thought about it for some time. I've looked at allies, studied the statistics—and barely held back my hand. The IGs know that I am planning it. They know that they're out of favor."
"And that's why they're coming for you,” Crystal said.
He nodded and started to walk before Banning and Zoe caught up with them. “Yes. They want someone more malleable in my position. Gods help them if they actually got Tam—but still, that's what's happened. I think, in fact, that they are gathering forces for a rebellion."
"You'll need help stopping them,” Crystal said, picking up speed again. He wanted the tea. He started down and Kadrien stayed with him.
"Yes. Are you volunteering?"
"I think you'll be able to count on many of us here,” Crystal said. “If you trust us."
"I'd be a fool not to."
"You're far easier to deal with than I had thought you would be,” Crystal admitted. He passed Istanan with a pat on the shoulder and the same for Tathis, who looked startled and then smiled. The sleds sat in a row, lined up ahead of them and ready to go again. Sand had cups of tea ready as they neared. Crystal took one and handed it to Kadrien. “You are not what I expected."
"Neither are you,” Kadrien said. They found a place to sit on the edge of one of the sleds. No one seemed to pay them much attention. “My experience with smugglers was non-existent, you know. At least you knew Prince Tamaris before you met me."
"True, but he's not exactly a normal representative of the royal line,” Crystal said. He grinned. “I hope."
Kadrien sipped the tea and looked at him again. Crystal was getting used to those little glances that seemed to test what he would dare to say. “It doesn't bother you—the work Tam does?” Kadrien asked.
"You should always consider one thing, Kadrien,” Crystal said. “Always remember that we are traveling with Abby and Tristan. If they aren't bothered by what Tam has done, why should it bother me? They're very good at judging good and evil."
Kadrien looked toward Abby and Tabor, sitting toward the front of the group, the Janin in Abby's hand. She didn't seem to like the cold much either.
"Besides,” Crystal said, “I like him. I would have liked him even without Abby and Tristan to point the way. They're just the little added insurance that I can trust my own judgment."
Kadrien downed his tea and handed the cup to Zoe when she came by to collect it. Crystal did the same, though reluctantly. They would be moving again soon.
"Do you believe in this war that Aubreyan and Tristan fight?” Kadrien asked.
"Of course. And you don't?” Crystal asked.
"I'm not a religious man."
"Neither am I,” Crystal admitted. “That doesn't matter. Where Abby, Tristan, and Tabor came from doesn't matter. You don't have to believe in demons and gods to believe in the war."
"But—if they fight for the gods and demons, how can you not believe?"
"They believe that is who they deal with,” Crystal said. “But they might just be other beings from other worlds. Powerful, yes, but not necessarily something more."
"Ah.” Kadrien leaned back, obviously thinking he would like to rest a while longer as well. Crystal wondered what would happen if he told the others that he was not ready to go on. “Then how can you judge the war?"
"Everything they say that should be feared from these beings is still true, no matter what they really are. All that matters is if they are doing good or evil. And you can judge that for yourself. I expect that you can judge it very well from all I've gathered about the difference between you and your father."
Kadrien's eyes flashed with the first show of real emotion Crystal had seen since he met the Emperor. He hadn't expected that rather interesting reaction, but it was one he really didn't want to push again.
"That was a good call,” Kadrien finally said.
"You have done well, Emperor Kadrien,” Crystal said as he stood. Etric and Tristan had come back, and Etric was signaling the others to start loading up the sleds again where those who had trouble walking still rode. Later the rest of them would likely ride as well, but for now some walked to save the power.
Crystal found Kadrien looking at him when they stood, as though he wanted to say something and didn't know if he dared.
"What?” Crystal asked.
"I cannot judge, you know."
"Pardon? Judge the battle?"
"No. I can't judge if I'm doing well or not."
"Certainly you can. Look at me. I have not had a reason to go back to my old work for quite a while now, you know. Look at Tam—has he had to move against anyone that you set in power?"
"No, he hasn't.” Kadrien looked uncomfortable. “But the things that I do—"
"Abby and Tristan would not have you here if you were not on the right side."
He looked startled and then looked ahead to where Abby put a hand on Tristan's shoulder. “I..."
"We all stand in their judgment, Emperor Kadrien. We all are here because we choose the right side, and because we're all fools who are willing to fight with them against gods and demons and whatever else comes their way."
"Yes."
"Good. Come on. Let's see if we can get the last of the tea before Banning packs it away. Being with you ought to count for something."
Kadrien laughed. But they did get to share a last half-cup of tea while the sled engines kicked back to life and rolled out ahead, beating down a path for the rest of them to follow.
When they reached the top of the next rise, Crystal looked back again. A huge storm had come up between them and the fortress—magic-powered, erasing all sign of their journey. There was no going back.

Chapter 4

Kadrien sat with his food and watched the others. They had walked for most of the day, and the late afternoon light already cast long shadows everywhere. They would walk through part of the night as well.
Although cold, everyone seemed to be in good spirits. He watched with a little amazement still as Tam joked with the others. Even Sharton, who had always been very quiet and withdrawn at court, worked easily with these people.
Of course, Sharton had had reason to fear being noticed at court. That limp and cane reminded Kadrien again about how hard it had been on some of the others.
Zoe sat down next to him, leaning back and looking exhausted. She smiled and patted his leg. How strange. He felt safe in his hooded jacket—just another one of them. They could forget who he was if they didn't look at him too closely.
He accepted a plate of food form Ylin—who was practically a stranger. And he needn't fear the food.
Gods, gods...
He nearly shivered. It felt odd to be just one of the group. He'd never had that type of inclusion before, and Kadrien suddenly didn't know how to handle the emotional turmoil it brought.
Tam threw himself down next to Kadrien, a plate of food in hand. He looked very tired, but oddly excited and pleased. However, when Tam looked into Kadrien's face, he stopped in mid-move and frowned.
"What's wrong?"
"Something...” Kadrien said. He felt embarrassed, but then he shrugged. “I envy you your friends, Tam. That's a very dangerous feeling for a person in my position."
"Yes,” Tam said. He sat up straighter again. “I remember what it was like."
Kadrien felt a little of a wall come up between him and Tam, and he regretted that he had brought it up at all. “I remember what it was like, too, Tam."
"You never mentioned it."
"When could I have?"
Tam looked at him, frowning, before he started to eat. Kadrien did the same, silent and sorry for everything he had said. He should never have wanted... wanted to be part of them. He couldn't be.
Zoe looked uncomfortable with the conversation, and he regretted that as well. He had not meant to upset any of them. Best to get himself back in control. Best to remember that he would return to court, and he wouldn't dare let something like this intrude on him again.
Sharton laughed, sitting with Istanan and Rqua. Kadrien glanced at him, and looked away again, afraid that he would intrude.
"What do you want from me, Emperor Kadrien?” Tamaris said softly. “What is it you expect of me?"
He hadn't expected that—the title, the feel of court rules. It cut at him for a moment. But then someone else laughed, and he sighed. Tam looked at him, the mask giving way to a little confusion.
"Tamaris—I would very much like you to pretend that I am your friend, just like the others here are."
His face changed. Shock. Dismay. And then something Kadrien hadn't expected at all. He grinned very brightly.
"Damn. Sorry, Kad. I just got to thinking about where we're going—"
"I know. It's all right."
"We may never reach the palace, you know,” Tam said. “There are no guarantees."
"I know. That's out of my hands. But I still want ... something different while I'm with this group, for at least this short time."
Tam nodded. “Yes. You're right. And it will make it easier for both of us. I don't want to think about court. I don't want to go back."
"I know. And you won't have to. I'd never ask that of you, Tam. If you like, I'll officially make you not my heir."
"Oh no. I like that part,” he said with a bright, unexpected laugh. “You've no idea how easy that makes life now and then. Just so long as you remember that I will never rule."
"You know, it's quite likely that by the time we get back, others will have settled all this, and neither of us will have to worry about it at all."
Zoe laughed this time. “You two are really a lot alike, you know."
"I'm not sure how to take that,” Tam said.
"You?” Kadrien added. “How do you think I feel?"
The others had all started to give them odd looks, especially Sharton. Kadrien knew that the Silversun prince had done his best to avoid him, and he didn't quite blame Sharton. He hoped it would change, though.
"I hadn't thought about it much, but I suppose my reactions to Kadrien have been confusing to the rest of you,” Tam suddenly said. “It's because I keep confusing him with the title of Emperor. He's Kadrien, and you can trust him with your lives. I've certainly trusted him with mine for a long time. Kadrien knows how his father truly died."
That drew looks of shock. Sharton had gone very still, his eyes wide, as though he feared to speak or move. When he spoke, his voice filled the silent area around them.
"You were ill, Tamaris. I saw you just after the emperor died. You were very ill—"
"I had a laser wound in the stomach, actually,” Tam said.
Sharton shook his head and then stopped. Calculations went on in his face. Kadrien remembered that look very well. “Others have died rather suddenly in the last few years."
"Yes, they have. And yes, it was mostly my work—and yes, my friends—most of them—knew that I am an assassin and that I do certain work to help Kadrien get better control of the empire."
"Oh. Ah. Yes.” He looked from one to the other of them, amazement in his face. “I never knew. It's difficult to keep secrets from me, you know. I tend to—remember too much, too well."
"I know,” Tam said. “We were very, very careful around you—but only for your own protection. Kad kept the attention on himself in those days after his father's death. And he let us go, Sharton, at the very first chance. It wasn't that he didn't trust us. He set us free in ways that he could never be."
Sharton nodded. He looked, if anything, surprised and relieved. Good.
The attitudes of the others changed as well. Subtle changes. They hadn't ignored him before, but now he became accepted on a level he had never expected. Trusted, and all because Tam trusted him. Tam let them know a secret that could get the Prince Heir killed, even now, if they let it be known elsewhere. Kadrien tried not to worry about it. Trust. It was not an easy thing for him.
They started to pack up again to go.
Odd, though—it didn't seem quite as cold this time as he walked with Tam on one side and Zoe on the other. Maybe that came from the proverbial warmth of friendship that he'd heard so much about and never known until now....

Chapter 5

Etric looked ahead, trying to measure the distance they could make today. This morning they had left the sleds behind when the rocky terrain of the foothills became too difficult for the machines to traverse. One had nearly toppled, proving far more dangerous than walking.
The mountains were closer, and looked more formidable with each day. He looked up at the high peaks and tried to find some sign of the pass that they had seen on the maps. Even if they found it, he knew the way would still be treacherous.
No choice, no choice. Crossing the snow-covered plain had been difficult enough. He tried very hard not to imagine that next part of the journey.
He and Tabor moved ahead of the others. They both felt their way across the path with magic, careful to mark the places where the snow became too deep and the surface soft so that the others would not fall through. So far, they had not had any major incidents.
When he looked back over his shoulder, Etric could see the others spread out in a long line coming down one of the slopes. They moved well, even those with trouble walking at the best of times. Slow—but no one was in a hurry.
Tabor, who had gone a little ahead, came back and looked at the line of travelers as well.
"We'll make a good camp site in about an hour. I think we should stop there for the night. It's up against a steep hill, and should give us a little better cover from the wind,” Tabor said.
"And there will be wind tonight?” Etric asked.
"I fear so.” He waved a hand toward the sky and the haze of clouds on the horizon. “We could probably drive the storm away, but I think we'd be wiser to just sit it out and not waste power we will need elsewhere."
"Yes, you're right,” Etric said. “We'll camp there for the night. I'm tired anyway."
"It won't hurt to make an early night of it,” Tabor agreed. Then he looked at Etric again. “Why do you trust me?"
"Aside from the fact that Abby does? I'll always remember what you did on Taru, in that last moment when we still could have lost."
"I could have done far better than to tell you to shoot that slime, Braith."
"Yes. But you did at least that, and I know it saved us much trouble."
He waved that away, and leaned against an ice-covered boulder, resting. Etric moved over to stand beside him.
"What do you want out of life, Captain Etric?"
"Me? You think crossing snow plains on foot isn't part of my plan in life?"
"I think there is no one in this group who is really that crazy, despite how it looks."
"Ah well. Yes, you're right. I would like peace, Tabor. Peace would be nice.” He leaned back against the boulder as well, and looked at the clouds moving in. “But... it would probably be boring, wouldn't it?"
"Probably. Is that bad? I've never had boring. I would like to try it for a while."
"I imagine so. All right, maybe not peace. Safety, though. Yes, I would like that—but not if it only came at the price of turning my back on those in need."
"It's a quandary, is it not?"
"Very much so. No peace, no safety, no boredom. I guess I'm stuck with crossing snow-covered worlds on foot with my friends. So what do you want?"
Tabor moved, looked at him, looked away. Etric hadn't expected this to be such a difficult question for his companion, since he had asked it first. Etric started to push away from the stone, but Tabor patted his arm and shook his head.
"No, it's all right. I just needed to think it out. I have made horrendous mistakes in the past, Captain Etric. I have done things that can never be forgiven. I hurt Abby."
Sometimes even Etric forgot that part of the past the two of them shared. It seemed to him that they were all different people now.
"Abby doesn't seem to have judged you badly for what happened,” Etric offered. “Should the rest of us?"
"Yes, you should,” Tabor said. “Abby forgives too easily. I begin to think it is in his nature, a part of his blood."
"And what is your nature, Tabor?"
His eyes seemed to flash with a little red in that moment. Demonling, Etric reminded himself, and he felt a chill that came through his clothing and caught his heart. However, the red wasn't there when Tabor blinked and looked into Etric's face. Instead he saw a young man who looked far too lost just then.
"I want to be human, Captain Etric,” he said. “That other part of me, the demon blood—I want to bury it and never let it out again. I can do that when I am with other humans. I do not want to feel the call of my other nature."
"Then stay with us,” Etric said. He put a gloved hand on the demonling's arm and waited until Tabor looked into his face. Gods, he was far more like Abby than Etric had imagined. Etric could see that same worry, that same fear—that same wanting to be accepted with the rest of them. “Stay with us."
A wisp of wind blew up around them. He could hear the sound of others nearby, but Tabor looked down again, and Etric feared what Tabor would say in the next moment and what he might do, if he thought he should.
"Abby trusts you, and it doesn't matter if it's for the reason you think. He would not have you with this group if he did not trust you, Tabor. He would kill you first."
Tabor nodded.
"You need to learn to trust yourself as well,” Etric added.
"It's not that easy. I know what I am capable of doing."
The wind blew a little harder. Tathis and Kamil had almost reached them. They would have to go on soon, and prepare this place where Tabor thought they should camp before the others got there.
Tabor pushed away from the rock, but Etric took his arm, stopping him for a moment longer.
"Trust us and trust yourself."
"I fear what I could do, and what disaster I might bring if my father comes after me,” Tabor said. “Have you thought about that part?"
"Yes."
"And you have not sent me away yet?"
"We don't abandon our friends."
"Captain—"
"Is he any more likely to come after you than he would be to come after Abby and Tristan?"
"No."
"Then don't go, Tabor. Don't abandon us. We stand a much better chance of surviving together—whether against Gix or those damned mountains. Always remember that part."
That, finally, reached him. He nodded. And they went on together to prepare the camp site. Etric felt as though he had, at least, averted one disaster.

Chapter 6

They started up another of the damned hills. Crystal could see nothing but snow and snow and hills. He hated snow. He didn't think he could quite hate anything inanimate with this kind of depth, but he could imagine himself blowing whole snow-covered worlds into destruction. He might ask Kadrien to give him one or two, just to get it out of his system.
Down the hillside. Across the snow. Up another one.
"Someone say something or I'll go mad,” Crystal finally said. Well, that at least finally got their attention. “Look—Abby and Tristan are telepaths. The Janin sings nice songs, but I don't understand a word of them. Kamil and Rqua talk with their hands. Either someone here talk with me, or I'm going to go walk with Kadrien again."
"Your pardon, Lord Captain Crystal,” Abby said with a laugh. He stopped and looked back. “We should not want you to have to go walk with the emperor. That would be horrible."
"You know, the idea that you have a sense of humor suddenly seems rather frightening."
"Tristan thinks the same thing,” Abby said with a shrug as Tristan nodded.
Crystal laughed, and waved them back to the trail. They would be making camp soon, according to the word sent back from Tabor and Etric. Good—
The Janin's song changed in mid-breath, from a soft lovely tune to something so stark and loud that it froze Crystal in fear. He knew something had gone wrong, he knew—
The snow moved to their right and Quan stood there, hair glittering with crystals, his skin ice-blue in color—and his eyes glowing red.
"Gee, what luck,” Crystal said as he stepped back. “Quan. And the Kiya."
Kamil had taken a step forward even before Abby and Tristan fully reacted—but Crystal felt the brush of pain as something hit Kamil and knocked him down.
Quan's eyes brightened and his nearly black lips pulled back in a feral grin. By then Abby had started for him, and Rqua moved as well, standing before Kamil and casting—Crystal could almost see the glitter of magic in the air that rose like a wall to protect Kamil. It helped. Kamil's body had been rigid with pain and now it relaxed again. He did not try to move, though.
The others would know by now, Crystal thought. Etric and Tabor would be coming.
Quan leapt away from Abby and the Janin, laughing as he moved through the snow. Not a human's laugh. No, he had gone far beyond that by now. He came through the snow and down toward Rqua and Kamil—
"No."
Crystal drew his laser and started to move forward, to get between them.
Quan leapt—farther than any human could have. Crystal cursed and moved to shove him aside—but a mere brush of Quan's hand on his arm stopped him in mid-move.
Pain. Gods. It felt like ice had invaded his arm and spread up through his shoulder. He could hardly breathe for the pain, and he couldn't bring the weapon up, not with the fingers infused with a cold that almost felt like white fire through every nerve.
Tristan had cast, though, and knocked Quan back this time. Quan growled as he landed on his hands and knees in the snow, staring at them with an inhuman glare. He whispered something, but Crystal couldn't understand the words, though they sounded like the same language the Janin used.
Had the Kiya taken him that completely? Was there nothing human left in that ice-cold body?
The Janin swung and connected with the side of Quan's head. It snapped him back, but he rolled, surged back to his feet, and backed away.
"Crystal?” Rqua whispered, kneeling down by him.
"Careful,” Crystal said. “Don't let him touch you—"
But Quan still backed away, whispering words that carried on the wind and brought another flash of dark, angry song from the Janin.
"We must follow,” Abby said, coming closer. “We dare not let him get closer to the others. Rqua—"
"Etric will be here quickly,” Rqua said. “Wait for him."
"No,” Abby said. “We dare not. Keep them safe. Help Crystal. He's hurt. I'm sorry."
Tristan had already started out and Abby obviously was not going to remain behind. Rqua didn't try to hold Abby back, not with the elf already nearly out of sight in the snow.
"Oh hell,” Rqua whispered. “Gods know what Quan is really doing. Be still, Crystal—oh damn. That's not good. Be still!"
He felt Rqua's sudden surge of magic moving through his arm, warmth against the ice, but hardly any less painful now. He moaned, and then started to apologize—but Rqua put a hand to the side of his face and spread more magic. He looked half panicked.
"I'm all right,” Crystal said. It wasn't entirely true, but he felt less like his arm was nothing but a piece of frozen flesh.
"I had no idea. I hope they realize,” Rqua said. He had started to gasp. “If he'd done more than brush against you, the cold would have killed you, Crystal."
"They don't know—” Crystal felt panic take over where pain had been a moment before. “I have to tell them—"
"Don't, Crystal—” Rqua began and tried to stop him.
Crystal stood. And then he felt everything go dark and knew that he fell...
He woke up in the dark of the night, wrapped in Banning's arms as they sat around a magical fire. It was so unexpected that he half expected it to be a dream.
Except that his arm hurt like hell.
"Damn,” he whispered.
Banning looked down at him, and her hand brushed the hair from his face. That couldn't be real, either. Banning holding him gently, being kind... He shivered. But she grinned, and looked more herself in the next moment.
"Just be still and take advantage of this moment, because we both know it's not likely to ever happen again."
He laughed. It hurt a little, but he didn't mind. “What happened? Quan—"
"Abby and Tristan went after him,” Rqua said. He came over and sat beside them. “We carried you on to the camp. I think we've reversed the worst of the damage, Crystal, but you're going to have trouble with that arm for a while."
"It hurts like hell,” Crystal admitted. He carefully rubbed at the elbow, but even that much of a touch sent pain up through the shoulder again.
"We'll give you something for the pain before we go on,” Banning said. “But tonight you just need to rest. We'll be leaving again at first light. We dare not stay here. Supplies are barely going to hold us as it is."
"We're going to go? Without Abby and Tristan?” Crystal asked.
"They'll follow,” Etric said from somewhere else.
Tabor looked troubled but he offered a little smile. “I know they can handle this. That's not what I'm worried about. I only... I am not certain if I would do better to stay with you people or go to help them and maybe settle that matter faster."
"Stay here,” Etric said. “Stay with us for now. Abby and Tristan will let us know if they need help, and I know that we will have problems."
Etric brought a cup over and Banning took it. Etric carefully helped Crystal sit up, and Banning held the cup so he could sip. This would annoy him before too long, but tonight he welcomed the care. He sipped. It almost warmed him again.
"Better?” Etric asked. He looked concerned still.
"I don't know. But I'm here, and from what I gather, that's better than I should have expected. Quan—I don't think he's really human any more, Etric. I don't think he's even alive."
"At least that would explain how he survived,” Banning said. She pushed the cup to his lips again, and he drank more this time. “I never expected that the little pain in the ass could be more trouble, though."
That drew laughter from the circle of people Crystal only faintly saw. He leaned back against Banning, settling against her soft breasts. She gave a little sound of amusement, but didn't argue. He grinned at Etric, who laughed aloud.
"Careful, Captain,” Banning said. “You really don't want to annoy me."
"Never,” he said.
"I hope Abby and Tristan don't have any trouble finding us again,” Rqua said.
"Gods, if they can happen upon us like they did on this planet, tracking us across some snow and mountains is not going to be a problem,” Crystal said. “Don't worry."
Even Tabor agreed. He nodded and settled down in his sleeping bag.
Etric gently touched Crystal's face. A little magic worked down through that touch before he could even argue. It drove him toward sleep. He could have fought it... but sleep sounded good.
He hoped his friends were all right tonight...

Chapter 7

The Kiya led them farther and father into the maze of rock, snow and dangerous ground. Quan had tried to kill them twice, but Tristan had deflected the fall of stone and snow both times. And they kept going. Abby thought that the creature that had once been a man might be feeling a little less certain now.
The moon hid behind clouds, and a wind blew snow up around them as they walked. The Janin sang, and shed magic light all around them. She knew where her enemy moved, and she tracked the Kiya on and on into the night.
Dawn would be only a few hours away. Abby paused at the edge of a boulder field. He could see the tracks Quan had left. They disappeared into the white-on-white world.
He didn't want to be here.
"Me either,” Tristan said, stopping beside him.
The Janin had started to hum again. Ice had covered even part of her face. He gently brushed it away, and she smiled for him, and sang her thank you in words he only faintly understood anymore, but that reminded him of the world where he had been born. He felt far more nostalgic toward it without the curse that had overlaid his last days there. And knowing that they had sent the darkness fleeing from that world meant something to him.
He hated the darkness. He hoped the morning would come soon. And when he looked out into the snow, all he could see were Quan's prints, already filling with snow.
"Should we follow?” Abby asked.
"I want to go back to our friends,” Tristan said. “I don't like being out here. I almost feel as though we're being pulled away."
Abby looked back at him, other thoughts intruding. “Maybe we've become too attached to our friends. Maybe we should go after the Kiya and..."
"And leave?” Tristan said, shaking his head. “No, we couldn't do that. Not now, without knowing if they will reach safety or not. We don't really want the Kiya that badly, do we?"
"No, we do not. We've never abandoned friends in danger, even for this long."
"Time to go back,” Tristan said, already turning around.
"We bring danger with us,” Abby said, but he followed, with hardly a glance back toward the way Quan had gone. The Janin started to protest, and stopped before he even scolded her. “If we took the Kiya and went, they would be safer."
"They would still be here in the snow, with a long ways go to before they reach safety. They are on a journey that depends on magic to survive,” Tristan said. “And there's also Tabor. He might yet bring them trouble."
"I trust Tabor,” Abby said, startled. “So do you."
"Oh yes. Trust him very much. But there is still his father, who cannot have taken the defection of his son to our side very well. If Gix cannot find us, I fear he will go for Tabor instead. That's one of the reasons I want to keep him with us. Not only is Tabor safer with us, but everyone else is safer if we're together as well."
"Excellent point, Tristan. How did I miss that one?"
"You've been... amused and amazed since Tabor took away the curse. It's been fun to stand back and watch you study the world again, and see how much you enjoy life. I didn't want to intrude with any of these other matters. But now you know. And now we go back to our friends and see them through to safety before we go on to other wars."
Tristan, at least, seemed to have no trouble finding his way back around the stones and through the passages they had followed. Abby's companion still sometimes amazed him, this blind elf friend who did everything so well.
"You've kept me sane,” Abby said.
"Well, mostly sane,” Tristan answered.
"True. You've kept me mostly sane, and you've helped me in a damned long war."
"I'm not the only one who has stood beside you. We've had a lot of allies. It's good to be with friends again."
"So many people fought with us, and they survived,” Abby said. He stopped and then finally said aloud the words that had been in his mind for a while. “Is that because we win?"
"I think so,” Tristan said. He paused this time, brushing snow from his hair. “I think that might be part of the blessing of fighting for the gods, Abby."
"A gift we did not ask for, but one I won't turn away."
"I would have preferred that no one be caught up in our battles,” Tristan admitted. But then he shrugged. “But it is their war, too. So let's get back to our friends and stand with them in this dangerous journey, because they've always stood with us."
"And what about the Kiya?” Abby asked, looking back again.
"We can always find the Kiya,” Tristan reminded him, patting the cloth bag he carried. “What if Quan got away all the way to Gix? Would it matter to us? We're going there anyway. Right now we have far more important matters than chasing after another piece of that staff."
Abby bowed his head in agreement, and hurried on, anxious to get back to the others. Maybe one of the others would make them some nice tea...

Chapter 8

Kadrien sat on the edge of the cliffside and looked down the long, narrow path that they had climbed up. This had proved the best place to stop. He could see for miles. Amazing how, after just two days in the mountains, the sight of those distances no longer bothered him. He didn't fear falling any more, thought that might have come more from being too exhausted to care.
Most of the others had already entered the natural cave Etric had found. It looked like a far better place to rest than the open ground where they had been the night before. He hadn't liked being crammed into what corners they could find to protect them from the bitter wind.
Kadrien stared out into the world, hoping for a sign of movement in the last light of day. He wanted to see a sign of Abby and Tristan. Despite the fact that the others still sounded confident... He didn't feel it.
"Damn, why couldn't we have crashed on some nice, flat, warm world?” Ylin said. He dropped down beside Kadrien and handed him a cup of something warm. “Soup. Banning says to eat it while it's warm."
"And no one argues with Banning, do they?"
"Oh Gods, no. Not even Crystal.” Ylin smiled, and then reached to rub at his knee. “This little jaunt is killing my leg."
Kadrien nodded and sipped at his soup, savoring the taste. Wondering what he should say next. Small talk had never been part of his upbringing. He hated feeling awkward.
"I was a dancer once,” Ylin said. Kadrien looked at him, surprised by the statement. “I was a good dancer. On a tour... but someone decided that they didn't like me, that I had stolen all the glory. One of the minor people in the troupe, I think—I really didn't see. They ruined my career."
"Damn,” Kadrien whispered.
"It was traumatic. I ended up with Etric because he seemed to think I still had a future. I loved dancing. I still do, but I can't go back. My world changed. Yours has, too. I can see it in your face. What will you do, Kadrien? What will happen when you go back to that place where you no longer belong?"
"I'll do whatever is required of me,” Kadrien said. He glanced out at the world and then back at Ylin again, who still watched him. “As I always have."
"You might be offered a choice, you know,” Ylin said. Kadrien shook his head, but Ylin continued—odd, he wasn't used to that yet, even from these people. They said what they intended to, whether he wanted to hear it or not. “Those who walk with Abby and Tristan—we get to rethink our lives. Or goals."
Ylin looked out at the snow this time for a long time, silent and waiting, just as Kadrien did.
"I have responsibilities."
"I know. We all understand. But I thought you ought to be thinking about other possibilities, and not close your mind to it. It's easy to say there's no future. That's where I was, the day Etric walked out on a hospital balcony and found me sitting much like this, contemplating not having a future at all, and how quickly the fall would end everything."
"Oh hell, Ylin—"
"I got lucky. I'm not sure if Etric knew what I had planned when he saw me there, or if he just happened out and realized. He offered me a place on his ship. He told me about his own past—about being a slave, about fearing that it had ruined his life. And then he did something else. He showed me magic. That intrigued me, at least."
"But you're not a mage."
"No. No aptitude for it. But I learned other things. And I've never regretted going with him."
"Ylin, there is one reason why I can't just walk away, and it has nothing to do with my holding onto power for its own sake. I still have the IGs to deal with. I will not leave until that matter is settled."
"They are not just your problem, Kadrien. They are everyone's problem. And you know that you can't fight them alone."
"My father turned them loose, and I—"
"You are no more responsible for what your father did than I am for what mine did.” A look crossed Ylin's face this time that held a far different pain, but he shook his head and went on before Kadrien could say anything. “You cannot take the IGs on by yourself. You'll fail, Kadrien. And you know that, don't you?"
"Yes."
"But you'll still do it."
"I have to make amends, Ylin. I have to make things right, because it is my duty to do so."
"You're too much like Tam,” Ylin said, shaking his head. “The two of you cannot right all the wrongs."
"I know. But we still have to do all we can. I will not abandon the empire without at least attempting to stop the Imperial Guard. I am just one person, yes, but I like to think that if I announced that the IGs were no longer my people, it might give others the confidence to stand against them."
"Yes, it would.” Ylin put a hand on his shoulder, startling him again. “But when you decide to do something that suicidal, make sure that Etric and the rest of us are there. It will be your only chance to survive."
He didn't know what to say to that, but apparently it didn't matter. Ylin sat silently beside him as they ate their soup. Kadrien could hear the others now and then; voices drifted on the breeze, and then the sudden sounds of bright laughter. Even still, even here, they found things to enjoy.
"They're a good group,” Ylin said, looking back toward the cave. “It's strange how a journey like this has brought everyone closer. Even Sand and her crew, and Zoe, have started to fit in."
"Everyone but me."
"Well, Tabor is still a bit uncomfortable, too.” He laughed.
"Ylin—” Kadrien stopped again as Ylin stood, awkward and grimacing. Kadrien reached out and helped steady him, and Ylin nodded his thanks as he took back the empty cup. He regretted that there wasn't more. They made good, simple food. He had come to hate the huge palace banquets long before this trip, but when he went back ... He didn't want to think about that now. Not really. “Ylin, I can't give up who I am. Being emperor—being responsible—is all I have to offer. Tam at least has his other work. What could I do? What could I be?"
"You could be like the rest of us.” He took a step away and then looked back. “When I joined Etric's crew I couldn't even read, Emperor Kadrien. I suspect you have more skills than you suspect."
"I may not fit in, but I do feel safe with you. That's quite unusual for someone in my family. We have perfected paranoia to a fine art."
"Etric put you on watch. This isn't the first time. I suspect he thinks there's a good use for that paranoia. See, I said that you likely had unexpected skills."
Ylin made him laugh—really laugh this time, as he watched Ylin walk away. No one at court made him laugh. No one at court dared to joke with him. They would always look at him and see his father. He'd accepted that, but it still ... hurt? Could he admit that he wanted to be just himself?
He had felt safe with these people from the start because of Tam, but it had not occurred to him until now that he felt comfortable as well. Or that they were starting to feel the same way toward him. It felt odd. He couldn't even recall when they had started calling him Kadrien. Strange for someone who had always been Prince Kadrien or Emperor Kadrien to all but three people—his father, his mother, and Tam.
He sat alone on that cliff and watched the sunset while he listened to the sounds of the others again. And he knew he didn't want to be out here, alone.
Or back at the palace alone. Gods, that was a dangerous, painful thought. He didn't want—
Movement!
He sat very still straining to see in the growing shadows, but he heard the whisper of a song, and that finally convinced him. He scrambled to his feet, slipping on the ice, his heart pounding at the thought of that precipice behind him... but he got away from the edge and went rushing—mostly sliding across the packed snow and ice—toward the narrow cavern entrance.
"I see them!"
His eyes hadn't quite adjusted to the light in the cavern—magical and blue—but he could see movement coming his way and quickly got out of the way. Tabor went past first, sliding on the ice as well, and for a moment Kadrien hoped the man had a spell to fly, since it looked like he would slide over the edge. Tabor caught himself, and the others, seeing his movement, slowed.
The Janin cast light around Abby and Tristan as they climbed the last stretch of path, giving Kadrien a chance to study them as Tabor, Rqua, and Etric rushed down to meet them.
They were not like the others and yet... they fit. They had become a part of this group. He wasn't certain how they did it. Kadrien knew that most of his own problem came from something rather embarrassing: he had never really worked with others, but spent his life dictating answers and being waited upon.
He followed the others back into the cave this time since Etric told him they no longer needed a guard. The mage put a little spell out in the air—a watcher, he said, because they would be stupid not to have some warning. But in the cold night everyone should be inside. That's why they had worked so hard to find this cave before the storm blew in.
Etric worked his way down to the bottom of the cavern where the others had spread out around another magical fire. Crystal, huddled in blankets, still looked pale and feverish, and quite obviously had trouble with his arm still. But he looked very happy to see Abby and Tristan, and the elf went straight to him, bowing his head—more magic. Good. Maybe it would help.
Odd thought.
Kadrien sat with Sharton and Tamaris, leaning back on his little pile of blankets and feeling as worn and tired as he ever had in his life.
"It's a long way back to the Capital,” Sharton said, shaking his head. He had been rubbing his leg, but it didn't appear to be what really worried him. “I don't know what we'll find when we get there."
"But we're not going back alone,” Tam said. He ran his hand through his hair and grimaced. Kadrien didn't want to think about that part. “We'll have help."
"You'd put this group up against the IGs?” Sharton said, worried again.
"Yes. Yes, I would put them up against anything, including the demons,” Tam said. He looked from Sharton to Kadrien. “Use them wisely."
"They are not mine—"
"They are,” Tam said. He waved away any other words Kadrien would have said, and that startled him. “I'm tired."
Tam threw himself down into his blankets, and Sharton did the same. Kadrien watched them and the others for a while. Use them wisely. The IGs were several thousand strong. This group numbered less than fifty. How could he expect—
But, even he didn't doubt that they would go up against the IGs and even have a chance to win. All he had to do was set them in that direction.
Use them wisely.
How much of this was his own need to hold onto something familiar? Was that why he kept looking for ways to make certain he had a job when he got back to the palace? Was he unwilling to let go of the problem with the Imperial Guards just because if he did, he had no reason to hold on to the throne?
Gods.
He had never thought of himself as a coward. Paranoid, yes. He didn't want to die by being stupid, and there was always the chance that someone in the palace wanted to overthrow the ruling family. But now... Now he had time to sit and decide if his fears were all that drove him on.
Etric had been up at the opening to the cave, but he came down now and moved in among the others. Some already slept, but others watched Etric. He'd become the leader of this group, since Crystal was still to ill and weak to help.
Etric looked worn, and even he limped now. He leaned down by the fire he had created and held his hands to it, but Kadrien suddenly wondered if the magic didn't take more from him than any warmth could return. He looked pale.
"Is there a reason we can't wait here a day or two?” Kadrien suddenly asked.
Etric looked at him, frowning.
"You look worn, Etric. So does Rqua. Tristan just arrived. Maybe it might be wise to stay here for a few days and let all of the mages recover some power before we set off across the rest of the mountains."
"Our supplies—” Etric began. But then he stopped. “Yes, I think you're right. This isn't going to be easy, even with magic. Yes. Two days rest here."
Others looked relieved. Even Tam lifted his head from the blankets and nodded his thanks.
"Abby, Tristan—what about Quan and the Kiya? You didn't stop him, you said,” Etric said as he sat down.
"No, we didn't,” Abby said. He tapped the Janin when she started to get loud. “He dogged our trip back the first day, but the closer we came to this group, the less he bothered us. He's still out there, Lord Captain Etric."
"We are going to see you safe before we go after him again,” Tristan added. “The Kiya might follow us, though. We need to be careful of that matter."
Etric nodded. He glanced toward the door and gave another wave of his hand. “Reinforcing my spell. But that's all the more magic I'll do for awhile. Rest is wise. You are right in that, Kadrien. Do you have any other suggestions?"
Kadrien unexpectedly felt embarrassment rush up through his face. Etric looked startled.
"You don't need to come to me and ask questions, just to make me feel better,” Kadrien said. Etric started to speak, and went silent at Kadrien's lifted hand. “No. Let's be honest with each other. I am useless here, Captain. I can compute taxes and tell you more than even you would ever want to know about trade. I can also tell you the deployment and number of Imperial Guards—even the ones who they think I don't know exist because they play games with the numbers they give me."
"Ah,” Tam said, a whisper of sound from the blankets. Kadrien patted his back.
"I could grant you titles and riches,” Kadrien said. “None of those are going to help, though, are they? Not here. You people know what you are doing. I am taking Tam's advice, and pretending that I am just one of you. Make your own decisions. Don't look to me for anything helpful."
Etric looked at him, shaking his head. “When did you decide that you could be nothing more?"
"Gods, people! What is it with all of you!” Kadrien said with a rare show of frustration. “You are the second person tonight to ask me that question!"
Tam, still huddled in his blanket, began to tremble. Kadrien looked at him, his eyes narrowed—and then he punched his cousin in the middle of the back. “Stop laughing."
Oh, and that set the others laughing as well now, including Sharton. And finally even Kadrien joined them. Giddy. Silly. One of them. He looked around with a feeling of strangeness that must have showed in his face again.
Etric bowed his head. “Relax. Don't worry. And you might as well just get used to this. You're stuck with us."
No choice. Well, that's what he told them. He now had to learn to live with it.

Chapter 9

After five days climbing the mountains, Etric had decided that they could do this. He hadn't been certain until now. He had suggested they turn back more than once every single day.
But they kept going. They crossed snowfields he thought would swallow them up. They climbed up cliff faces, held by ropes and magic. They kept going.
A damned good group. Stubborn and annoying too often, but a good group.
He looked around. The others followed behind him, except for Tabor and Tristan, who had pressed ahead on the thin shelf of stone that wrapped around the mountainside. He hoped it went all the way, though if not, he would make something that did. It took power, but it would be faster than using magic to take the group upward over this stone beast—
He looked up and brushed a little snow from his hair where it had fallen on him. He was tired of snow—
Quan.
"Trouble!” he shouted, and threw up a shield as he saw the world shift above him. Snow, ice, and rock plummeted down the cliffside and he almost couldn't hold the shield and deflect the mass away from the others.
He felt Rqua add his magic to the power, and though he could also feel the edge of Rquana's injury and weakness in that power, he still welcomed it.
Quickly done, but Etric knew that the enemy still stood above them. He lowered the shield, and tried to move to find Quan, to see what he had been doing. Though shaky after that show, he still lifted his hand and felt—
Not Quan. Something else. A different direction.
He looked back over his shoulder. Clouds rolled across the sky—dark, malevolent, and powerful. He could feel the evil in them. Gix—the demon himself, sending the storm to devour them.
"Quan was just a diversion!” Banning said, already seeing the trouble even if she couldn't feel the magic in it.
Tristan and Tabor came rushing back around the edge of the stone wall and hurried down to them, both looking relieved, though Tabor kept glancing at the storm that moved too quickly toward them.
"We need to get our people to shelter!” Rqua shouted over the first ragged blasts of wind. He looked frantically around the area, but Etric knew they would find nothing. That was why Gix had chosen now to attack.
"Nowhere to go,” Etric shouted. He looked to see an entire mountain disappear before the onrush of destruction. “We can't retreat!"
Tabor looked at the storm, lifted his hand—but he shook his head and didn't waste power trying to stop it. Etric tried to figure out how to get their group together, how to put up a shield strong enough to hold that off—for how long? He couldn't—
"We need shelter,” Tabor said. He looked around. “He chose here because there is no shelter. But he always underestimates the power and ingenuity of humans,” Tabor said. He looked around. “We can make shelter in the mountain."
"Make one?” Rqua said, startled and shaking his head. “Dig a shelter out of that stone?"
"The only other choices are to give up or ask for help,” Tabor said, looking at Abby.
He shook his head, looked at the storm, and then back at Tabor. “Try at least to make the shelter. If it doesn't work—I'll do what I need to."
Tabor nodded. Etric, still half-panicked, gave way to their idea. “Find a place, Tabor. Find us something that we can work with—"
Tabor rushed past them. The first of the wind had already started up the side of the mountain as the storm pushed it ahead.
"Banning, spread word of what we're doing. Tell them to get as close as they can. And hold on. Rqua—watch them. You may need to help keep them from falling in this wind."
Rqua, nodded.
"We're going to have to use a lot of magic for this,” Etric said, but he followed Tabor, who had already apparently found a place at the curve of the trail, and had begun pulling away some loose debris with his hands. “We don't have much to spare and we've a long ways to go still."
"No choice,” Tristan said. He moved up to help Tabor. The wind grew stronger, dragging at their clothing.
Tristan and Tabor began to pound magic against the cold stone. It warmed, glowed—melted like ice, steam rising all around them, mixed with the acrid smell of dirt. Etric looked with shock at the idea of the magic they could throw at that wall. Not human, he reminded himself. Not entirely human, at least, in Tabor's case.
Etric started to add his own power, but he held back instead. They didn't need his help, and Rqua might. He turned and watched the storm instead, managing to deflect at least some of the wind gusts and help Rqua—
"There!” Tabor said, breathless, at his shoulder. He caught hold of Tabor's arm when he started to fall. “We have enough room—barely. We'll work at making it larger. Get them in!"
Rqua and Abby had already started to do that. Tristan stumbled over as well, but he grinned, and looked so pleased that it lightened Etric's mood. Good. Let the demon throw a storm at them. Yes, it took magic to keep them alive—but they could do it.
The storm hit in full force, and Etric felt even his ward start to falter before the pounding of the magically impelled winds. Snow engulfed them, a wall of white that startled him, and he took a step back toward the mountainside and the new cave, afraid to be anywhere near the edge of the trail and that long, long drop.
"Let's go,” Etric said. He took hold of Tabor's arm. “Back. Rest. I think we'll be here—"
Tabor spun, growled—
Quan came out of the snow wall. Ice covered his face; snow encrusted his skin and clothing. Tabor pushed Etric away—but it wasn't him the creature wanted. It leapt at Tristan.
But Tabor grabbed it first. Grabbed Quan and rolled with it on the ground, shoving it over the edge—
Quan fell, but Tabor went still. Tristan grabbed him, dragged him back, but Etric feared the demonling had died. His skin had gone white, his eyes closed, his breath still. He thought about the damage that touch had done to Crystal's arm. Tabor's entire body—
"He used magic to keep himself alive,” Tristan said. He dropped down on his knees and put his hands over Tabor's chest. Etric could see the magic the elf expended. “He's alive. It's not good. Etric—"
Etric dropped down with him and began to work, pushing the ice away from Tabor's limbs. Abby, Banning, and Rqua arrived. They helped carry him into the cave, but Etric hardly noticed. He worked. Careful, careful—he had little magic to spare, but he used it wisely. He would not let Tabor die.

Chapter 10

The storm pounded at the opening of the little cave where they rested. It had for days—snow, lightning, wind, and thunder. Crystal watched it for a while. It helped to pass the time.
He still felt ill. He didn't like it. But at least they let him sit here, without constantly hovering over him. He felt grateful for that.
But the storm... the storm hadn't died down yet. And if it didn't—
He laid his head against the stone and closed his eyes again. The others had gone quiet the last day. Etric and Rqua slept as much as they could. Even Tristan had started to look wane and weak.
They could not fully reach the light of the moon at night, not with this storm raging between them. Crystal understood that part that they didn't say aloud. He wondered how many of the others did as well.
"Tabor—drink this,” Ylin said somewhere across the little opening. “Just drink, and don't argue with me this time."
Crystal lifted his head and watched. Tabor still had little ability to do more than lift his head. The others took care of him, and left Crystal alone a bit more often.
And that was good as well. He needed time to himself now, to test the use of his arm without the others watching him, measuring him—
But that wasn't fair, either. They worried. He knew it.
"Tabor—” Ylin said, frustration in his voice. “Stop fighting me! Yes, there is magic in the food. There is in all the food. Everyone gets the same stuff. Now drink this!"
Crystal squinted across the room and saw the way Tabor looked at Ylin, startled, he thought. He must have whispered something. And he moved this time, lifting his hand to help steady the cup. Better. Much better.
Perhaps they need not worry so much about Tabor now. That would be good, Crystal thought. He tried to care about what happened around him, and what happened to the others. But ... but the fever and the dullness lulled him away again, and he stared at the storm for a long, long time.
Tristan kept the magic at the door strong and kept the storm from following them even into here. He could see the elf go there now and then and test the feel of it, his eyes closed, his head bowed. But nothing had gotten in yet. Even Quan had tried once, and as much as the others wanted to go out and fight that creature—they didn't. It was a trap. A lure. They were smarter than to fall for it.
The Janin gave them light through all those dark days, but by the gods, that song would drive Crystal mad if it went on for much longer. He began to wonder how Abby and Tristan managed to stay sane... but then he wondered if they did. They had chosen to be here, too, after all.
Banning and Seaton sat in the corner whispering again. They certainly had a lot to talk about, no doubt dealing with piloting, engines, magic, and all that other madness. They acted as though they had no fear for their own survival. It momentarily annoyed him—but he couldn't hold that feeling for long. He let it go again, and took the cup Ylin brought him with a nod of thanks.
"You look better, Crystal,” Ylin said.
"Do I? Gods. That's frightening, considering the way I feel."
Ylin laughed. Others looked, smiled. Relief came to Damien and Istanan's eyes. He hadn't considered how his injury and illness had affected the rest of his crew. He dared a look at Banning—
And she looked back at him, smiling so brightly that he berated himself for any moment of anger or jealousy he had felt toward her and Seaton. He sipped the broth that Ylin gave him and relaxed.
The storm raged on forever... but they were safe, so what did it matter? Even if they never left this place, at least they stood here together against the enemy and evil. He couldn't regret that, either.
But he still hoped he would get a chance to talk Kadrien into giving him a nice, snow-bound world to blow the hell out of when they were out of this.
Glancing at the Emperor, he suspected that if it came to it, he could ask to blow the hell out of Grant, and Kadrien wouldn't argue much.
Crystal drank the rest of his broth and handed the cup back to Ylin when he made the next round. The magic made him sleepy, of course, as it was meant to. They didn't understand why he really fought that compulsion. He feared not that he wouldn't awake again, but rather that he would fall into dreams. He feared being lost in ways that they wouldn't understand at all.
But he trusted them. So he slept... and hoped the storm would pass soon. He wondered how far they still had left to go through the mountains, but he didn't ask. Better not to know that answer...
Sleep.

Chapter 11

Kadrien had begun to truly fear that they would all die here in this cave, and that he would be responsible for the deaths of all these people he had come to know and even think of as friends. They had come here because they were trying to help him get back to the palace, and take back a throne he really didn't want.
He wanted to go back to the fortress. He wanted to change everything that had happened, not just since his encounter with Tabor, but since he came to the throne. He had lived all his life with choices that affected other people's lives, even while his father lived. He knew that he had made decisions that had gotten some people killed—but a person in his position had to make those kinds of decisions when whole worlds might live or die by the fate of a few.
He had never lived so intimately with the choices before. He had never stood by and watched the people dying.
He started to stand and then sat again. They all paced the little area now and then. He had taken to pacing more often than the others, and then felt guilty that he wasted the energy. He sat again and bowed his head, wishing...
Tam and Sharton came across the little cave and sat down by him. He hadn't expected it, and he didn't know what they wanted. In some ways, it would have been better if they had just let him stay Emperor—remote, untouchable.
"Stop, Kad,” Tamaris said. “Just stop what you're thinking. I can see it in your face."
Kadrien looked around, aware that everyone could hear them. Abby, sitting not far to his left, looked his way and frowned, but said nothing. Sharton, surprisingly, put a hand on his arm and drew Kadrien's attention back again.
"If I had—” Kadrien began.
"No,” Sharton said. “No. Nothing you could have done would have changed this. We crashed in the snow. We would have had to walk out anyway, or risk the IGs. I'm still convinced that we have a better chance here than we would have had otherwise."
But—"
"No, Kadrien,” Tam said. “This isn't against you as the emperor. This is against Tabor, Abby, and Tristan. Short of abandoning them, we would have still been in danger. Gix wants the Kiya. He doesn't really care about the rest of us."
"That is not entirely true, my lords,” Abby said. He sat up straighter, and looked more bothered this time. “You are not entirely without use to Gix. He will very much want a sacrifice of someone here to tie him to this universe. Someone of importance gives him more power. Therefore, by being with you, I have put all of you in danger."
"No,” Tam said. “No, he would have come for one of us anyway, wouldn't he?"
"I don't know,” Abby said. He looked bothered. “I don't know that he would know where to look, except to follow Tristan and me. We bring danger, Emperor Kadrien. It is not your fault."
"You're here because you are trying to get me back to the palace, aren't you?” he said, feeling a moment of frustration.
"We're trying to get back to the palace because that is the place where all of us will be safest, provided we don't find the Imperial Guard sitting up there and running things,” Sharton answered.
Kadrien felt a little push of surprise, and then relief. Yes, they were right. They would be safest there, if he could be in charge. He glanced toward the wall of light and snow that still pounded at them, though perhaps... perhaps it lessened. Perhaps he dared hope.
"Abby,” Crystal said. He was sitting across the cave, and moved a little, but not much. He looked better, at least. “You've got to take the advice that they're giving to Kadrien as well. This is not your fault. Besides, have neither of you ever considered that we made our own choices?"
"I think that may be the case,” Tam said, looking from Abby to Kadrien. “Yes. I think they don't take into account that we make choices because they've never been given a choice themselves."
Kadrien blinked. He made many choices. He made decisions—no, they were not the same. When he looked at Abby, he saw that the godling had obviously had some of the same thoughts.
"No, I was not given a choice,” Abby finally said. He looked troubled. “I would like to think that if I had, I would have made the right choices. But I'll never know."
"How can you doubt?” Tam asked. “We know you too well. I would never have doubts about the choice you would have made."
"I doubt very many things, Prince Tamaris,” Abby said. “I doubt everything I do, and every decision I make. But I am here, and we have dangers still to face. Wishing that we had made other choices will not change the trouble we are in now."
"What can we do?” Tam asked. He looked toward the wall, stopped and frowned. “It's not as bad."
"It is dying down,” Tristan said. He had been lying beside Abby, but he sat up now. Kadrien felt a wave of sympathy and worry when he watched the elf who had kept the storm out of their little hole for so long. He looked as though he could hardly sit up on his own, and he gratefully leaned against Abby's shoulder. “It is dying out, finally. Even a demon cannot hold such power forever."
"And now... and now we have no choice,” Abby said with a little shrug. He might even have taken some comfort in that idea. “We must go on. Tristan cannot hold that wall much longer—oh, you can't hide it from me, my friend. You know that."
"I'm tired,” Tristan said. His hand touched the crown he wore. “I know. But I'm tired and I fear what we'll face if we go out. Quan is still out there, somewhere."
"True. But we had better go now rather than wait until the storm ends, don't you think? Wait until both Gix and Quan expect us to come out."
"Ah,” Tristan sat up a little straighter this time. “If we can slip away, and I leave the wall in place a while longer, they might not realize we are gone. And the longer we keep their attention here, the better."
"I think I can keep our movement invisible for a short distance,” Etric said. Even he looked pleased again. Madness, maybe, but they all wanted out—even into the storm that still raged, though not as badly.
They all seemed ready to move. Kadrien watched how some had begun to pack up their things, as though they would step out into that storm in the next few minutes. The gods knew, he could wish other people he'd worked with would act so quickly and decisively sometimes.
But it couldn't be this easy.
"I know you say he won't notice, but is it really that easy to fool a demon?” he asked. “Surely it's not safe to go out there, even with magic—he must be strong enough to know when we do something like that!"
"Oh yes,” Tabor said. His voice sounded rough, but even he looked more alive now that they were discussing leaving. He sat up, slowly, just to the other side of Abby, and looked around as though he had only now come awake again. “He would notice if he were actually here. But he's not, you know. He couldn't sustain himself and that storm here, where he has so little power, and no one to believe in him... no one to give him sacrifices and more power to tie him here. He set the storm in motion, but he would not remain."
"Good,” Kadrien said. Not really assured, but if the others trusted this, why not? He was ready to leave this cave.
"It is not just the Kiya he wants,” Tabor said. His voice had softened. “And I fear that he will find me far more easily than any of the rest of you. I am like a beacon to him. You do not need—"
Tabor's hand had started to move. Abby moved faster, taking the knife that Tabor had at his waist. With a bow of his head he handed it across the little cavern to Tamaris.
"Keep him alive, Prince Tamaris,” Abby said, and Tam bowed his head in agreement.
"Abby—” Tabor began, sounding quite worried and frustrated. “You cannot risk—"
"No,” Abby said. He silenced Tabor this time with a hand on the demonling's arm. Tabor looked startled, worried, half-ill—and more than a little frantic. Perhaps his being awake was not such a good thing after all. “Now that you are one of us, you do not get away so easily. I tried to take that way out as well, once, back in Sandwind, on that other world. My friends would not let me. And they were right. So now, I give you the same gift, Tabor. I ask that you give us a chance."
"You forgive too easily,” Tabor said. He shook his head but looked calmer again. “It occurs to me that I am the only one who has really been given a chance to do something better. I won't throw it away. Give me back the knife. I would like to think I have some weapon if danger comes."
Abby bowed his head. Tamaris didn't look quite so trusting, but he gave the weapon back.
Kadrien watched with amazement, wondering if he would ever understand what these people thought. Abby stood and offered a hand to Tabor, who slowly stood as well. He did not look well, or as though he would stay on his feet for long, but he looked ready to leave.
"We are not dead yet, Tabor,” Abby said. “We have not lost yet. Don't give up. You still haven't seen what these humans are capable of doing."

Chapter 12

Abby knew that it would be no easy journey away from their makeshift shelter, but he also knew that the humans would never give up. Better to get them moving, because the magic wouldn't last much longer. Even Tristan had grown perilously weak, who did not normally have the trouble the way human mages did.
They'd had one night with the moon only partially obscured by clouds. Rqua, Etric, Tabor, and even Tristan had stood in that light, like beacons reaching for lightning. Dangerous, if Gix had been watching—but needful. And it had still proved not enough. They lost that power almost immediately in helping the others, but at least it got them farther along the path.
Abby helped as best he could. The Janin proved useful in sweeping snow from their paths with her own powers, which hardly seemed to wane at all. And Abby... Abby wished power to Tristan, who used it to help the others that first day, the night, and the next day as they continued to move. He wished that he could do more. He wished he could help them in better ways—
Stop thinking that you're not helping—you are. And I can feel your own weakness, but is not the same as mine. We are both doing what we can.
I grow weary of the snow, Tristan. I could wish for deserts again. Gods help me, I could even wish for Eliora's world. Gray, but not cold. Not dangerous like this.
He startled Tristan with those thoughts. Tristan half feared the gods listened too closely to him. Then he thought that the gods were far away from this world. Nothing came here save his friends, wandering forever along the icy paths. At least this one was not along a narrow ridge on the side of some forbiddingly tall mountain. At least here they could walk side by side for a while. A tree even grew at the edge of the small snow plain, solitary but welcome. It was not entirely white.
Danger. He could feel it, and knew the source. Quan lingered somewhere nearby again. Abby turned slowly this time, watching the snow all around them. Tristan tested in his own way, and they found him, unobtrusive but there, at the edge of the field behind the others.
Etric had been bringing up the rear of the line. He might not know the danger. Abby started back that way, not rushing—he wanted Quan to come a little closer. Just a little.
But Quan had other ideas. He moved suddenly, and Tristan shouted a warning, rushing forward to meet the enemy who had leapt toward Etric and Tathis.
Etric, at least, threw a bit of magic up and sent Quan stumbling again. By then Tristan and Abby had both arrived, and Quan retreated quickly, away from that danger.
"We're going to try to catch him!” Tristan warned the others, without Abby even saying it aloud. “If we can get him, it's one less danger we have to worry about!"
They kept going, trudging through the snow. And Tam caught up with them at the edge of the field—
"Go back,” Abby said, almost breathless.
"No,” Tam said. “Let's just go!"
Abby wanted to argue. Tristan said not to since they didn't intend to go far, after all. And it wasn't as though Tam didn't have his own skills that might actually help.
"Be careful!” Crystal shouted from somewhere behind them. Abby turned back and waved toward him, remembering how badly injured their friend had been by a mere brush of this creature.
But Quan, who had plainly developed an affinity for the snow and cold, moved far too well through this terrain. Tristan found it annoying, in fact, and that brought a little humor to Abby. He wasn't used to the elf showing such frustration.
Quan led them back down the trail, and then away from it. Tam, silent and ready, walked with them. He didn't ask questions, even though he must have realized that Abby and Tristan kept contact through the crowns. He didn't need their reassurance.
Quan tried to circle around and get back at the others, but they cut him off. And again, a little later. Abby, though, decided to turn back and give up this time. He didn't want to get any farther away from their friends.
They both stopped.
"Ah,” Tam said. He stepped up beside him. “Time to go back?"
"Yes.” Abby pushed the Janin into the snow for a moment and rubbed his hands. Even with the gloves he felt cold these days. He feared he would never be warm again, no matter how far they went from this damned cold white world.
"Where is he?” Tam asked.
"Close,” Tristan said. “But I think Abby's right. It's time to turn back. We don't want to follow him farther into the mountains again and have to hike out again. I've walked enough of these mountains already."
Abby reached for the Janin, wrapping his fingers around her again, and gave Tam a shrug, wishing it hadn't been a waste but—
Quan.
Quan reaching for Tristan, who only realized at the last moment, and who could not move aside fast enough, though he threw himself down on the ground as Quan grabbed at him—
"No! Stop!” Abby shouted.
And Quan did. In that moment everything stood still, except for him. He moved in a heartbeat of frozen time from one spot to another, putting himself between Quan and Tristan. His head swam, the world pounded around him, and Quan—startled if such a creature could still have such emotions—grabbed Abby—
So cold—
Tristan cried out, surged back to his feet, knocked Quan away with magic that sent him stumbling this time. Abby had gone to his knees, drained and cold and—
Tristan, as panicked as Abby had ever felt the elf, cast warmth toward him. So much warmth that the snow melted, but it felt good in that moment. He just feared that Tristan would weaken himself—
Quan backed away. He made a sound of anger and worry. No words any more, not even in the old language that the Kiya spoke—and the Janin understood all too well, though Abby did not sometimes.
"Warm,” Tam said. “We should have thought about sending warmth against him. I can manage that without any magic at all."
He drew his laser pistol, aimed and fired. Blue enveloped Quan, flickered, but did not put him down even still. Quan backed away again, though more slowly. Tristan, almost staggering with his own weakness, tried to follow, but Tam caught his arm and stopped him. He did fire again, but Quan darted and leapt away over the side of a hill.
"No,” Tam said, stopping both Tristan and Abby. “Don't do it. You're far too weak. It would be too easy for him."
"We can't—we can't let him keep coming back,” Abby whispered. He tried to stand, and couldn't get to his feet. Tristan knelt beside him—but it turned out to be the Janin that helped him in that moment. She spread warmth from where he held her up into his body again. It hurt, but he knew, having seen Tabor and Crystal, what she did for him just then. He wished she could do the same for the others as well. “We—we can't risk the others,” he said, finally standing again.
"I don't know what you did, Abby,” Tam said. He put a hand on Abby's arm. “I don't know how you did what you did. But it took a hell of a lot out of you. I think you're going to be lucky to make it back to the others at all."
"But—"
"If Quan comes, we have a weapon we can all use now,” Tam said. He pushed his pistol into his belt this time. “I have been worried about using a laser with so much magic around, considering how magic and the ship's engines interacted. It is the same sort of power source, you know. I didn't want to use a weapon that Quan might easily manipulate against others. But now that I know—let him come to us, Abby. Let him try again. This isn't just your war, Abby. I have been fighting against evil since long before you arrived in my universe. Stop trying to make it all your own. We'll get Quan when we can. Right now I would rather see you two safely back with the others. That's far more important, don't you think?"
"No, not more important,” Abby said. He smiled a little at Tam's sound of frustration. “But it is the wiser thing to do. Tristan? Can you stand?"
"I think so.” He sounded, and felt, just on the edge of consciousness. Tam had to help him up, and even then he almost fell again.
Abby knew that he shouldn't have argued with Tam about going back. Every time he thought about it, he realized that he didn't want to make Quan or the Kiya so important. He just wanted to be done with that part of the battle, and not to draw the danger to the others again.
They had gone too far from their friends already. He dreaded having to walk back, and then going on and on. Surely they had to reach the end of these mountains soon. The journey had to have an end.
Or did it? He thought about his own future. When they got this piece of the Kiya, there would be only one more step on his own journey, and that would be to Gix's own hell. Would they take Tabor with them as well? He wanted to say no, but...
But the Janin whispered a soft little song, a little change. Kiya near, it said. Kiya coming.
Warn Tam somehow, Tristan thought. He pulled himself out of Abby's hold, but still moved slowly, weakly, and not entirely out of show. Let him know.
Abby turned to Tam, who had already looked at the Janin, as though he could tell the difference as well. Abby gave only a slight nod and hoped that he understood.
Oh yes, he did. His hand went to the laser pistol. Good.
"We haven't much farther to go,” Tam said aloud. “We'll be with the others soon. Tristan, will you be all right?"
"Yes,” Tristan said.
Abby started to speak—but the Janin moved. Moved on her own this time, pulling him with her. She swept around and jabbed into the ground where Quan had been coming, like some snake through the grass. The staff must have caught him at least in a glancing blow. They could hear him howl, and the snow flew up around them, as he stood, still rushing forward.
The Janin swung again. Tam cursed—shifted his position so that he did not have Abby in his line of fire—and shot Quan. Stunned him this time. For the first time, Quan went to his knees.
And Abby could see the Kiya, finally, frozen to his chest, glowing slightly. When Quan started to stand, the Janin swung again, but he pulled out of the way this time, growled and started up.
Tam fired again. And again. Quan tumbled backwards, carefully watching Abby, ready for him to move in—
It was Tam, left unwatched, who leapt in and grabbed the Kiya from Quan's chest.
It screamed—and in the next moment the thing that had once been human shattered, like ice hit with a stone. A wind that seemed from hell itself whipped up the snow and scattered even the shards. Nothing of Quan remained.
Tam, walked over to Tristan and held the Kiya out. “Take the damned thing."
Tristan took it in his hand, and then he smiled brightly and caught hold of Tam's arm before he stepped back.
"Never doubt yourself again, Prince Tamaris,” Tristan said. “You have just passed a test that very few before have done. You held the Kiya in your hand, and she could not take you. She could find no evil in you to tempt and lure. No dark ambitions. She could not hold you, even for a moment."
He looked stunned by those words, and Abby laughed.
"I cannot be—I am an assassin, Tristan. I know what I've done."
"So do we know,” Tristan said. He shoved the piece of the Kiya into the pouch with the others, giving a sigh of relief. “You have done your work to protect others. And those others were more than just Kadrien. You have helped to make certain no one else suffers as you and your friends have."
"You don't know—” Tam began. But he stopped again. He looked toward Abby. “He was a very evil man, Kadrien's father. And he had evil friends who shared his vices, and his power. I have dealt with most of them. But still—"
"You have never had to explain to us,” Abby said. “Let's go. I think the others will start to get worried soon."
"What will you do now?” Tam asked. He looked worried as he glanced back, as though he expected Quan to rise out of the snow again.
"We'll help see the others to safety,” Abby said. He leaned against the Janin and put an arm across Tam's shoulder, surprising him. It surprised Abby as well. But since the curse left, he had felt—freedom to be kind without fear of hurting someone. For the first time he could trust himself.
"You have the Kiya,” Tam said looking at him. “You could go now, couldn't you?"
"Yes,” Abby said. “We could pull that piece of the Kiya out and follow it to the last piece, to the head."
"But you won't?"
"If we went now, that would mean the Kiya and the war are more important than our friends, who have stood with us in this madness,” Tristan said. He seemed to be doing better now, too. He grinned at them, looking far happier than Abby thought he should, given the journey ahead of them still.
"We will go back and help you and the others,” Abby said again. And it felt right. He laughed. “Gix will wait, you know. And besides, Tristan and I... we have time, Tam."
Tam looked startled by those words. But then he nodded and accepted that they were not going to abandon their friends here.
Not yet. They would be together a little longer. Abby feared it would make it harder to leave, later—but for now, he would enjoy this time with friends, even here in these damned cold mountains.

Part Five: Duty
Chapter 1

Kadrien had come to believe that the mountains would never end. Stone and ice rose up all around them, blocking the view of everything but other, more distant mountains. They sometimes climbed so high that he had trouble breathing—and he wasn't the only one. They skirted along the edges of desolate white plateaus, and Kadrien couldn't remember the last time he had seen a tree or even a bush. Lichens, clinging to the sides of stones, were the only other forms of life up here.
Even so, he did see beauty. Clouds formed and swept through the valleys below them, moving through the passes and on to the rest of the world. He found that sometimes he liked to stand on the edge of the mountain cliff and feel the wind blow against him, and to see the world laid out in grays and whites all around. It felt almost like flying and freedom.
But most of the time he feared they would never leave the mountains. They'd had a brief respite of a few days in a temperate valley, below the snow line, where they had rested and restocked supplies as best they could. There he had seen Tristan with the wild creatures that came to his hand and slept with him at night. Tristan did not know them by name, but they seemed to know the elf and Abby, as though they recognized those two as beings who would never hurt them.
And then they came to Tabor, too, when he sat by the two, and Tabor had looked so surprised it had been a wonder to watch. Tabor had fed them something small and furry from his own scant supplies. Neither Kadrien, Tam, nor Shar could name it for him—the planet's native animals had long ago disappeared from around the Capital.
Kadrien suspected that even the demonling would no longer eat meat after that...
They left the valley and climbed upward again. It seemed easier at first. They'd gotten used to it. But the mountains on this side of the range turned out to be even more treacherous than the others. Twice, despite all their magic, they had been forced to backtrack and try another pass.
Now the worst climb of the journey had gone on for three days. A thin magical blue rope held them close to the mountainside, and even it showed signs of fraying and weakness. The mages had spread out among them, reinforcing each other's work. But they would not hold up for long. They looked like ghosts.
Kadrien had fallen so often that he stopped feeling the bruises. Besides, the cold had gotten past all the clothing and help the mages could provide. Kadrien wondered how he could feel anything at all.
He'd seen the growing despair in Abby's face at their last break. He whispered softly to Tabor, with Tristan close by, all three of them looking worried. Kadrien knew what he planned to do, and it sent a different flutter through him. He didn't know if asking Abby's mother for help would be wise. She had, from all he'd heard, been rather capricious in her aid. She gave it, but she asked a gift in return—and what could they offer to such a being of power?
He'd had time to consider those things as they moved along the side of the cliff. The little ledge widened at last, and his foot wasn't half over the edge of it now. He hoped that meant they might rest again soon. Maybe they could have a sip of the water Etric had imbued with magic back in the valley, though he thought they ought to save it for just the mages themselves.
Tam had inexplicably stopped ahead of him, and Kadrien ran into him as he came around a tight curve of the trail. He managed not to curse. At least it meant a moment's rest. He could sleep here, if he had to. The gods knew it would not be the first time they had spent a few hours bound to rock by magic ropes while they slept. He even closed his eyes, too tired to care, when his head fell against the stone.
"Look at that, Kad,” Tam whispered. He felt his cousin's hand on his arm, and tried to shake it off. “No, no, my friend. Look at that, down there."
He opened his eyes, brushed his cold, ice-covered gloves over his face, and tried to see where Tam pointed.
It took him a moment to realize that he wasn't looking toward another mountain. Instead, he looked down and out—toward distant green, and a river, and what had to be a city.
Palin. He knew it had to be Palin, nestled up against the mountains on the far side from the Fortress.
He wanted to sit down right there and stare for the rest of the day, savoring this moment. They had come through the mountains. Paradise lay at their feet.
Banning came back on Tam's side, her face red with windburn, but her smile bright. “Tristan says to keep moving,” she said. “He's found a cave below the snow line. It will take most of the day to get there, but we'll finally be out of this damned snow."
Word spread back behind them. Kadrien heard sounds of joy—and the others hadn't yet seen that they were truly nearing the end of the journey. When Banning turned away again, Kadrien urged Tam to move on. Limping, but far more quickly than they'd gone in days, they took the last curve of this precarious trail. They would have been forced to go a long ways farther if Tristan had not created a snow ramp and hardened it, so that they could get down to more even ground. Kamil ended up carrying the elf for a while afterwards, but he had recovered by the time they reached the area where the snow line melted into a forest of short, scraggly bushes.
Kadrien paused there and looked back. Mountains rose behind them. Even now it seemed impossible that they could have come through that way.
They reached the cave as the sun went down. He wasn't the only one who stood there, peering through the slight brushy cover, watching as lights brightened in the distant city. It was real. It would be there still in the morning.
By the time Kadrien made his way into the little cave—hardly larger than the one where they had spent so many days during the storm—Etric had piled up their pitiful few supplies of food and began passing them out. Everything.
"There's not much here,” he said and smiled. “But we'll be back down where we can forage for food tomorrow, and to the city within a day or two. So we're going to celebrate tonight."
No one complained. They passed around the little feast, joked, and mostly didn't talk about the journey. Kadrien even joined in, but he spent a lot of the time studying the others. He could tell when the moon came up over the horizon. Etric, Rqua, Tristan, and Tabor all paused, and seemed to take deeper breaths. He wanted to suggest they stay here for a while, let them recover—but it might not be wise. They were now within travel distance of Palin, and this side of the mountains was a very popular nature preserve. People might wander up and find them.
"We need to discuss our plans,” Etric said. He leaned back, looking relaxed for the first time since this journey began. “We have to move carefully. It would be stupid to stumble carelessly into danger after surviving this far. I really don't know what we should do now that we're out of the mountains, though. Kadrien? Any suggestions?"
Kadrien handed his cup of tea to Tam to finish and leaned back, his legs crossed, feeling the aches of strained muscles. He was probably going to ache for a long time.
"There is one man here whom I have stayed with now and then. A senator. He has an estate on the outskirts of Palin, and we can likely get to it without being noticed. His name is Sentalin. I think I would like to see if he's in residence and get his feel on things before we go any farther. If he's not there..."
"Then his home would be empty and a perfect stopping place for us anyway,” Tam said. “I trust that Crystal can get us inside without any trouble."
"I hope so. If my fingers ever unfreeze again,” Crystal said.
But he was looking at the hand of his injured arm, and Kadrien saw the worry in his eyes. Kadrien hadn't thought of that part, and felt distress. How odd. How strange, to know that he worried because a thief and smuggler might not do as well at his work as he had before.
Tam must have seen how confused he felt. He put a hand on Kadrien's arm and smiled.
"We will have to move carefully,” Etric said. “That's the one thing to keep in mind. We are a long ways from the Capital, and we'll need to find transportation there."
"Palin has a small port; nothing big comes in, but there are usually some shuttles and a few small ships. I think we'll be able to latch onto something there,” Sharton said.
"Good. Because I am not walking any farther than that city,” Kadrien said.
The others laughed, but no one argued.
"Kadrien, there is still one question,” Crystal said. “Do you want to go back to the Capital at all? Because if we can get near a ship, you are free to go with us, you know."
He laughed a little at the idea of pirating a ship and going off with this group. As much as it appealed to him, nothing had changed from the day they left the fortress. He still had the same responsibilities.
"I don't want to go back,” Kadrien said. They deserved that much honesty from him. “I do know that I have to go anyway. Nothing has changed. I still face the same worries and problems as when we left the fortress. I can't believe that the IGs have just suddenly disappeared and all is well."
"True enough,” Crystal said. He twirled a stick in the fingers of his injured arm. Kadrien suspected it was the start of some practice. Good. He saw Crystal grimace twice at the pain, but he kept going.
The others had relaxed and they did not ask him more.
They finished off the food, including the last of the magical water. Kadrien feared he had become addicted to the stuff. The idea of going back to the Capital and working without the ability to take a drink of this and feel better...
This remarkable journey would end soon. These people would go off to more adventures, but he would be left here. Gods, that thought sounded childish. Though not as bad as the thought that inched in around it—that he could order them to stay with him, and they would have to do so.
Well, at least some of them. He could not imagine that his order would have much affect on Abby, Tristan, or Tabor.
He'd gone mad. He knew it.
"Now that we're back, what are you going to do, Abby?” Tam suddenly asked.
Abby smiled. It made him look younger. “I do not see that we are back to a place of safety yet,” Abby said. “We'll be with you for a while longer."
Oddly, Tabor looked relieved by that knowledge. He gave a nod of his own.
"Your war is surely more important than seeing me back to my throne,” Kadrien said.
"No, it isn't,” Tristan answered. “Gathering the Kiya Chanda Andee is not more important than seeing our friends to safety. Our war will wait, you know. It has waited this long. And... I am not in a hurry to rush off to Gix's hell and fight him there."
"Ah. Yes. I should like you to stay a long time before you did that,” Kadrien said. He hadn't really considered their next step until now.
"It will be the last battle,” Abby said. “I would like to be done with it, but at the same time... I am in no hurry to leave my friends behind."
Kadrien saw Crystal and Tabor look at each other, an exchange that meant something. Kadrien had early learned to note such things in court. He wished he could read this one better, though, and know what it meant.
"I would like...” Abby said and then stopped and shook his head. “I would like calm and quiet for a while. If we have to do battle to get Kadrien to his throne first, so be it. Then there will be time to rest, I think."
"Yes,” Tristan agreed. He leaned back, eyes closed. “But right now we all need sleep. Rest, my friends. Your own journey is almost over, at least."
And that look again, between Crystal and Tabor. They were planning something. If he had not trusted both of them implicitly, Kadrien might have been worried.

Chapter 2

As they came up along the edge of the wall surrounding the Sentalin estate, Crystal had some definite thoughts about the future, and they mostly revolved around being inside, having a bath, and sleeping in a bed.
He wanted this journey finished. He wanted back in civilization, and never to walk more than the distance from his ship's pad to the closest aircar rental. He did not like to walk. He never really had. There was a reason why he had a space ship....
Well, he had one somewhere, anyway.
However, they had run into a problem—not that it surprised anyone in this group. There should not have been several hundred IGs here in this little backwater town, as Tam had pointed out, but there they were, patrolling the streets. It annoyed Tamaris, in fact, and that might prove to be a difficulty for the Imperial Guards. Crystal certainly would never want to put himself in a position where Tam contemplated ways to make certain he was never a problem again.
The IG patrols seemed to be numerous, but they were not particularly diligent. The group made it easily to the wall that circled the Sentalin estate.
It wasn't until Banning, Otaka, and Zoe came back that he had the bad news confirmed, though. He watched the three women make their way through the stands of wild trees that grew up at the edge of the estate. They did not look happy.
"Damned Imperial Guards everywhere,” Otaka said. It sounded amusing from a woman who had been an IG herself not that long ago. “Zoe climbed one of the trees, to see inside, too."
"Yeah. There's at least two guards inside the estate,” Zoe said. “I couldn't hear anything, but watching them, I got the feeling that Senator Sentalin was not really happy with the company. He's home, though."
"What do we do?” Crystal said, looking back at Etric, Tamaris, and Kadrien.
"I vote for going on with the plan,” Etric said. “If there are this many IGs here in Palin, then I suspect we're going to have an even worse time if we try to go on to any other cities—providing we could even find transport to one."
"Good point,” Tamaris said. He looked upward. “Over the wall?"
"Well, it's not like we aren't used to climbing lately,” Kadrien said. The others quietly laughed agreement, and Crystal could see determination in their looks.
They went over the wall in small groups—Crystal, Etric, Tam, and Otaka first. Otaka had to help Crystal up as he neared the top of the tall wall. His arm wouldn't hold him, and it already hurt like hell, but he had no trouble getting back down. He didn't look to see how the others were doing. Now his attention turned toward the building, and finding a way in.
Sentalin's estate had only one building—a very large one, which helped. The solid lower walls looked like natural stone, though Crystal didn't look closely enough to tell for certain. He wasn't going to burrow through them, at any rate. Most of the windows looked narrow, and did not open. That made it a little more difficult—
Tam put a hand on his arm, pulled him down, and then pointed toward shadows moving along a path through the garden. More IGs. Damn. He hoped the others saw the patrol in time. If not ... well, they'd be staying in some building tonight, if any of them survived.
Crystal could get them inside. The mages might have managed it, but Etric had admitted that he'd likely set off alarms if he tried to be subtle, and not being subtle wouldn't win them anything right now.
Crystal led them halfway around the building before he finally found a glass door that led out into a lovely little garden. He considered making another round, or looking at climbing a wall and trying one of the upper level windows—but his arm hurt already and they didn't dare spend more time out here with the damned IGs wandering around.
A group of four—it might even be the same four—came down a path again. One grabbed at a flowering bush and yanked off a half-dozen small, yellow flowers.
"I'm damned tired of these patrols,” he said, shredding the petals as he walked. “We ought to just line all the bastards up and shoot them. Then nuke the place, and maybe the Capital, too."
Two of the others mumbled agreement, and then they disappeared again.
Crystal watched them go, trying to guess the amount of time it would take for them to make a circuit around the house. He could wait, watch, take this slowly. Or, at least, that's what he would have done if this had been a real job. Instead he moved up to the glass doors and ran his fingers lightly over the edge of the molding, feeling for the alarm. They put the hot points at odd places, and shielded them from detection, but Crystal found the slight warmth just above knee level on the right side. He knelt down and pulled his probe, wedging it against the edge of the molding, carefully prying up the edge. They didn't dare be too obvious about this, not with the guards wandering around. He eased the molding up and away, uncovering the array of lines and links. A good system. He would have to be careful—
And when he brought his hands up to do the work, the right one trembled. Shook so badly that he nearly dropped the probe this time, and he gasped at the little pain.
"Gods,” he whispered. He looked at Etric and shook his head, panic starting to win over any calm he had forced on himself until now. “I can't do it, Etric. I don't dare try! I'll set the alarms off—"
Etric put both hands on Crystal's shoulders and bowed his head. Crystal could feel magic rush through his arms, through his body—strength and healing—
Etric pulled his hands back, swaying. Tam caught hold of him to keep him from going straight down.
"We need to get out of sight,” Tamaris said, and even he started to look half-panicked now.
"I won't fail you.” Crystal turned back to the door, working steadily now. His arm still hurt, but the fingers held true.
After that he just did what came almost naturally to him, even a few years after he'd given up being a thief. The right combination of controls, and he had disabled the system. When he pushed the door open, Tam looked startled and pleased. He carried Etric inside—a sunroom with high windows, empty and with a look of disuse.
"Start directing the others here, Otaka. Tell them to be very careful of the patrol,” Crystal said.
Tam pushed Etric into a chair, and the Mage Captain sat there with his head bowed, gasping still. Crystal felt sorry for him, but the ploy had worked. He'd gotten them through the door, and to a place of relative safety.
Tam crossed the room to another door and stood there, listening. He finally nodded. “Distant voices,” he said quietly. “And the sounds of dishes. They're at dinner. Let's get everyone in."
The first group had already arrived—Tathis, Banning, Sharton, Navic, and Westna. The guards went by again, never looking toward the house, though it wouldn't have mattered. Everyone stayed out of direct view of the door.
Otaka nodded back to Crystal. “I've got them timed. They're on a pretty regular round, and I can get the others in. I suggest the rest of you figure out what we're going to do now."
Crystal nodded and patted Etric on the shoulder. His friend looked up. “Stay here. Tam, Banning, and I will go see what we can find out."
Etric started to say something. Stopped. “Be careful."
"We will,” Tam assured him. He had his hand on the door lock, ready to key it open. “You two ready?"
Crystal nodded. He could have stopped Tam from opening the door and used his tools to ease it open just part way, but that wouldn't really win them anything. Tam opened the door, and, like Crystal, obviously counted on a place like this having very quiet, well-maintained doors. It slid open with hardly a whisper of sound, and closed again at Banning's touch.
They found themselves in a den. Bound books and bookchits vied for space on the shelves, and Crystal didn't see a single hologame set anywhere. Interesting. He did note several pieces of art, all worth a great deal of money. Originals, all of them, he suspected. He could have made a killing in a place like this.
He let his fingers brush over a lovely Organis statue—
Banning slapped his fingers. Tam grinned, but kept going.
The next door already stood open and led to a short hall. They passed a couple more doors—probably offices and such. A man in Sentalin's position would work out of his home—even his vacation home.
They passed an empty kitchen. No servants?
The next arch led to the dining room. They could hear the clink of dishes and silverware. Murmured voices, none of them happy. Crystal slid up by the doorway, looking around the corner, his heart pounding—even though Tam had already looked with no problem.
Three people sat the table, and one of them in uniform, scowling. Food was passed around. They ate in relative silence.
Tam patted his shoulder and signaled him back to where Banning stood, just inside the kitchen door. He followed Tam there, his stomach growling at the scents he suddenly realized filled this room. Food would be nice.
"Only one guard inside?” Crystal asked.
"That's what I gathered from what they said,” Tam replied. He patted his own arm, as though to make certain he still had the knife that Crystal suspected he even slept with. “I think we should take care of him now, at dinner. It will surprise them. There appear to be only the three people in the house. We can get our people settled then."
"He might be missed,” Crystal said.
"Yes. But the longer he stays out of our hands wandering around in here, the more likely it is that he'll notice something wrong."
Banning nodded agreement as well. Crystal didn't like to go barging in to take on trouble—he would much rather circumvent it by going around it. However, he nodded reluctant agreement as well. They did have to get the soldier in hand. He hoped it was the only one they had to deal with, at least right away.
Tam apparently thought it best to get this over with as quickly as possible. He gave a nod to Banning, and the two of them pushed out ahead of Crystal. By the time Crystal caught up, the two had already entered the dining hall. He heard a shout and rushed forward, pulling his weapon—
But Tam had gotten the guard in hand already. He must have gone straight over the top of the table and tackled him. Food had scattered everywhere—that was a waste—but he had the guard down.
Under most circumstances, Tam wouldn't have had a problem. However, Crystal saw the man kick and shove Tam off, and start to surge to his feet. Banning caught the IG by the arm, and the man who must have been Senator Sentalin leapt forward, grabbed the guard's pistol, and handed it over to Tam as he came to his feet.
"I don't know who you people are, but I'm with you."
"Fool,” the guard said. “You just went beyond the line, Senator—"
"I don't give a damn any more. I will no longer sit here and listen to your crap, a prisoner in my own home. What do we do with him now?” Sentalin looked at Tam, frowned a little as though he thought he should recognize the prince—but a hike through the mountains had changed them all. Tom looked wild-haired, thin, and crazed.
"I'll find a place to lock him up,” Banning said. She stripped off his equipment and tossed the communit to Crystal, who caught it without a problem. “See if you can get that to pick up anything, Captain."
"Good plan—” he spun at the sound of footsteps, and found Otaka and Kamil. “Is everyone inside?"
"All in, Captain."
"Are there other guards in here, Senator?” Crystal asked.
"None until morning when they come for that bastard's report,” Sentalin said, waving a hand toward the guard Banning dragged away. He had his other arm over his wife's shoulders. She looked pleased, but a little worried. Good people. “There are more of you?"
"Many more,” Crystal said. He nodded to Kamil. “Tell Etric that it's safe. I think it might be nice if we gathered in here. Is it possible that we might continue what smells like a wonderful meal? We've been a long time since a dinner."
"No problem,” Sentalin said. “Arla, why don't you go with a couple of these people and see what you can whip up for them. They look like a meal would be very welcome."
"Very,” Tamaris said. He nodded to Crystal. “I'll go help with the others. You ought to sit down before you fall over."
Trust them that much? Why not? He wouldn't be much help if he fell anyway. So he grabbed one of the nearest chairs and sat down in it. He felt odd for a moment. It had been a long time since he had sat on an actual chair.
"Here—Captain, is it?” Sentalin asked, pouring a glass of some liquid and handing it to him. “Free Trader?"
"Smuggler. Or I used to be. Thank you."
Sentalin frowned a little, but he still looked happier to have Crystal here than the guard. The others started entering the room. Sand and Kamil had set to closing all the windows in the room so that no one could see in.
"What about the guards outside?” Etric asked as he sat down. “They're still patrolling out there."
"They will until they think Waypoor—the guard you took in here—has gone to bed. That won't be for a few more hours, but they won't come in, either. Waypoor is a bore, and even his people don't like him. Once they see his room light go on and off, they'll sneak off somewhere for the rest of the night,” Sentalin said. “If there had been anywhere to go, I'd have taken advantage of that fact the first night."
"Excellent,” Etric said. He sat in the chair next to Crystal, looking just as uncomfortable for a moment. But then the food started to arrive and he smiled. “Oh, this is very kind of you, Senator. We've had a long, hard journey. I'm tired of eating wild berries and drinking stream water."
"Try this,” Crystal said and handed over the glass he had been sipping from. “A very good blend of wine and Pari juice."
"Oh, yes, I can see it's done wonders for you on an empty stomach,” Etric said, but he did sip and nod. “Yes, very nice."
"Seems that smugglers have rather good palates these days,” Sentalin said with a laugh.
"He's a smuggler, but I'm a Free Trader,” Etric said. “Well, technically."
Crystal laughed. But he did feel better, and not just because of the drink. They were inside the building, all of them safe for the moment. For tonight the others would guard. He could sleep somewhere comfortable. It didn't have to be a bed. A corner of a room with a cover and a pillow—
"Tell us what's happening in the Capital,” Tam said as he came in with Kadrien.
The senator did not recognize the Emperor. Good... and bad. Kadrien sat down in the chair beside Crystal and Tam took his place behind him. Symbolic, and practical. He was a good guard if things went badly.
"It's been about the same since the emperor disappeared,” Sentalin said. He leaned back against the wall. “The IGs dropped in here before any of us who happened not to be in the Capital could get back. They've held some places like this, but they still can't get into the Capital itself, let alone into the palace. The senate is holding the city, and in the last few weeks we've gathered that they have managed to pull some forces to their side—the Emperor's guard stayed loyal, of course, but now they've gotten some IGs who were not part of this trouble. And they still have contact off-world. They're under siege, but they are holding things together. So far, most of the trouble has been confined to Grant."
"Who is ruling?” Crystal asked, not daring to look at Kadrien.
"No one has the throne. The heirs are all dead, the emperor... gone. Dead, we assume, though no one wants to say it."
Kadrien moved, but Tam put a hand on his shoulder and stopped him from saying anything just yet. Crystal wondered why. They surely couldn't keep it quiet much longer.
Sentalin even looked their way and frowned again. He'd figure it out soon—
But right at that moment something else took his full attention. Tabor, Tristan and Abby came in. And Abby had the Janin in hand, of course. In fact, he leaned rather heavily on her, limping across the room.
"What is that?” Sentalin whispered, his face gone white.
"That, Senator, is magic,” Etric said. He looked at the man and shook his head, obviously remembering that people weren't used to it. “You need not fear. You are looking at something that may be our only hope to... set things right."
Sentalin stared. For the moment, at least, Kadrien remained safe from notice.
Etric leaned back in his chair. Crystal thought he looked relaxed for the first time since they had arrived. He handed his glass back to Crystal and finally smiled.
"I have to admit,” Etric said. “There were many times when I didn't think we were going to make it."
"It was your idea,” Crystal pointed out, passing the glass on to Kadrien, who took it with slightly shaking hands. Reaction, Crystal thought, more than weakness this time.
"Next time I have an idea that insane, just take me out and shoot me,” Etric said.
Half a dozen people around the room promised to do just that. For the first time laughter brightened the room, and a smile came to Sentalin and his wife as she and Zoe came in with platters covered with food. It smelled far too good, but right then Crystal would have been happy to sleep in the chair. If the IGs burst in right now, they'd be carrying him off to some cell.
And if it had a bed, he might not even complain much.
Arla brought her tray around to them, and lowered it between Crystal and Kadrien, smiling—
And Crystal knew the moment she recognized the emperor. Her face went still, and then her eyes wide. Crystal grabbed the platter before she dropped it, and Etric got hold of it too before it tipped. She backed away a step, and her husband came around the table concerned and worried again.
Crystal watched Kadrien, though. He felt sorry for his friend in that moment when the role of emperor was suddenly pushed back on him. He would have no choice. A mask fell into place. Joy at being here, and all other emotions, disappeared. Right then Crystal could have wished him to be anything else.
Tam put a hand on his cousin's shoulder. At least he wasn't alone this time.
Arla had finally managed to whisper something coherent to her husband. Sentalin shook his head, looked at the man in the seat next to Crystal, and shook his head again.
"You cannot—it cannot—” But recognition had started to take the place of disbelief.
And then a different look, and one that helped more than Crystal had expected. Not only did the senator look pleased, but a real show of joy came over the man's face.
"By the Gods, Emperor Kadrien—” Tears came to his eyes as he dropped to his knees. “I never, never hoped to see you again."
Kadrien reached out and put a hand on the man's shoulder. Sentalin looked stunned by the touch. It was going to be a different court, Crystal thought. A lot of people were going to be shocked.
"Don't kneel. No, neither of you kneel. I came here, Sentalin, because I trusted you and because I have had pleasant days here with you and your wife. We needed safety, and when we reached Palin, this was the first place I thought to come."
"I am honored.” He started to stand. It took him two tries, and a bit of help from Otaka. “I am really honored. But... what happened? Where have you been?"
"The Fortress. We came over the mountains—on foot."
"Over... foot?” Sentalin looked around again, shaking his head. “That's... no, I can't say it's impossible.” His look stopped at Abby again and then back to the emperor. “Ah. Magic?"
"Magic helped, but it was still nearly impossible,” Kadrien said. He seemed to have relaxed. Sentalin's true joy at finding him alive had obviously helped him accept his return. “We will need information, Sentalin. We need to know everything that you can give to us."
"Anything,” Sentalin said. He smiled. So did his quiet wife. “But what happened to you? How did you disappear?"
Crystal glanced toward Tabor, who bowed his head, embarrassed again. At least they had gotten him into a chair. The demonling still looked hardly strong enough to hold up his head, let alone stand on his feet for more than a couple minutes.
"It was...” Kadrien began. He glanced toward Tabor as well. “It was a mistake, more than anything. We need not worry about that right now."
Sentalin looked confused, but he asked nothing more. Good man. And Zoe took the tray of food and kept passing the cups of soup around. Crystal took one in hand and sipped at it. No meat, of course. Zoe, or whoever else had been in the kitchen with Arla, would have made certain for Abby and Tristan's sake.
Heaven, though. Real food again.
Kadrien finally convinced the senator and his wife to sit down and talk. Tam relaxed a little at last, and accepted the chair that Otaka pushed his way. No one wanted to be on their feet any longer.
"Now we face a problem that had been growing since before my father died,” Kadrien said. “A problem I knew that I would have to face before too long anyway, though I did not imagine it would be in quite this dramatic a fashion."
Sentalin nodded. “The Imperial Guard has been just waiting for a chance to step in—or at least some factions of the Guard. We had all begun to gather information on them, to use when the time came—"
"I wish you had brought such information to me,” Kadrien said. Then he waved his hand when Sentalin looked startled. “I know. Everyone thought me omniscient. But I was having trouble keeping up on it. And my mother—never mind. Things will be different."
"Yes, I can see that,” Sentalin said. He appeared startled but pleased. “At any rate, the IGs in the city found out that they weren't as powerful as they thought. They tried to take it, but the Emperor's Guard stood their ground, and the IGs that survived are locked up and waiting trial for treason."
"Oh, that does sound like something to look forward to,” Kadrien said. “Admiral Yvel?"
"He's in prison."
"Excellent. That's one of the best reasons for me to get back to the palace, then. I should very much like to see that bastard on his knees before me."
Arla stifled a little laugh but Kadrien grinned brightly and she finally laughed as well. Good. They wanted these people relaxed.
"You can't imagine how wonderful it is to see you again,” Sentalin said. “The loss of you and the heirs—"
"Well, not all of them,” Kadrien said.
"I'm afraid that even Prince Tamaris—” He stopped and looked at Tam shaking his head in wonder this time. “Oh. Smugglers. Free Traders. Gods. I didn't even recognize you, Prince Tamaris!"
"Anyone can go unnoticed in a crowd as odd as this,” Tam said with a laugh of his own.
"How did you get to be with the emperor?"
"I came looking for him. I was not going to take his throne."
Sentalin nodded. He looked pleased again. “Just ask whatever you want of me, Emperor Kadrien."
"Right now I would like... food and rest. Quiet for one night, at least."
"The IGs will come looking for their man in the morning to get his daily report,” Sentalin warned. Crystal felt a little bump of annoyance. Rest. Quiet. It had sounded good.
"We'll take care of that problem,” Etric said. “We have our ways—we'll cover it somehow. Trust us."
"Yes. You seem a very resourceful group,” Sentalin said. “And I have already thrown myself into your camp. I'm glad to find I'm in such good company. We can provide you with food and rest. Anything else?"
"Gods, yes,” Crystal said, standing. “A bath would be heaven."

Chapter 3

Abby didn't remember going to sleep. He barely remembered going up the stairs with Tabor and Tristan, the others all around them. He remembered feeling safe, comfortable, and tired. They showed him to a room. He sat down on the bed.
And he didn't remember anything else until he awoke to find Tabor by the bed, telling Tristan that they needed the ward he'd put around their prisoner the night before down. Tristan, mostly groggy still, muttered an agreement and let the magic go. Then he went back to sleep, somewhere on a bed nearby.
Abby turned and looked at Tabor. The demonling looked better this morning. Abby, on the other hand, didn't even really want to move.
He felt Tristan snuggle back into his blankets, thinking of the soft warm places of home. They both sighed.
Tabor looked from the lump of Tristan under blankets to Abby. He shook his head. “How can you tell which one of you thinks things?"
"Sometimes it doesn't matter,” Abby said. Despite Tristan's plaintive, but silent, complaints, he sat up. “What is going on? What will they do with the IG?"
That got Tristan's attention. He peeked his head out, reluctantly paying attention.
"Etric and Rqua are arranging for a sickness,” Tabor said. He lifted a hand at sounds out in the hall, but then he nodded. “That's Etric. It should be fine. It's a good plan—keeps the man from saying anything dangerous, and keeps the others from believing that there is anything amiss."
Abby nodded. He slipped his feet over the side of the bed and thought about getting up. “Is there time for a shower?"
"Yes, I'd say so,” Tabor said. “No one will come looking for him for another hour or so."
"Good. I want to be clean. I wish I had been clean before I slept.” He ran a hand through his hair and that got him up even faster. The Janin looked at him and smiled. “Quiet, Janin. Silent. We are in danger."
She whispered a little song, her face turning toward the sunlight from the window.
He left her there and limped to the bathroom. Clothing stood in a closet on the other side of the door, and he chose something to wear—simple and a little large, but it had a nice feel.
The shower felt nice, refreshing—clean. But he missed the days of long leisurely baths. Maybe, before they left here to go somewhere else—but he stopped that thought. No use thinking about that future yet. They were not yet done here.
And did he want to be done here? Did he want—
Tristan, impatient on the other side of the door, thought maybe he ought to just think about what they were going to do today. Abby got out of the shower, letting the warm air brush over him and dry him. He dressed quickly enough and got out of the way for Tristan.
Tabor sat by the window, opposite the Janin, and watching her. He looked startled when Abby came out, and then embarrassed.
"Just curious about her, that's all,” Tabor said quickly. “She's not much like the Kiya."
"Except that they're both insane."
"Well, yes,” he said. “But she—I held the Kiya too long. I know the difference. But don't worry. I have no intention of trying to take her."
"I don't fear that,” Abby said. He patted the bandages, still wet beneath his clothing. He'd like to get those changed too, but later, after they settled everything else, and with Tabor elsewhere. It would be too much of a reminder of their unfortunate past. “First, I don't think you're stupid enough to want anything to do with another staff. And second, she won't even let Tristan touch her. She certainly won't let you."
"True,” he said. He smiled. “I really just like to listen to her. I don't remember all the words, except when she sings sometimes—I can remember home better."
"I know,” Abby said. He finally brushed a hand over the side of the Janin's face and she smiled and whispered an old song, something that had nothing to do with war and battles and journeys. They both listened, entranced in that moment when she gave them such a gift. Even Tristan had gone still at the song—elf music, remembered from his own youth.
Tristan came out a little later. He looked better as well, and smiled brightly when he walked over to where they sat near the window, enjoying the sunlight, even if they didn't dare look outside. He shook his head, splattering water across the table and on Tabor.
"Hey!” Tabor protested. Then he looked from one to the other. “He did that on purpose, didn't he? Never mind. Why would I ask you? I can't trust either of you."
"That's a funny thing to be saying now,” Abby said.
They laughed.
Apparently the three of them laughing must have been rather unsettling. Kadrien, Tam, Crystal, Sharton, and Zoe arrived a moment later, and they all looked rather worried. And that didn't help any, of course. It almost set the three of them into very undignified giggles.
"We have everything set up,” Tam said. “The commander is at the gate, and since Sentalin brought him, he's got a medic with him. Keep quiet."
Abby gave the other two stern looks. It almost did not work, but the sound of others in the hall got everyone silent.
"I don't like having your man here, ill,” Sentalin said as they went past the door and farther down the hall. “Neither my wife nor I are trained to take care of the sick. What if it's contagious—"
And then they could not hear them again.
Abby sat and waited, his hand on the Janin, willing her to silence. Tristan would enforce it with a quick spell if need be, but he didn't want waste the magic just now in case they needed it to stem other trouble.
Before long Sentalin and his companion headed back down the hall again.
"I protest,” Sentalin said. “You've no right to leave someone ill here, someone who could infect my wife and me—"
"He will stay,” one of the others said. “And the house will be off-limits to any others until he recovers. A fair trade, eh?"
Sentalin said nothing as they went down the stairs.
"There,” Tam said, leaning against the door. “Good. That gives us some leeway. We still have to be careful, but we should be safe enough for a few days."
"Time still to rest,” Kadrien said. He looked relieved. “And time to plan what we do next."
"I do not plan to walk from here to the Capital,” Tam said, as though he expected someone to argue with him. “We'll have to take one of the craft in port."
"You, my fine cousin, have been spending far too much time with these people,” Kadrien said.
And that set them all laughing again. Sentalin looked pleased when he arrived at the door that Tam opened for him. He looked around at the group, hardly doing more than nodding toward the royalty. He had, Abby thought, come to accept the change in his emperor, and it would make things much easier for Kadrien if he could win a few others like this.
"They bought it,” Sentalin said. “Captain Etric says that he can reset the illness in the morning when they come to check on him again. I think it will work. However—"
"However, we can't stay for very long,” Tam said. “We'll consume too much food and draw attention that way, if nothing else. And the longer we stay, the more likely someone will notice us by accident. But we still need time to plan this carefully."
The others nodded.
"It's time to go down to breakfast,” Sentalin said, waving them toward the door. “Arla and Tathis have been preparing food for more than an hour. We're lucky the IGs didn't notice, or they would have stayed."
"Food again already?” Zoe said, startled.
"You know, you are not the first person I've heard say that this morning,” Sentalin said. “Come along. Let us show you true hospitality, rather than our shocked reaction of last night."
"You have been an excellent host,” Kadrien said, walking out with him.
The others followed, leaving Abby and Tristan alone. Tristan had spoken softly to Tam and he returned a few moments later with bandages. Abby had known what Tristan intended, and he didn't try to follow the others just yet. Besides, food again did seem far too odd an idea.
"Go ahead, Tam,” Tristan said, urging him toward the door. “We'll be down in a moment."
Tam nodded and left. Tristan helped Abby pull off the shirt and went to work with his usual steady hand. They had done this far too many times in the past. Abby was glad to have the old bandages removed though. They had started to rub, still dirty in places after the long journey.
"Tristan, you don't seem very worried about the trouble here,” Abby said as he lifted his arm, letting Tristan gently wrap the old wound.
"I'm not,” Tristan said. “We've had too many battles with the Kiya and won. This can't be as bad without her and the demons as well."
"I don't know,” Abby said. “They don't have magic, but as far as I can tell, they've never needed it to be troublesome."
"True,” Tristan agreed, distracted.
"I look to the others, and I see how worried they are about this coming battle. It's not just the numbers, you know."
"True.” Tristan handed him his shirt and then sat down on the chair across from him. “And that's why we're staying, isn't it? It's not just because we don't want to go on and leave them all behind again."
Abby sealed the shirt shut and stood. “We have too many friends here to lose, Tristan. When we go, I want to know that they're safe. No, I don't want to go at all, but we will. But we'll do it right."
Tristan nodded agreement. “Let's go eat."
And spend what time they still could with their friends.

Chapter 4

Etric pushed away his plate and thanked Istanan when he took it away. When Tam suggested that they talk about plans to leave, he was almost too anxious to get started, but he tried to quell that feeling again. Rest, he reminded himself. He knew that right now he could have barely brought a bit of light to his hand, let alone anything that might have helped them in a battle.
Sentalin sat with them at the table, most of the crew spread out around them, though Damien and Navic had gone upstairs to stand guard watching the grounds. Etric hoped that things stayed quiet for the day.
"The trick, as I see it, is to get Kadrien into the palace,” Tam said.
"And what good will that do in this war?” Kadrien asked.
"The one thing you always knew you were good for, Kad. Morale. Besides, your presence brings a good many others over to our side."
"Okay, yes, you're right. You don't have to get that look, Tam. I just don't—"
He stopped and looked at Sentalin, but said no more.
"We need to know what craft are in port here,” Crystal said. “I think that's your work, right, Tam? Sharton?"
"Just give us a little while at a computer,” Sharton said with a nod.
"They monitor all the computer usage,” Sentalin warned.
"Sharton, Kadrien, and I,” Tam began and then smiled very brightly. “The three of us know codes that will go past any surveillance the IGs can use."
"Oh yes,” Sharton said. “In fact, I know a few codes that might help us in other ways. I can likely set them chasing their own tails for a little while when the time comes. Like on Silversun."
Sentalin looked at Sharton. His eyes narrowed this time, obviously seeing someone he recognized but didn't know—
"I was a Guest of the Court,” Sharton said. “Back in Emperor Overin's day."
"Oh. Prince Sharton—Silversun. And you learned codes?” he said, surprised.
"I remember things very well, senator. You once asked me to copy a ledger for you. The first five entries were 347, 12,980, 45,036, 1,233, and 78,887. I could tell you the rest of the ten pages, but I don't think it's necessary."
"Good gods,” Sentalin said. “You remember all of that?"
"I remember everything. And I know a damn lot of codes."
Crystal laughed suddenly. “And he's part of my crew."
"Well, that's certainly reassuring,” Kadrien said. “So glad you could find good work to put those codes to."
They laughed. Even Sentalin seemed to be falling into the feeling of insanity here.
"We have taken ships from ports before,” Tamaris finally reassured both Kadrien and the senator. “We're an eclectic group with a good many abilities among our smugglers, free traders, emperors, princes, mages, and... other people."
This time Tabor snorted with amusement.
"We know we have to take one of the craft,” Etric said. “A shuttle or a ship?"
"Ship,” Crystal said. “A shuttle flies too low, and would be far too easy of a target. Besides, we will still have to get in through the dome when the time comes. I would rather be standing off above it than down near the ground. We're ship people. We have a better chance with a good craft in our hands. But I suggest we look for something with weapons. Another IG flagship or the like would be good."
The others nodded.
"How do we take it?” Tam said. “We don't dare use the same ploy as we did on Silversun. News of that is bound to have gotten here by now."
"Besides, who wants to do the same thing all the time?” Crystal said. “I mean, if we're going to pirate yet another ship, let us at least be inventive about it."
"How many IGs are stationed here at Palin?” Sharton asked.
"About five hundred is all,” Sentalin said. “But they have the weapons. That's kept us in line, especially since most of the people have their families here. You will be careful—for yourselves and them?"
"Yes,” Kadrien said.
The man nodded.
Tathis signed a few quick words and Etric, startled by the idea, answered in kind. It took Ylin's laugh to remind him that others waited to know what they discussed.
He wasn't quite sure he wanted to broach this idea with the others, but Tathis did have a good point.
"Well?” Banning asked. “Anything we should know?"
She must have seen it in his face. And the others wondered as well, of course. Well, why not? It was, at least, an idea.
"Yes. Tathis suggests that we find the ship we want, rest up for today and tonight, and then go for it tomorrow in broad daylight."
"I said different, not suicidal. He does understand the difference, right?"
"Being with this group?” Kadrien said. “I doubt it."
"It makes a certain amount of sense,” Ylin admitted, and signed the same to Tathis. “We did note that the guards expect trouble at night."
"Your crew is crazy, Etric,” Crystal said.
"Right. Like yours isn't."
He didn't argue that one either. Nor did anyone in either crew. And it was obvious they took the suggestion seriously, and had already begun to think how they would use the ploy to their best advantage.
"You're all crazy,” Sentalin said. “All of you. You act as though you can't lose."
"Not true,” Etric said. “We act as though we intend to win. I'm not going into this battle without a good plan, whether we do it at night or during the day, tomorrow or next week. We'll know what the enemy has, and we'll use our resources in the best way to move against him."
"It is crazy,” Kadrien said. “But Etric's right. And I've seen what these people can do, Senator. I'm more than willing to put my life in their hands and go up against the IGs here in broad daylight. But you will not."
"I want to be with you,” Sentalin said, startled and worried now.
"We have every intention of winning; however, we might not. I want someone still on the outside with some idea of what has happened. I need you out here in case things do not go well, Sentalin."
Sentalin glanced at Tam, but the prince was already shaking his head. “No. I go with Kadrien—and with the people I've worked with for so long already. Keep that in mind, Senator. We are a team. We work well together. We'll do our best to get Kadrien back to the palace. You will do your best to make certain all is not lost if we fail. We're going to give you codes, Senator. We're going to give you access to the Empire."
"Gods,” he said, startled.
Etric, feeling things starting to fall into place again, leaned forward on the table. “The odds here are the best we're likely to get. The longer we wait, the worse it all gets, for us and for others, as the IGs dig in and make inroads. We cannot get to any place else without facing the same dangers. So we'll act from here."
"True,” Crystal agreed. “Everyone just remember that we got Tam off of Silversun and away from the IGs there."
"Don't even think about putting a laser to Kadrien's head,” Tam warned with a smile.
"Gods, no,” Crystal said with a yelp.
"Just a friendly little warning, Captain. I fear, here on Grant and with Kadrien in danger, I might act before my brain really understood."
Crystal nodded. “I understand. Don't worry. I'm not that stupid."
"After your act on Silversun, I wasn't so sure,” Tam replied, but he laughed again. Kadrien looked curious. “An IG captain wanted me for his own. Crystal convinced the man—rather strikingly with a pistol to the side of my head—that he'd kill me before he let me out of his hands."
"Well, that's bound to become legend,” Kadrien said.
"I really wish you people wouldn't say that any more."
They laughed again, and even Crystal looked as though he was trying to hide a grin. Sentalin looked as though he just wanted to start taking notes.
"We can get Kadrien back to the palace,” Tam said at last, a reassuring hand on his cousin's shoulder. “I really believe that we can do it. But we have to move carefully and wisely, and then we have to be prepared to work in whatever way is necessary to make certain it works for us."
"I can get all the information that the IGs have here on line,” Sharton said.
He even looked anxious to get to the work. Etric knew that feeling just now, though to be honest it was vying with the idea of going and taking a nice, long nap.
"Then we start preparing by learning all we can,” Tam said. “And after that, we can only act. But not today. Today we talk. And rest. And prepare for the future again."

Chapter 5

Kadrien listened as the others talked, but they didn't stay at the table for much longer. There wasn't much they could do until he, Sharton, and Tam collected all the information they could. At least they included him in the work.
But he wondered why they were here and so willing to help him get back to a throne that he was far from certain he wanted. He hated that thought. He didn't want to risk their lives on this. He wanted to tell them to take the ship and go—
And leave him here? Oh no. That would be even more useless. He might hide in Sentalin's home for a long time, but he couldn't. He couldn't just hide.
Now that he felt clean, rested, he looked back at the time in the mountains with a little shock. That couldn't have been him. He couldn't have walked those trails, shared those hardships—guarded and helped friends through the long, hard days. Emperor Kadrien had never been taught how to do those things.
Emperor Kadrien had spent all his life fearing that if he relaxed he would find only the ghost of his father in his heart—that he would become that creature rather than what he had really found there, in his soul.
But surely that trip had been someone else's journey. He could already feel himself slipping back into the role that court placed upon him. And it wasn't as though there weren't challenges at court, and things that he even enjoyed doing because he did them so well. He had brought the empire from the very edge of ruin at his father's death, and he had held it there in his hands, nurturing areas that had grown weak.
He didn't mind that work.
But he would... miss having friends. And there was the thought that he kept trying to push away, but that he would have to face soon anyway: he would miss these people.
"That's about it, then,” Etric said and stood. “We'll let our royalty get to work on the computer, while the rest of us... well, nap or something."
"'Stay out of trouble’ is the phrase you're looking for,” Tam said.
"Ah, yes. Thank you. We will do our utmost to stay out of trouble by confining ourselves to our rooms, and perhaps even to our beds."
Others laughed, but Kadrien had the feeling that was just exactly what most of them intended to do. He watched them start to wander back out of the room, careful and quiet, but relaxed now.
Crystal stood and put a hand on Kadrien's shoulder, and the emperor happened to see Sentalin's look in that one unguarded moment. Shock. Dismay. No one should touch the emperor.
He would miss being one of them, and hate going back to being the dispenser of law, the person who sat in that damned uncomfortable ancient throne and gave orders that set thousands moving—but never him. Oh no. He must never move—
"Don't work too hard, you three,” Crystal said. “We can stay here a couple days without any real danger. And we need the rest, you know. All of us."
"True,” Tam said. He stood and stretched and pushed Crystal off toward the door. “You go sleep. You still look like you've got a fever, Crystal."
"A bit of one. Etric said I'll be fine,” he answered. But he went toward the door where Istanan waited for him. “I'm so stuffed all I can do is waddle off and sleep."
Gods, he would miss them—
And he happened to look at Tam just then, and saw the way he grinned. He envied his cousin at that moment. Envied him more than he would ever have thought possible.
"What do you want, Kadrien?” Abby suddenly asked.
Oh hell. He should have realized that Abby was still there. Abby saw things that the others either didn't, or wisely ignored. But their godling friend asked questions that really shouldn't be asked of someone in his position.
Why? Because questions were dangerous? Or because he didn't want to face the answers?
Abby still watched him. Tam had not gone either, and Sentalin looked unsettled. It was for him that Kadrien actually answered, and honestly. It had always been for the people like Sentalin that he had done everything.
"I want this to go well. I do not want to be responsible for the deaths of anyone here."
Abby nodded, worry in his eyes—Kadrien hadn't considered how much alike they were in this respect. He thought about Abby traveling from place to place, so many friends fighting with him in battles at least as dangerous as the ones this group was going to face with the IGs. He wanted to ask Abby how he managed it—
"You could choose not to go back, Kadrien,” Tamaris said.
Kadrien looked at Tam, shocked by the words. He hadn't expected that from his cousin, not here and now with the knowledge of everything that was going on around them.
"Would you take the throne then, Tam?” Kadrien asked. Tam looked down at his hands. “No, I didn't think so."
"But still—” Tam began.
"I don't want to go back. We both know it. It's not what I want to do. Sorry, Senator, to shock you with that, but I don't want to go back to the palace and live out my days fearing assassins, worrying about bad information that someone might give me in hopes that I move in a way to help them, or watching my mother collect and discard new lovers. Oh yes, of course I knew about that. I'm not a fool, you know."
"No,” Sentalin said. He looked a little sad. “You have never been a fool, Emperor Kadrien. And I fear a lot of what you've lived through is more our fault than yours. We... worried, after your father."
"I know. I understand. It does not make it easier.” He looked at Tam and shook his head. “Yes, I could choose not to go back—but it would be a bad choice. I cannot walk away. Not yet."
Tam caught that last little line, though Kadrien wasn't certain any of the others did. It didn't matter. He saw Tam's nod, and it gave him hope. If the chance came for him to finally walk away, Tam would help him. He could ask for no better hope of the future. Now they had only to worry about the more immediate problems.
"What do you think would be best, Kadrien?” Sharton asked.
"Look, I'm still the same person who came through the mountains with you,” Kadrien said. “I'm still the one who lived a very quiet and secluded life—yes, it was, Sentalin. I saw many people every day. I didn't know any of them. I never had to work for anything, and I certainly had no clue about survival outside the palace."
"Ah,” he said. He seemed to still have some trouble with this entire concept of the emperor as a human being, and Kadrien could hardly blame him. “I hadn't thought of it that way. You have stayed here, after all, and I never considered you unfit for those walks in the woods, or so stupid that you couldn't at least learn to put on your own boots."
It took Kadrien a moment before he could get enough air to laugh. He patted Sharton on the arm, since he looked a little startled.
"You people got Tam off of Silversun with the IGs hunting you down. You are far better versed in this than I am. I leave it in your hands."
"Wise,” Tam said. “Then you can deny knowing any of the madness we decide to pursue."
"Yes. And if I don't know, I might actually be able to sleep tonight."
Etric, who had come back to stand at the doorway, laughed. “I imagine he'll think a great deal about it anyway."
"It wouldn't be my first sleepless night since I joined with this group of lunatics,” Kadrien said. He stood, stretching a little, grateful to be warm and comfortable. Etric looked his way, though, frowning. “What now?"
"I want Abby, Tristan, Sharton, and Tamaris to stay with you at all times during this coming trouble."
"Etric—” Kadrien began.
"No. Listen to me. It's important that we keep you safe. I'm not going to throw anyone's life away if I can help it, but it's important that we see you all the way to safety. Otherwise, it could all be for nothing, whatever happens to the rest of us."
Kadrien wanted to argue, but he bowed his head in acceptance instead.
"Thank you.” Etric sounded relieved. “Are you going to argue with me, Tam?"
"Of course not. You are the Captain."
"Ha. I wish all my battles with you went that easily.” Then he smiled and lifted a hand. “Never mind. Everyone here knows that you would have to be a perfect crewman and always obey orders without question. I'm sure even those who grew up with you realize it, right?"
Sharton coughed, his face reddening as he tried very, very hard not to laugh. As far as Kadrien could remember, he had never seen the prince from Silversun look so amused.
"Shall we turn our attention to figuring out how to get our hands on another IG ship?” Tam suggested.
"Maybe we ought to ask Sharton what the penalty for stealing Imperial Guard ships is before we go any farther,” Etric suggested.
Sharton had stood, reaching for his cane. He shook his head this time.
"No, you really don't want to know,” he said. And then he smiled very brightly. “Although, by law, the fleet belongs to the crown. If Prince Tamaris or Emperor Kadrien is with you, then it cannot be stealing. In fact, you can do anything you like with the ships—including running them into snow drifts—as long as these two are still in charge."

Chapter 6

Crystal ran across the open area between the buildings and the port wall, moving as quickly as he dared, listening for the movement of soldiers marching nearby. What he heard was his own breath coming in ragged gasps, and the beating of his heart.
But he made it to the corner of the wall where Banning, Tathis, Damien, and Sand had already gathered, all of them pressed into the shadows, waiting and watching.
"You're certainly not out of shape, Captain Crystal,” Sand said, a slight laugh in her voice. “You made it across far faster than any of the rest of us."
"Did I? Gods, I felt like I was moving through water."
Banning held up her hand. They fell silent and still, though Crystal moved his hand to his laser pistol. Guards marched nearby. Crystal could see them down the street, shadows in the lessening darkness. The sun was coming up already, and all hell would break loose soon.
"We should never have left it up to the mages to come up with a diversion,” he said.
"Little late for that kind of wisdom,” Banning replied. She held up her wrist, looking at the time. “Every computer and computer-based function in Palin should be going down about now, thanks to Tam and Sharton."
And on cue, the lights died in the buildings nearby, as well as in the small port beyond the wall. He could hear shouts and worried soldiers. They suspected an attack. Dangerous people, but then they had known they were.
Crystal saw the first flash of lightning and felt a breeze pick up with a hint of the scent of rain. He probably should have checked the weather—but he would have thought the mages....
"I knew we never should have trusted the mages off by themselves,” Banning said with a shake of her head.
"Oh hell.” Crystal looked back to see a wall of fog sweeping toward them in the faint first gray light of dawn. The wind moved before it, tearing off pieces of walls and roofs. And then the fog struck and devoured buildings, trees, even the sounds of the frantic Imperial Guards.
"Grab Tathis!” Crystal shouted as the wind struck, shoving him back toward the wall.
Damien had hold of Tathis and Banning grabbed hold of Crystal. But at least the wind passed quickly, although the cold thick fog came right behind, obscuring everything beyond an arm's length away.
"Well... my,” Crystal said. “This is really helpful, isn't it?"
Tathis looked around before he turned back to Crystal, shaking his head.
"Don't look at me. This is your captain's work."
He grinned.
The fog seemed to grab and hold the light of day in a soft glow, even in this early dawn. Sounds came and went nearby, but Crystal couldn't actually see anything. He glanced at his own watch, noting that they would be going up over the port wall soon. The fog might help them get closer to their intended ship, but he would have liked to have been able to see a little of what they could walk into.
Running feet—they stopped and waited, and in the next moment Crystal realized that whoever was out there was going to come too damn close to them. He grabbed his laser pistol and pulled it—
Etric rushed out of the fog and came to a skidding stop, his hands held up as he saw the laser aimed at him. He gasped for breath, red-faced and panting.
"Sorry,” Crystal said, dropping the pistol back into his belt. “I didn't expect you. What the hell is going on?"
"The fog and storm turned out to be a bit more than we expected. Tristan and Tabor working together have a very powerful affect on nature,” Etric said. He looked around, obviously still stunned by the sight, and shook his head again. “I came to help you people get to the ship as quickly as possible, since you'll have to take control before the others can get in."
"Ah,” Banning said. She looked at the wall. “Let's go."
Crystal nodded. Banning started up the wall, clawing at it and cursing softly, but reaching the top quickly. She laid there on the narrow edge for a moment, and then looked back down—a thin layer of mist drifted around her, like a curl of smoke.
"Looks clear. Let's go."
Crystal and Etric both signaled Tathis up next, and then Damien. The two went up and over the other side, Banning remained on the ledge, keeping watch from the slightly higher ground. Sand went up and over without argument.
"You next,” Etric said. “Don't argue. You and Sand are the only hope we have of getting into that ship, you know. Go."
He nodded and reached up, trying not to show how much the movement still hurt. Etric must have known, though, since he had been using magic to repair the arm and knew what kind of damage still existed. Etric said nothing as he helped boost Crystal up with hands under his foot. It helped not to put so much pressure on the arm.
Banning reached, and then shook her head. “Not the injured arm. Get the other one where I can grab it."
They were good people. He let Banning pull him upward, and then he slid over the top and down the other side, landing on the hard surface of the port cement with Sand and Tathis to his sides and Damien just a few steps away, already hardly more than a ghost in the fog. Etric followed a moment later and Banning right after him.
Crystal could hear sounds, but he had trouble tracking them through the fog. He looked back at Etric again, about to complain, and stopped. None of them really knew that Tristan and Tabor could do.
Etric lifted a hand, testing, and then shook his head again. “There's so much damn magic in this storm that I can't really get a clear reading of anything out there."
"Well, that's just wonderful,” Crystal said. “At least we know where the ship is. Let's go."
Etric nodded. He looked less assured now that he couldn't properly use his magic. Crystal found that amusing, and knew it was a good thing that he didn't count on magic in his work. He only had to find the ship.
His arm ached worse after that little climb over the wall. This had been a damned hard trip for him. He would be glad to have it done.
Or would they ever be done? He glanced at Banning and wondered about the stuff she and Seaton still worked on, quietly between the two of them. Magic and starship engines. Now there was something that ought to have been giving him nightmares. Good thing he hadn't had time to even think about it.
Crystal had a good feel for direction, especially on a world where he had spent so much time out of doors lately. He kept them heading toward the ship, anxious to get it and kick the crew out—
Movement in the fog, and in the next moment they faced a half dozen equally startled Imperial Guards.
"Down!” Etric shouted, and pushed Tathis down as well.
Laser fire went over the top of them, but Crystal had his weapon in hand as he dropped, and he fired back. Fog and laser weapons were tricky together, especially a fog this thick. He heard the moist air hiss as light swept through it, but he couldn't be sure that it really did anything else.
Etric swept the fog in tighter around them, so thick and close that Crystal barely saw him signal them to crawl away. They moved, silent and quick, though Crystal looked around with panic until he found Tathis.
"Don't worry,” Etric whispered. “Tathis will stay with us! Careful of your arm."
Crystal let Etric worry about his deaf crewman, and turned his own attention back to getting them to the ship. They didn't dare wander too far off the path or even he would get lost in this fog.
After a few yards they got back to their feet and began to jog. He kept burying the fear that even he would lose his direction in this mist. Keep going. He could find it.
He could hear shouts go up throughout the area as word spread of intruders in the compound. He could have done without that part, but it really wouldn't affect them too badly. He had thought they'd be spotted in the open anyway. This just let the IGs wander around, nearly as lost as they were.
He had lost track of distance, but he did have the direction right, and came up to the side of the ship, a huge metal wall rising up out of the gray and reaching up too high to see the top, even though the Joyride was not a very large ship, usually crewed by no more than seven or eight. It would be a tight fit with seventeen of them inside.
They wouldn't be there long, though. The leap from Palin to the Capital would take less than an hour, and then they would be back down on the ground facing whatever new problems they would find there.
Sharton, Tam and Kadrien didn't seem to think that getting through the dome would be a problem, but he had seen that glowing mass of energy on their way in. He didn't think it would just magically disappear.
Oh no, not magically. Codes, though... Well, he had to believe that their three royalty could handle that little problem.
Crystal had to get the ship into their hands before they did anything else. They had been easing their way along the shell toward the airlock. It had to be close, but he still couldn't see it yet.
"Small ship,” Etric said. His own Freedom was larger than Crystal's Fame. This probably looked like a toy to him. “Do you think the life support will hold up with that many people?"
"It'll hold for the short time we need to get from here to the capital,” Banning said. “I'll make certain of that part."
Etric didn't doubt her.
"There,” Crystal said. He hurried the next four steps and came to the edge of the airlock. “Okay, this is going to be pretty quick. The airlock is only one door—no inner lock on a fighter like this. It will open to a short hall, and straight into the control deck. Be careful of the weapons you use. You don't want to damage the equipment."
"Hold on for a moment,” Etric said. “I can hear—yeah, that would be some of our people. Good. I'd like more of a force to get in."
Crystal frowned, wondering how Etric could tell from the sound—ah, of course. A cane. And it turned out to be one of his own crew, not Etric's. Istanan reached the ship, and Banning found the others and pulled them over to the airlock area. Istanan, Kamil, and Rqua, who had been busy elsewhere making certain some parked aircars couldn't be used to bring troops straight to them. Of course, now that work seemed a little unnecessary. No fool would fly in this weather.
"About to go in,” Crystal said. He had his probe in hand. Steady this time, even at the thought of pirating another ship. He held for a moment and looked back at Etric. “I did this for the crown prince on Silversun, and now I'm pirating a ship for the Emperor on Grant. The universe has gone mad."
"I'm not going to argue."
Crystal turned back to the airlock. The work didn't take him long at all. It wasn't like he hadn't had a lot of practice at it lately. The airlock slid open; unfortunately it was not as well-maintained as he might have hoped. It squeaked.
Someone fired a laser pistol their way. It scorched the side of the door. Banning cursed, started to fire back in, and stopped herself before Crystal could even protest. Etric took a different approach. He started to spell cast—a whisper of words that Crystal didn't understand—and then dropped to his knees and leaned forward. Laser fire still came too damned close over him, but then it stopped.
"Holding them,” Etric said, breathless. “Grab the weapons quickly. Get the ship. Careful—may be others."
"No others,” Kamil said.
"Good."
Banning, Sand, and Istanan had already started in. By the time Crystal got Etric back to his feet and stepped inside, the others had grabbed the weapons from the crew. Sand and Tathis went off to check the engine area and Damien had dropped into the comm station, bringing the comm equipment up loud enough for everyone to hear. So far no one had realized they were taking a ship. Good.
Etric still held the IGs by his magic, and Rqua reinforced him. Crystal left them to it and went over to the boards, starting the work of checking the power and preparing to fire the engines—though he would not even start bringing them up to strength until all the crew had arrived. No use giving away their secret quite yet.
"Fog is dissipating,” Ylin reported as he and Otaka arrived with Abby, Tristan, and Tabor. The last two looked a little frayed, but they'd done a damned good job. Abby had wrapped the Janin in cloth, too, which helped to keep her quiet. Crystal doubted she would put up with that for much longer, though.
"Everyone in but the important ones,” Banning said. She looked toward the airlock opening. “It would be our luck that those three would get lost."
"Don't even think such a thing,” Crystal said. He tapped two more keys. One more and the ship would be ready to fire, and could launch just a few moments later.
"Right,” she said. “I'm going a few yards out—I'll stay in sight of the airlock. Maybe I can hear something."
"Careful,” Crystal said, but nodded. Ylin went with her, his weapon in hand.
"Almost,” Etric said. The strain of holding the others with magic had worn him down, but it did leave everyone else open to take up the other work and prepare for the launch, which Crystal just hoped happened soon. Banning and Ylin had barely gotten out of the airlock before she gave a wave and turned around.
"They're here,” Crystal said. He stepped aside as Abby went past him, obviously looking for a place to put the Janin. “Let's get the IGs out of here, Etric. It's going to be crowded enough without them."
Etric nodded. Crystal stepped closer to the five IGs, all of them white-faced with fear. Magic held them in place, and they'd never faced anything like this before.
Otaka, Zoe, and Istanan also moved in around the group, weapons in hand. Etric dropped the spell and leaned back against the boards. Not good. They'd not have his magic again until he got a chance to recharge—
And when had he started counting on magic so much?
He could see Tam, Kadrien, and Sharton coming into the airlock. He almost gave a warning about the prisoners heading out, but Banning saw and moved in front of the three as the others herded the cursing IGs toward the exit.
It had gone too well. He knew that, and was not even shocked when one of the IGs pulled a very small laser from under his jacket, grabbed Tristan, and put the weapon up against the side of his head.
Tristan closed his eyes, and Crystal saw Abby go very still at the other side of the room. The others had paused as well, though Etric had straightened, ready. Careful, careful...
"So,” the IG said, pulling Tristan aside so that the man stood with his back to the wall and Tristan as a shield. His companions rushed past and out into the fog. He looked at them with a little disgust. “So, this one is important to you, is he? We'll be leaving, the two of us—"
"He's important,” Kadrien said, stepping forward, past Banning's reaching hands. “But I am more so. And you really want me, don't you?"
The man looked. Crystal could see the side of his face, the way the lips pulled back in a snarl, and the finger tightened on the little trigger, but not enough to fire. He had begun to slide closer to the airlock door and Kadrien.
"You, Emperor Kadrien, are about to make me a very rich man,” the IG said. “But not quite the way you think. The IGs don't want you at all, you see—"
He shoved Tristan into Banning, and then he turned the laser pistol toward Kadrien and pulled the trigger.
"No!"
And the world held. Or didn't. Crystal couldn't decide which in that moment when the weapon fired and Abby yelled. He didn't blink. He didn't look away—and yet things changed. He had started to move, knowing the man meant to kill Kadrien.
Only... only Kadrien was already on the floor, and Abby stood in his place. He saw Abby hit by the fire and he heard Tristan cry out as the godling folded over and went down, and even the Janin, muffled in her covering, screamed in shock and fear.
The IG didn't even seem to realize that he had not killed the Emperor. He started to take a step away, but he never got that far. Tamaris put a knife straight through his heart. He tumbled out of the craft, dead before he hit the ground.
"No,” Tabor whispered, already going to kneel by Abby. “No. It cannot happen this way."
"Trouble coming!” Ylin shouted. He looked frantic as he sealed the airlock door. “They know we're in here. The fog is nearly gone, and they're going to have no trouble blowing us to hell."
"Take us up,” Etric said. He pushed Crystal toward the controls. “Take us up right now."
"Abby—” Crystal whispered.
Etric had already gone to where Abby lay, too still, on the floor. Tabor and Rqua knelt there as well. Banning had gathered Tristan into her own arms, and he didn't look any better.
"Captain,” Seaton said softly.
He turned away. If he didn't get the ship out of here, none of them would survive. But if they had lost Abby—
He glanced back and found Etric working magic, blue light flowing from his fingers. Not dead, then. Hope, still, as long as they could get away.
"Fire engines, Istanan,” he said. Sharton threw himself into the chair before the weapon's board. Seaton sat at piloting, and Crystal took the engineering controls.
"We're going up!” he warned everyone. “Grab hold! We're going up fast!"
He dared to look back over his shoulder, worried about Abby lying there on the floor. But he could see a shell go up around them, light and power that would protect and hold Abby and the mages in place as they worked to save his life.
Crystal forced a surge of power through the Joyride and then started them upward with a push of gravity that jabbed like knives though his joints. He hoped Istanan was all right. He hoped Abby...
Someone fired a cannon at them from the ground. Sharton took care of that problem with one shot. The engine fluctuated for a moment, but it didn't slow them. They went up. Nothing stopped them.
"IGs in orbit,” Istanan said above the sound of roaring engines. “Still a ways out. We'll be up before they catch up with us."
He kept going. And didn't dare look back at the others...

Chapter 7

One moment Kadrien knew that he faced death. He knew that he had done it for the right reasons, and that Tristan was well worth the sacrifice. He had no doubt of that, even as the finger tightened. He didn't want to die but—
But something had happened. He found himself down on the floor, and he looked up to find Aubreyan Altazar in the place where he had been. He saw Abby hit, saw him start to fall. The Janin screamed, and the others became frantic, but he could only sit there by the wall and watch.
He didn't understand. He didn't even understand what the others said around him.
He should have been there on the floor, not Abby.
Going up. Tam caught hold of his arm and held him in place against the pull of gravity. He saw the magic shield around Abby and the others, and he heard the shouts about cannons, ships, IGs. It should mean something to him. It should—
He took a breath. He thought it might be the first one he'd taken since he stood before that laser. He felt lightheaded, stunned, alive... and watched as the others worked as fast as they could to heal a wound that should have been his own. He shuddered this time.
"Kad,” Tam said. He thought it wasn't the first time. “Kadrien? Look at me."
He did. It wasn't easy. He thought nothing could be more important than watching Abby, wishing he could give life to the mages, offer something—
"Kadrien, you're not listening to me,” Tam said again. Gentle, quiet, and worried.
"I don't know what happened,” Kadrien said. He could feel a hint of hysteria in his voice, and he wasn't certain he could fight it down if he let go. “Tam, I stood there—I was the one. I—"
"Calm,” Tam said. He put both hands on Kadrien's shoulders, startling him again. “He saved you. He stepped in and saved you. I've seen him do it before with Tristan."
"How could he—magic?"
"No. Abby has no magic. This came from something far more powerful,” Tam pulled Kadrian back toward the wall again, and sat there with him, the crown prince and emperor on the floor ignored while the others worked. “He has powers. And he could not stand by and let you be hurt."
"It's not right. Not him—” Kadrien stopped himself, trying to find the words.
"It's not right. But neither would it be right to have you there instead. It's done, Kadrien. He did it for his own reasons."
"I can't do it,” Etric suddenly said. The shell around them disappeared, and his hands kept working, but he shook his head. “I can't hold him. The injury—"
"No,” Tabor said. He worked quickly as well. “No, I will not let him and Tristan go."
But he pulled his hands back in that moment, and Kadrien felt ill with the fear that he had given up.
"Tabor—” Rqua whispered.
"I can do something,” Tabor said. He dropped back on his heels, his hand on Abby's forehead, and a whisper of power still moved there, the flickering of greenish light across Abby's very pale face. “I can do something drastic, and daring—but there is no telling how it might affect the rest of us. If I call to them, it could put you all in danger."
"Do it,” Etric said. Breathless, his hand moving even faster over Abby's chest. “Do it. We won't give up that easily on Abby!"
Tabor bowed his head, drew his hand back—Rqua gasped and leaned forward, his face covered in perspiration, but he put a hand where Tabor's had been, and sent magic there again.
"Gods—” Tabor began, his voice soft. “No. More personal. Careful. Goddess of the Stars and Winds, I call on you for a favor. I call on you to come to us..."
Something happened. Kadrien felt it like a shiver of electricity up through his spine. His body tingled, and it seemed as though the air came alive in some way. Everything grew brighter and somehow less real. He felt Tam's fingers tighten on his arm, and he wanted to ask what was happening now, but somehow speaking seemed unwise. Or unnecessary.
Until he heard the sound of gold and lace, and felt a touch of spring fresh breeze across his face, he had not truly believed. But now something stood before him—golden, bright, with the scent of spring storms around her. She turned as Tabor stood, her face beautiful and unreachable.
But she had Abby's green eyes.
"You risked much, calling upon us again, Demonling. You risk—"
"Not for me,” Tabor said. He moved his hand toward the floor. “Your son is dying. We can't keep him alive much longer."
She looked down—and her face changed. Panic came in that moment and with it a wind that tore at them all, nearly pulling Tam and Kadrien away from their spots. She dropped to her knees, and even Tabor looked startled. But the wind died again as quickly as it came, and she laid her hand on her son's chest. A flicker of light—but not much, Kadrien saw. And she shook her head again.
"No,” she whispered. But there was no power in the word—not like Abby had said the word and saved his life. “He goes. Tristan—"
She reached over and pulled the crown from the elf's head. Tristan came awake with a start, and grabbed it back from her hand.
"You should not, Elf—"
"I will go with him,” Tristan said as he pulled the crown free. His voice didn't even tremble, though he reached out and touched Abby's face as well. “No matter where he goes—from world to world or to hell itself—or even to death—I will go with him, Goddess. That has always been my choice."
She let go of the crown, her head bowed a moment.
"Can you help him?” Tabor asked as he knelt as well. He put a hand on Tristan's arm, stopping the elf from putting the crown back on. “Can you save him?"
"I would,” she said. “I would if I could. I cannot change the way things are, Demonling. I cannot—"
Kadrien saw things in her face as her fingers gently brushed Abby's face. That touch seemed to startle Tristan. Had she never done that before?
Why not? Perhaps for the same reasons that he had never told others that Tamaris was his friend? Power, duty, rules... control. What held her back now from helping her son, even thought he could see the longing to do so plainly in her face?
"Ship coming in!” Crystal suddenly shouted, startling them all. “Sharton—"
"Can't get a line on him. My controls won't respond—"
"They're going to fire! Take hold!"
Something touched the ship—but she looked up and waved her hand, anger in her face this time.
"They're—they're gone,” Crystal said. “They just... disappeared. No one near, and the others are backing off—"
Kadrien looked at her. “If you can do that—"
"Danger to myself goes beyond the powers that control me,” she said softly. “But I cannot do something here for another. I cannot give in a place where—"
"Sacrifice!” Tabor said, and he grabbed the dagger at his waist. “I give you my—"
"No.” She caught his arm, stopping him from plunging that dagger into his heart. He looked startled and afraid. “No. I do not accept blood, Tabor. It will not help to kill yourself now."
"But another gift instead,” he said and looked into her eyes. “Whatever price you ask."
Her breath caught. “Yes. I can accept a gift."
"Tell me what it must be! Tell me quickly!"
"You as my servant—"
"No!"
No one had expected Tristan to move so quickly, to shove Tabor aside with a blow of power that knocked him unconscious as he fell. Kadrien saw the look of panic on the demonling's face in that last moment. He saw all hope gone.
"Why?” Starwind whispered. “Why would you condemn Abby? You know I cannot take a gift from you! You are tied to closely to Abby. You cannot offer something for him."
"I know,” Tristan said. He gasped now, and Kadrien feared that he would see the elf die right then, and know that Abby had as well.
"I don't understand,” Starwind said. She put a hand on the elf's shoulder, holding him up. “You would let him die."
"Yes. You don't know him the way I do, goddess,” he said. He reached for Abby, and Starwind lifted Abby's hand and put it in Tristan's. And then she put the crown on his head again. “He would never accept—another serving as he is promised to the demon."
"You should have trusted me, Elf,” she whispered. “You should have known that I would not ask something so cruel from even Tabor."
"And how... how could we know such a thing?"
She bowed her head, eyes closed. “I cannot hold him. Hold tight, Tristan. Don't lose your hold on him now—"
"A different gift,” Etric said suddenly. “I can offer something else. All of us will go with Abby, Tristan, and Tabor to fight the demon. All of us and the ship we take with us!"
Tristan lifted his head—it looked difficult. “No, Captain Etric—"
"Yes!” Etric said. He even dared a hand on the arm of a goddess, drawing her full attention. “That is our gift, Lady of the Stars and Winds. And Tristan has no say in it, because we would have gone anyway. We had already found the way, and only waited until we settled the matter with Emperor Kadrien before we told him."
"You can't—” Tristan said, but stopped.
"You couldn't stop us,” Etric said. “We already have the way plotted. Even if you went without us, we already knew we would follow. But that doesn't matter here and now. Goddess, if we swear our fealty to your son, and fight this war with him to the end—"
"Oh, it is enough!” She looked around, amazed. “Yes, you have given it, this gift. You need not swear it to me, not all of you. Those who accept will go with Abby to fight the war."
Her hands reached out, white powerful magic enveloping Abby in that moment. Kadrien could even feel it where he sat. He wondered, in fact, if they all didn't share that moment when magic healed much.
He saw Tristan take a deeper breath. And he saw both Etric and Rqua pull back, relief so plain in their faces that he didn't need to look at the goddess to know that Abby would live.
She stood, a breeze moving with her again. He felt life in that breeze. He felt hope and wonder and a future that surely could not be something to dread.
"Go with him, those of you who believe in the war,” she said softly. She turned slowly, looking from face to face. “Keep Aubreyan safe. Keep him in your hearts. He is a gift, you know. He is a gift given from the gods to man, in payment for the belief of a dying king, who even when we failed him believed that we would set things right."
"Thank you, Goddess,” Tristan said, and bowed his head to her.
"You do not realize—” she stopped and looked again at Abby and then lifted her head. “You are what gives Abby the power to win. The humans who join him, and believe in him and his war, are what bring him the ability to win the battle. And it is your ties with him that make him—and Tabor—human."
She stepped back away. The glow around Abby had started to fade, but she still smiled. No one else seemed to move yet. Kadrien wasn't certain what they wanted, or expected. He didn't even know for himself anymore.
"I can feel all your hearts and souls with him,” she said softly. She lifted her hand, as though it were something she could touch on the air. “I can feel the gifts you give him, each willing to fight a war for all the universe, to help him. You give gifts beyond which even the gods have rarely felt."
Another step back. He realized that she was leaving, and he didn't want to her to go just yet. He wanted her to be there for Abby, so that he could see in her face what they all saw just now. He raised his hand, and stopped in mid-move.
"I accept your gift,” she said softly. “I accept it in Abby's name.” And then she looked at Kadrien, her eyes meeting his. “May you find what you most desire."
A blessing from a goddess.
The whisper of gold and lace, the scent of a spring breeze... and then she disappeared. Ship sounds came back, the bleep of equipment, the whisper of life support. But he could still smell the flowers in the air.
Kadrien had never felt so alive as he did in that moment.
"That—that was far too close,” Etric said. He looked around at the others. “I should have asked—"
"No,” Otaka said. “You didn't need to ask. You already knew the answer, just as she did."
Others nodded. He even saw pleasure in some of the faces.
"IG ships?” Etric asked.
"None coming near us. Not after she... did whatever she did,” Crystal said. “We're safe for the moment. He is all right?"
"Weak still. I think he would have been dead, if I had not held to him with the crown,” Tristan said. He laid a hand on Abby's arm again. “But he'll recover."
"A little time, then,” Etric said. His hands were shaking. “A little time before we go on to the capital."
No one argued.
And Kadrien sat back, thinking about rules, power, and a goddess he understood far better than he would have thought possible.

Chapter 8

Abby awoke slowly, pain jabbing at his chest, his breath coming in a little gasp. He remembered what had happened: Kadrien in danger and willing to save Tristan. He could not allow Kadrien to die for them and he had stopped it. But it hurt.
And then in the next step of consciousness he knew it should have been far worse. In that moment he relived his actions, and the feelings of all that had happened, including what he felt through Tristan's crown.
She had been here. He could feel her touch on the crown—an odd touch, distant and yet there, filled with life and thoughts of love—
That startled him, brought him fully awake and filled him with fear pounding harder than the pain. He could not quite get a feel of what had happened. Tristan held back, tried to soothe him into calm. But—
"Tabor called her, Abby,” Tristan finally said aloud. Abby blinked, aware that they were still on the ship. He could see others. Rqua smiled. “Tabor called her and offered a gift—but I stopped him."
"But—” he began. It hurt even to speak. Tristan tried to quiet him, but the panic kept growing. “But she came. She gave—a gift. My life. What—what have they done?"
"We said we would go with you to fight the war with Gix, Abby,” Rqua said.
"No! You cannot go there—You cannot—"
"Abby,” Tristan whispered, grimacing this time at the emotions as well as the pain. “Please—
"This isn't right. It is not what I want—"
"Too bad,” Crystal said. “It's done."
He looked up at Crystal, shock replacing the fear of a moment before. Crystal looked unrepentant. In fact, he looked as happy as Abby had ever seen him. For a moment that almost overcame the other emotions, but then he recalled what they had done, and he felt both frustration and fear in equal measure, as well as guilt. He should have known that they would do something like this if he stayed too long. He should never have endangered them.
"Rest, my friend,” Tristan said softly. “Rest now. You need it."
"What have they done?” he whispered again, but it didn't take much for Tristan to push him back into sleep.
He awoke again later, feeling far better, though weak and aching. He tried to forget the pain of the fire burning through him—
"Abby,” Tristan whispered.
"It's all right,” Abby answered. He felt saner now, without the pain as strong. He looked around the little ship and saw that most of the others had found places to rest, many of them sleeping. He didn't know how much time had passed. He didn't know what they were still doing here in the ship. He seemed to remember there being a discussion about the ship being inadequate to support them for very long.
"It's all right,” Tristan said aloud. He even put a hand under Abby's elbow and helped him sit up. He had a cup in his hand, and Abby sipped at the water, cool and soothing. “The other IG ships are holding off—apparently the Goddess made a few ships disappear when they tried to attack us, and they're rather leery of whatever strange weapon we used."
He laughed a little, though he regretted that she'd had to kill those people—if she had. Probably, knowing even as little as he did about her, she just made the ships go elsewhere. She had saved his friends, though. He felt a grateful for her for taking care of them. He very much doubted that she'd been in any real danger, though she could at least claim it—he caught that from Tristan's thoughts.
And he felt something else. Embarrassment?
"I shouldn't have let you wake up,” Tristan said, and bowed his head. “I just—the others were talking about the view, Abby. And... and I wanted to see it."
"Then let us look,” Abby said. He smiled and put an arm across Tristan's shoulders, letting his friend take most of the weight as they stood. “Stop feeling guilty. You have never asked for anything, Tristan. To go and look at something pretty—I think I can manage to give that to you."
They only had to go a few steps to get past the curve. The crew had opened up a large screen across half the wall, and for a moment he stood there, stunned by the view of a disc, hanging on a backdrop of black and distant stars—a green world, tipped in white. He could see the mountains rising from the snow, and clouds moving across the surface.
And just above that world hung another ball—a moon of yellow clouds, glittering like gold in the sky.
Abby had never seen anything quite so breathtaking before. And the power of that moon—even he felt it whisper around him, pure and strong.
Tabor had followed them in. He looked out and shook his head, amazement showing in his brown eyes. “I don't like the emptiness of this place—this reality where they rush from world to world. But Abby, I have never seen anything so lovely."
"I am not pleased that you called her here,” Abby said. Tabor bowed his head. “It is dangerous, Tabor. You should have known what bringing her here would do—"
"I did know,” he said. He looked up, and Abby knew that he would not be repentant. “I knew that if I called her there was a chance that I could save your life. And it was the only chance we had at all."
"I was not—"
"Don't try to tell me that your life was not worth the risk,” Tabor said, shaking his head with a snarl of anger. Abby almost stepped back, shocked—he had not seen Tabor angry about anything in the time since they had joined forces. He hadn't expected it to come over something like this. “Don't tell me that you don't matter in what's going on. I came to fight for you, Aubreyan Altazar. I renounced the demons and made enemies that will never be satiated until they have me, tormented and tortured, in their hands. And I did it because I knew that you were the one who should win this battle, not me."
"But—” He tried to form a coherent argument.
"He did what was right, Abby,” Banning said. She turned from the board where she had been sitting. “He brought her here to save you, and in doing so... he helped us all. And don't even think about telling Etric he shouldn't have offered the gift he did."
"It is not right!” Abby said, his voice rising with a little more frustration.
"Abby, you lost that battle even before Starwind came here,” Tabor said. “They had already decided that they would go on with you. They already had found the way."
Abby stared at him, stunned by that idea. Why had the goddess accepted that gift, knowing it had already been given? He began to think that he didn't understand much about his mother at all.
"Tristan and I will go on without you,” Abby said.
"Then we'll just follow,” Banning answered with an annoying little shrug. “I think it would be safer for us to all travel together, of course, but if you go without us, we won't be far behind."
"They can do it, Abby,” Tabor said. “They showed me."
"You people are insane!” Abby finally said. And that drew laughter from a lot of places.
"Yes, we are all crazy,” Crystal said. He came into the control deck, glanced at the screen and then at the boards, nodding. Then he looked back at Abby, Tristan, and Tabor. “We are crazy. We have been since long before you crossed our path. And we had been fighting this war, Abby, each of us in our own way, before you stumbled into our lives."
"I—” He started and stopped again, before even Tristan could gently reprimand him.
"Don't deny us the right to help in the bigger battle, Abby,” Crystal said. He came close enough to put a hand on Abby's arm and to look into his face. Not many people did that, and he wondered what it was they saw in his eyes that frightened them sometimes. “This has never been just your war."
"I know,” he said. “I know that you're right. But I fear this."
"We all fear,” Crystal said. “But we fight anyway."
"Yes,” Abby said. He bowed his head to the inevitable. “Yes, you're right. I never meant to say that you were not important to the war. I never meant to imply that you could not fight. But to go with me—"
"It's done,” Crystal said. His fingers tightened and then let go. “It's done and we're going. Now you should go and rest. We'll be heading down to Grant in a couple hours. There are ships coming our way, and we don't dare stay here and try to fight it out with them."
"Tristan—"
"They are right, Abby. They are right and they did right. They gave a gift of their hearts in that moment when you nearly died."
"But—"
"But if you had died, I would have gone with you,” Tristan said. “You knew that, and I wouldn't have been here to help them in the battle any more than you would. But now you know another truth. If you had died, they would have gone on with the war and fought it without us."
That stunned him. He looked around the crowded little area with shock and dismay. They should not be forced to fight his war—
"Stop thinking that,” Tristan said, a little more force in his words than usual. “Stop making it just your war. I chose to fight with you. Tabor chose. It is our war as much as it is yours, and it is theirs as much as ours. We cannot stop them from going on to the battle, and it's good to have allies, because this next battle is the one we dare not lose. When we face Gix, we dare not fail. And it is these people who will live with the consequences, because we aren't likely to have any more say in it, are we?"
He couldn't argue with that logic. He didn't like the choices people had made—but he couldn't change what had happened. And could he really be sorry that they had given him a gift of life? He suddenly felt as though he'd been uncommonly rude. It had been the shock. He couldn't believe that she would do anything to help—
But she gave you to us, Tristan thought. And that was such a strange idea that it stilled him a moment. He heard an echo of her words in Tristan's head, and wished... wished he could have been conscious to talk to her, to understand. To ask his own questions—
"We still have another matter to settle,” Tabor said softly. “We aren't going to rush off to Gix's own hell just yet. First we need to see Kadrien's trouble ended and this place put back to order."
Abby nodded. He even welcomed the little respite from the larger war, though he didn't deny it would be dangerous enough. He'd had a very graphic example of that when he faced the IG.
"Yes, we'll help Kadrien,” he said. He leaned back, weary. Tired. “And we'll see what happens afterwards."
But whatever it was, he knew that they would be traveling with friends. And he couldn't, in the depths of his heart, regret that part.

Chapter 9

Etric stood next to Crystal as they brought the ship in for their final approach toward the dome and the city below. He tried not to fidget. He couldn't help but think it would be pretty damned ironic for them to splatter themselves into atoms now that they'd made the most important decisions of their lives, and intended to go fight evil and save the universe.
"Any contact?” he said aloud. Even Crystal gave a little start at the words, and he wondered what had been going through his friend's mind. He didn't ask, for fear it was even worse than his own thoughts.
"Nothing,” Ylin said, tapping keys and shaking his head. He didn't stop trying. “The IGs have everything blocked. I can't get through."
"Tam—” Etric said, looking toward the computer station where he, Sharton, and Kadrien had gathered.
"There. We have a line through,” Sharton said. His hands moved over the keys with the same speed and sureness of Ylin. “I could take down the IGs’ net that stops communications—but do we really want them to know that we can do it?"
"No,” Etric, Sand, and Crystal chorused.
Everyone laughed.
"Didn't think so,” Sharton said.
He and Tam continued to work at the boards, with Kadrien offering occasional comments. Etric wanted to go and stand over them and watch or goad, or do something besides watch the scanners and the screen.
"We have a dozen small fighters coming in,” Banning warned. “And three larger ships behind those craft. I don't think we can take them all out, though to be honest I'm willing to give it a real try."
Crystal lifted a hand when Etric turned his way. “Yes, my crew. Yes, she's crazy. Yes, I know. But since you are here with us, of your own free will—"
"Oh sure. Start bringing up something like that now,” Etric said. He glanced back at their rather odd trio of computer people. “We have about three minutes before we let Banning have her wish—"
"Got it,” Sharton said. His fingers moved even faster. “I have to keep reworking the codes to keep control, but I'm in."
Tam looked back at them and nodded. “We can do it. Sorry, Banning."
"Ah well. Maybe next time.” But she did fire at the closest of the ships, sending the little fighters scattering so at least they couldn't mass their power in an attack.
"I can drop the shield dome, get us in, and close it five seconds afterwards,” Sharton said. “Sending info to Seaton's station."
"Got it. Looks good,” Seaton said. His hands started to move as well.
"Can you do it?” Tam asked.
"Yes. Give me a countdown."
Numbers flashed on the screen before Etric could comment or protest. They made a rather precipitous drop toward the world, too. A good thing that everyone else, at least, had been warned to stay in place and keep hold. He and Crystal were the only two fools still standing, and as the ship moved, Crystal snagged his arm and pulled him back to a small fold-down bench at the corner of the room.
They headed toward the shield dome, along with several fighters. The screen began to fill with the bright light of its power, and Etric held his breath. Trusted Seaton and Sharton, of course, but still—
Alarms went off. Someone killed them. Closer. No one spoke—
He thought they brushed the shield just as it died. Etric wasn't the only one who made a sound of relief in that moment.
"You've got to learn to trust us,” Sharton said. “Dome's closed behind us."
"Problem,” Banning said. She had lifted her hands from the weapons board and now went back to it. “A fighter came in right on our tail, and it's powering for another shot at us. And I sure as hell don't dare try to take them out in here. Even if I hit them, the crash would be in the city—not good."
"We need to force them down,” Crystal said. He crossed to stand behind Seaton, who was already moving the ship in ways that made Etric's stomach queasy. He hated maneuvering inside a gravity well.
"They're—” Banning started.
And they took a hit. A damned bad one. Etric heard the whisper of a hull leak before the alarms went off, but since they were already losing power as well, the alarm didn't last for long. He didn't know how Seaton was keeping the ship up.
"Get me full comp power!” Sharton said. “I have their computer. I can force them down!"
Banning cut weapons and leapt over to help Istanan shunt the little power they had over to him. Crystal and Seaton worked the other board, still somehow maneuvering the little craft in a semicircle that took them away from the dome wall ahead of them. As they circled, Etric could see the smaller IG craft coming toward them, ready to fire again.
"Bastards don't care about the people they're about to kill on the ground,” Tam said.
"Probably consider it a bonus if they can take out the council that's been against them,” Kadrien added. “Got it, Sharton?"
"Yes. Hold that. Keep the pattern changing. Just need to get them down in the port. Don't want them down where they'll do damage."
Etric looked over, startled, and realized that Sharton had taken control of the other ship, piloting it from here. But he wouldn't have that ability for long, not the way the power kept surging through the half-dead boards around him. Their own ship lurched, dropped—but Seaton somehow got control and held them up again.
Rqua stood by Sharton's post, and reached forward, whispering as he fed some power in through the controls. Sharton's hands moved faster. So did Tam's and Kadrien's. The ship shuddered, and Etric thought the air seemed thin—
"They're down!” Banning said. “Seaton, follow them in! Sit down on the bastards, if you have to, but don't let them back up!"
"Yes, ma'am!"
And they went in for a spectacular landing given that the screens all went dead in the last few seconds, and Etric realized that Seaton landed them from a memory of what he had last seen.
Down. Slid a ways—not as bad as through the snow fields, of course. Hit something hard, and he feared they had taken out a building—but they stopped.
Alarms rang feebly until Banning killed the power.
"Remember to pick out the planet you want, Seaton,” Kadrien said.
People laughed and began to move again. Banning shunted power back to a couple of the boards, though communications seemed to be dead, and even Rqua couldn't resurrect the computer boards.
"Looks like some trouble outside with the people from that fighter. They still have power, but they aren't lifting—"
"Can't,” Sharton said. “I wiped that ability from their computers. Was going for weapons, but I couldn't do it fast enough."
"They can't get the ship moved to fire at us,” Banning said. “But I think they're going to come out firing laser pistols. And our engine is unstable. One good laser shot at it and they win after all."
"Caught something,” Crystal said from near the comm equipment that flared momentarily to life and then died again. “Sounds like the Emperor's Guard is coming out to try to take things in control. They're not really certain which side they should be on, except that we had codes the IGs shouldn't, and we appear to have had more concern for those on the ground."
"Good,” Kadrien said. “Once we're out there, I think I can convince them which side they should be on."
He smiled and Tamaris laughed as he stood and stretched. He offered a hand to help Sharton, who looked unsteady. Etric feared that even the cane wasn't going to keep him up this time—but Tam didn't let go.
"I'm getting the door open,” Sand said. The others had started to stand as well, many of them checking weapons, some just looking stunned that they had survived.
No one appeared in much of a hurry to go out. Etric needed that moment to gather his wits again. He looked around at the boards, barely lit by a few flickering lights. Some of them showed scorch marks. Others flickered on and off—especially on the piloting console—in a way that made his stomach do flips in time with his heart.
Banning herded the rest of the control deck crew off toward the corridor, readying them for this next part of the game. Etric couldn't begin to guess what would happen when they stepped out and faced Kadrien's personal guards. He could only hope for the best. But even so—
"Everyone have weapons?” he said as he pressed his way through the group to reach the airlock door. “Make certain you do, even if you don't intend to use them. We need to look strong right now."
"Come on, Kadrien,” Tam said, looking back at his cousin. “Time for the show. It's one you really aren't going to want to miss, not after this build-up."
Kadrien nodded agreement, a little amused, but obviously not in a hurry. Etric could hardly blame him. He watched the Emperor walk toward the door.

Chapter 10

Crystal watched while the others went toward the door, waiting patiently while Sand, and now Banning and Wesna, worked at the lock. He did not press forward to help them. Banning would get the door open. He had faith in her abilities, and her temper.
A sound behind Crystal startled him. He looked back to find Abby sitting with the Janin in a corner. She had started to look angry and sullen again. Crystal could hardly blame her, under the circumstances, watching everyone else going out.
"You could bring her,” Crystal suggested, wondering when he had finally come to accept her as something alive, with the right to feel abandoned.
"It is not safe, Captain Crystal,” Abby said. He did give her a nice pat that seemed to soothe her for some reason. “Not when there will be confrontation and danger. She does not always understand the distinctions between the two, and she can overreact to either. She will be safe here until I come back."
He walked away, Tristan falling in beside him, Tabor to the other side. An odd group, but then again they all were.
"Well, Captain Crystal,” Etric said, putting a hand on his shoulder. “Shall we join our crews in making history?"
"Oh, gods. I hadn't thought of that part. Go ahead without me—I already have that little bit of fame and legend from Silversun. You can have all of this. I don't mind."
Etric laughed and nudged him forward. Crystal wondered why no one ever took him seriously these days.
"I have it, Captain. Captains,” Banning amended as she stood by the door, her hands on the controls.
"Are you ready to go out, Kadrien? Tam?"
Kadrien brushed at his clothing, and then stopped and shrugged. “As ready as I am likely ever to be. Right now, if you said there was only a fifty percent chance that we'd survive a lift, I'd probably opt for it."
Crystal noted that Tamaris looked as though he would have accepted far less than a fifty-fifty chance of survival.
The airlock door slid open with a howl of protest. The air outside rushed in, cool and fresh, reminding Crystal that life support had been stressed. Kadrien and Tamaris tried to step out first. Banning got in front of them, luckily, and ignored Tam's sound of frustration.
Etric and Crystal got out even ahead of them. It wasn't really what he wanted to do—walk out there in front of those men and women with their lovely blue uniforms, and all those shiny laser rifles aimed right at him.
But hell, he'd gone crazy a long time ago. He didn't even miss a step as he and Etric stepped out in front of the soldiers, their crews falling in behind them.
A woman with a lot of gold on her collar and the air of someone who expected things to work stepped forward, her rifle lowered but still ready. “You are not members of the Imperial Guards,” she said. “I don't know who you are, and really I don't care much. I just want to know how you got through the best security system in the Empire. And why."
"They did it at my orders, Commander Fakin.” Kadrien slipped past the two captains before even Tamaris could stop him, though Tam did follow. The woman looked at him—and didn't know him for a moment.
The recognition came in a flutter of blinks before the woman's eyes finally went wide.
"Emperor,” she whispered. “Praise the gods, you are alive, Emperor Kadrien!"
And then she went to her knees, and the rest of her people followed the example with shouts of delight. Crystal saw the little shake of Kadrien's head, the denial before he accepted and sighed. Everything had changed for him in that moment. He did not look back at the others. Crystal thought he might not dare right then to see the friends he would lose for coming back to this place where he ruled.
"I am glad to see you so ably in charge here, Commander Fakin,” Emperor Kadrien said. He gave a signal that brought her to her feet, and the others afterwards. “And I do give you leave to have the crew of the other ship arrested. They knew that I was aboard this craft, and did their best to make certain we did not reach safety."
"Done,” she said. A quick set of signals to her people and an entire group broke off and moved toward the other distant ship. Squinting, Crystal could see that there was more than a little activity at that craft anyway. Well-trained people. And Commander Fakin had gone from shocked to bright smiles. “We feared you were dead, sire. We feared you and the heirs—"
And she stopped, her gaze locked on the person behind Kadrien. “Prince Tamaris!"
He, too, gave a formal bow of his head.
"Is the senate in session?” Kadrien asked. “I heard a great deal about the situation from Senator Sentalin. I would like to meet with them at the earliest moment."
"In fact, they are,” Fakin said, her smile returned. “They sent me to bring the crew of the ship, if I found it expedient and safe to do so. I daresay they'll think it expedient, but looking at your crew, I don't think they're going to feel very safe."
Just a small joke, but it won a smile from Kadrien at last. She must have known how to judge his mood.
The troops began to line up. It looked as though the trouble at the other craft had been handled. No reason not to go with them, though Crystal still looked for one.
"Lead the way, Commander,” Kadrien said. “My friends and I will follow."
"Sire—” She stopped, gave one glance at Crystal and Etric's people, and then nodded. “Yes, of course."
Kadrien reached out and touched her arm, startling her more than his appearance had. “It's not that I don't trust you. But under the circumstances, I think it wise that I keep close to the people I know have not been part of any plots here."
"Yes. You're right,” she said. She even gave a bow of her head to the others. “The palace is clear of all but essential personnel. While I am sure that there will be many who will be as happy as I am to see you back—"
"Yes,” Kadrien said. “No need to spread the word just yet. That would only slow down the business at hand."
She nodded and turned away, giving quick orders to her own people.
These people were subtle in their paranoia, at least. One group of troops moved off ahead of them, and Crystal assumed they went to make certain the path remained clear.
Etric gave orders to their own crews, who moved in around Kadrien, Tam, and even Sharton, though he gave a quiet protest. They must have looked fierce enough, since even Commander Fakin gave them worried looks.
They had a long journey across the port, but they soon reached the edge of the moving walkways that led toward the more distant buildings. He had feared that they would be expected to take aircars, and right now he didn't want to take anything that put them into the air and vulnerable, or that broke the group into smaller numbers.
There were several vehicles parked by the walkway, but when Fakin gestured that way, Kadrien shook his head.
"I didn't think so,” she said. “You always did prefer to take the longer journey."
The walkway moved forward, across a wide and open area, and then into a park, replete with trees, statues, and fountains. Crystal leaned against the railing as they moved, and watched the grounds for signs of life. He thought he saw someone in the distance once. Maybe, in better times, the place would have been popular and busy. Seeing it empty, but so perfectly maintained, gave him a feeling of waste.
When they reached the buildings, the walkway dipped down into an underground corridor, lined with art and pretty—but Crystal had no doubt that they'd built this underground to avoid any chance of assassins in those building windows.
If he stayed here very long, he'd be as paranoid as Kadrien, Tam, and Sharton.
Whispered words carried too far. Crystal found himself unwilling to discuss anything here, and even Etric just looked around with a shake of his head.
The walkway finally angled up, and from the way Kadrien straightened Crystal knew that they had nearly reached the end of the journey. They came up into a large, well-lit room of blues and greens, benches lining the walls, but as empty as everything else. Crystal tried to imagine what it might be like when things were normal here. A good amount of the empire's business passed through these halls, and he suspected that some days a person could not find a seat here.
"Not much farther,” Kadrien suddenly said, sounding half apologetic.
"Pretty place,” Etric said with a wave toward the walls.
Kadrien looked around as they slipped from the walkway to the steady floor. “Yes, it is. All the best that time and money could buy."
Large halls led in all directions. Only one had a sealed door, and Fakin moved ahead to open it. The emperor's private passageway, Crystal realized as they followed the troops into the corridor. The door sealed behind them, and Crystal tried not to worry even more.
Turns and twists—the building seemed a labyrinth of passages. They passed doors everywhere, and he heard sounds behind a few, but no sign of anyone—
Until a single woman stepped out from another corridor. She spoke sharply to Commander Fakin, but Kadrien and Tam had started forward, and the crews of Freedom and Fame followed close behind.
"This behavior is not—"
"It is what I ordered,” Kadrien said.
The woman turned. Jewels, her hair perfect, her clothing immaculate. She stared for a moment, and then, quite unexpectedly, she fainted. Commander Fakin barely had time to catch her.
"You know, that's the best reaction I've ever had from her,” Kadrien said.
Nervous laughter, but even so, it seemed to help again. Guards came to take the woman, carrying her away again. “My mother,” Kadrien explained to the others, really looking amused.
The corridor turned in the next few steps, widened, and opened into a much larger area. Plain blue walls gave way to mosaics and floors inlaid with pretty designs. They even crossed this quickly, though Crystal would have liked to pause a moment and study a few of the knickknacks spread throughout the room.
Banning reached up and rapped him on the top of the head. “Stop being so obvious."
He looked back at her and grinned. “We could make a fortune here."
"You are making the Emperor's Guards nervous."
"I don't think they're really that worried about what I'm going to walk off with,” Crystal said. Fakin gave them odd looks, and then glanced at Prince Tamaris and back at Crystal.
"Yes, he is the smuggler and thief."
"Ah."
"But, unlike a number of people in this building, he's honest about his work,” Sharton added.
Commander Fakin bowed her head toward Crystal. “My apologies. I'm not used to that much honesty."
Tamaris looked amused. Then he brushed at his wild hair and frowned. “Should have stopped by my suite and cleaned up first."
"Oh yes,” Kadrien said. “Seeing you in this state is bound to shock everyone."
Even a couple of the guards laughed this time. Good. Better. The feeling of fear eased. The shock still remained.
They crossed the room to two huge doors hung on hinges, taller and wider than any human. The wood of the surface had been carved into intricate designs, but Crystal didn't have time to really look them over. Too large to carry away, anyway, he thought.
Fakin looked back at Kadrien. The Emperor gave a nod.
Four of Fakin's people pushed the heavy doors open. The guards all stayed outside, while Fakin lead Kadrien and his companions into the famous Great Hall. Crystal had only ever seen this room on news vids. They had never done it justice. The light, color, and sounds swept in around him, along with the absolute fear that they really were about to become very famous. Or infamous, but then he already had that designation.
Someone stood at the end of the room at a lectern that appeared to be made mostly of inlaid jewels. There had been other sounds, but they died down in that moment. Crystal could not guess at the number of people—several hundred at least—who watched them.
"So, Commander Fakin, I assume you got a satisfactory answer from this group?” the man at the dais said.
"As much of one as I was willing to give at this point, Senator Parsons,” Kadrien said as he stepped past the commander.
Silence. Shock—and then the man looked so pleased that Crystal grinned again. It was a good show. He would rather have been in the audience than a part of the stage, but it was still interesting to be here.
"Emperor Kadrien,” Parsons said. He stepped down from the dais. “Sire."
And he knelt. Crystal knew that the senators were not required to kneel before the emperor—a privilege of their rank. The movement spread throughout the room, and Kadrien looked around quite shocked.
"No, no. Get up. I'm still the same person, you know. Up. We need to talk."
Parsons seemed to have trouble standing, and nodded thanks to Fakin when she helped him. Kadrien went past, a hand on the man's shoulder, nodding his thanks. And again, that touch won a look of shocked pleasure.
Kadrien crossed to the lectern and leaned against it, looking around the room. A change came over him in that moment. A mask slipped into place as he gave a gracious nod to the others, signaling them back to their seats.
"Senator Parsons, I would like a quick report. No details, just an outline of what's happened while I was gone."
Crystal tilted his head, realizing that Kadrien had just taken control, and that it had seemed to come naturally to him. Kadrien listened as Parsons ran through some quick facts and figures, nodding and asking questions that meant nothing at all to Crystal. He had never considered it until now, but quite obviously Kadrien had been born to this work. He was very good at it.
Tamaris watched Kadrien as well, and didn't look pleased at all to see the change. Crystal couldn't blame him. It felt as though they had lost their friend in those last few steps.
"And the matter with the Imperial Guards?” Kadrien asked. That drew Crystal's wandering attention back. “Commander Fakin?"
"We knew they were starting to create problems,” Fakin said. Kadrien nodded. “Your disappearance seemed to be a catalyst for further developments. Although no one had given out such a report, it seems that many people assumed that the Imperial Guard had been responsible for your disappearance. As word spread, they found themselves increasingly unpopular. The governments of more than one hundred worlds, including all seventy-six with large encampments, stepped in to disband the troops. In most cases, it happened so quickly that the IGs found themselves disarmed before they could cause any major problems."
"We are still, obviously, plagued by the fleet, however,” Parsons said. “Word has gotten to us that a united fleet from several worlds is on the way to take that matter in hand as well. We thought, in fact, that you must be part of that group."
"Things appear to be well in hand,” Kadrien said. He looked quite pleased. “I had feared taking on the Imperial Guard would cause far more trouble, and had held my hand for years. I didn't want a rebellion, and war."
"It was the belief that they had killed you that spurred the others into action, sire,” Parsons said. He must have seen the look that bordered on denial in Kadrien's face. “It is true, Emperor Kadrien. They did it for you."
"I am grateful that they should care enough to take such drastic actions,” Kadrien said, a note of disbelief in his voice still. “I cannot be more than just a name to them, after all."
"You misjudge the effect your hand has had on this empire,” Fakin said. “You don't understand how much everyone appreciates that you are not your father."
"I wasn't entirely certain anyone had noticed,” Kadrien said.
Dismay. Crystal saw it in their faces, and heard it in a whisper of sound around the room. At least they knew, now, what they had done to Kadrien.
"Is the Imperial Star still in bay and undamaged?” Kadrien asked, the mask back in place.
"Yes, sire,” Commander Fakin said softly.
"Excellent. Captain Etric, Captain Crystal—I give the ship to you. It's larger than you're used to, I'm sure, but you have crew enough to handle her."
"We can't accept—” Etric began.
"You need a big ship. A single, powerful ship,” Kadrien said. “In this next journey, you don't want to have two ships and risk being separated. I'll have her officially renamed Freedom and Fame."
Crystal had started to protest as well, but Kadrien had thought that part through better than they had. They did need a single ship. And one given to them—
"Well, I suppose it does save us from having to go out and find yet another Imperial Guard ship to steal,” Crystal said.
"Thank you Ka—Emperor Kadrien,” Etric said, with a bow of his head.
He looked so pleased when they accepted the gift that Crystal couldn't feel badly about it. And, quite honestly, he knew that the emperor had funds enough for such an extravagant gesture. It pleased their friend—though he did wonder how large a craft they suddenly owned.
Kadrien leaned forward again and looked around the room. People fell silent, waiting for whatever words Kadrien would give them.
"You have done an exceptional job. I am very pleased with how well the senate has handled matters in my absence. I have worked with you for many years now, from those first few troubled days after my father's sudden death, to the later ones where I often went for an entire week without feeling the need to sit here in council and guide you. And you knew that I trusted you, didn't you?"
Parsons nodded and bowed his head. He looked pleased.
"I have been training you for taking control from the day I first stepped into this council,” Kadrien said. He looked around the room. “I have pushed and led and cajoled you into taking command of matters that had formerly been only in the hands of the emperor and his personal staff. I always knew that you were doing well, and that you were ready for more responsibility. I don't think you realized it until you could no longer rely on my occasional nod to keep you moving."
Parsons looked startled, but he nodded as well. “You are kind, Emperor. We have always been pleased to help you."
"No. Not help me,” he said. He looked at Parsons. “To rule on your own. And now that you are ready, it is time that I leave and let you do your work. I will be going with my friends when they take the ship."
Voices rose in protest—that had probably not happened in generations of emperors. Even Etric stepped forward, shaking his head in dismay.
"You can't give all of this up!” Etric said, his voice rising even above that of Senator Parsons.
"The hell he can't,” Crystal said. He pushed past Etric and stood before Kadrien, looking up at the man about to give up the most important position in the Empire. “I'll take you as crew, Kadrien."
Crystal wasn't sure if it was the offer of taking him as crew or the casual use of his name that brought the protests again. Kadrien grinned with delight, and Tamaris dropped a hand on Crystal's shoulder, an unusual and slightly startling show of approval.
Voices rose all around them still. No matter. Crystal looked back at Banning and gave a lift of his head. She nodded. They would be taking Kadrien with them when they left. Etric must have seen the signal. He shook his head in dismay, but then he started to smile. His own signal went to his people. Fakin had seen both. She looked amused. Maybe she didn't think they would be much of a problem for her Guards, but he rather thought they might surprise her, if it came to it.
Senators had gotten to their feet, and the voices rose in a cacophony of sound that got a wince even from Abby.
"Silence!” Kadrien shouted.
And they fell to instant shocked silence, so quiet that he could hear several people catching their breath.
Etric came to stand beside Crystal. He smiled. “And this man is going to be your crew. Good luck."
"Don't get too cocky. We're all going in the same ship now."
Etric nodded, looking a little worried as he glanced back up at Kadrien again. “Are you certain this is what you want to do? There are no guarantees at all on this journey. We're not even certain it will work."
"I know.” Kadrien stepped down from the dais. It seemed a symbolic moment, giving up the rule to stand down on the floor with the rest of them. “But I was there when the goddess came, Etric. I joined the rest of you in that moment when we gave a gift and accepted the payment."
"Oh,” Etric said, a little startled. “I hadn't considered—"
"I wouldn't have gone if I had come back to find chaos here. But now that I'm certain these people can handle the work without me, there is nothing to hold me here. I want to go somewhere where... I might help again."
This time Etric nodded in agreement. Parsons seemed to have accepted what he saw here, even if he didn't fully understand the repercussions of the journey they were about to make.
"Will you be back?” Senator Parsons asked softly.
"I can't say,” he answered. “And I should add that Prince Tamaris will be going with us as well. You don't need us, Senator."
"This has nothing to do with need, Emperor Kadrien,” Parsons said. And he did something quite unexpected. He put his hand on the Emperor's arm and looked into his face, ignoring even Tam's sudden movement—aborted before the knife came to his hand. “We are pleased to find you alive, you know. You have taught us to be nobility again, which was no easy task after your father's rule."
"We all had much to learn after my father's death."
"Yes,” Senator Parsons said. And then he did something Crystal hadn't expected at all. Senator Parsons looked at Prince Tamaris. “Thank you for freeing us from that evil."
Oh hell. How long had they known? No one there looked very surprised. Tam had started to back away, but he stopped and looked around. He appeared as stunned as Crystal had ever seen him.
Senator Parsons turned back to Kadrien, though. “We would willingly serve you if you stay,” he said. “And we will serve you even if you are not here. This will still be your throne, no matter where you go. But... what happened, sire? You look as though you've been to hell and back."
"No,” Kadrien said. “Not there. Not yet."

Chapter 11

Abby stood at the edge of the hall and looked one way and the other. He would never get used to a ship this large. It might rival the size of the castle Sandwind. And he certainly still had trouble finding his way through what seemed to be a maze of halls, corridors, lounges, suites...
They now lived in a village put into space. Even the crews seemed to feel a little overwhelmed by the sheer magnitude of the ship, though they seemed to be doing well in getting it ready for the journey.
The Freedom and Fame still sat in orbit over Grant, close by the large golden moon. Tristan and he sat for hours before the huge screens, watching the world and the moon, so beautiful against the dark of endless night. He would never tire of the view.
Abby still feared what would happen with his friend once they began to travel again, away from the magic of the moon. He feared this journey for very many reasons—but nothing remained to hold them here. News had come just within the last hours: the last contingent of rogue Imperial Guards had finally been forced into surrender on Silversun.
Sand, Navic, and Wesna would not be going with them. Sand had been given a craft of her own and could leave to go where she pleased... though Kadrien suggested that if she couldn't stay out of trouble, she at least learn to run faster.
Those words had shocked and pleased her. She'd bid farewell to Seaton and the rest of them at a dinner last night, and left with what seemed to be a little more haste than necessary. Though perhaps that retreat came from wisdom the rest of them lacked.
Abby wondered if perhaps Sand and her people hadn't been the only sane ones left among the people he knew. The others still acted as though they thought it right and proper that they all go with him to hell.
They listened to him explain about the demons. They even listened to Tabor explain; he didn't seem much more inclined to take them to his father's realm than Abby. They never showed a moment's pause in their resolve. They would be going to hell with him. They would fight the final battle and they would—
They would win. He had powerful friends willing to fight to save others from the rule of the demons. They would help Abby fight the demon to make certain that Gix did not get all of the Kiya in his hands.
And they would be going soon. He did not want to take them to his war. He didn't want to take his friends to hell with him—
Calm, Tristan whispered, a gentle touch there in his mind. Be calm and accept it. They made their choices.
I do not want to see them hurt. Or worse. Gix is powerful—
They know what they face, Abby. They've always known it, just as you and I have. Stop thinking that they are coming for you. They are coming to fight the battle that must be won to set things right again, more so for them than for you and me.
He felt a little surprise by that one. Had he thought they were coming into this battle just for him? When had he gotten that egotistical?
Not that, Tristan replied. He could hear the laughter in his friend's thoughts. We just had to leave them behind so often that you always thought the war was yours to fight, and no one else's. But it never was, you know. It was just that there was no way for them to come with us before.
He still didn't think it a good idea, but he had no choice. They would come along. He stood there in the corridor for a moment longer, trying to decide which way to go—or even where he wanted to go. Had he come out here just to find some friends?
And one happened along—or maybe not happened. Istanan smiled when he saw Abby.
"There you are. We weren't certain where you might be, and Crystal is still working on the in-ship comm so that it doesn't need codes to run. Anyway, you and Tristan are wanted down in the engineering computer room."
"I have no idea where that might be,” Abby admitted.
"Don't worry. We all get lost,” Istanan said. He started to step forward, then shook his head and turned around. “This way. I think. We'll get there eventually. Should we find Tristan first?"
"No. He'll find us.” Abby touched the crown. “He's on his way."
"Good.” Istanan took a dozen steps, his cane clicking on the floor. “Nice ship. And I do appreciate that the rest of you don't mind having the gravity set a little light. It makes a big difference to me."
"It feels good,” Abby admitted. “Istanan, can I ask you something?"
"Certainly."
"Why are you going on this journey with us? What are you hoping to gain?"
"Gain?” Istanan said. He stopped at a lift, pressing a button and waiting for it to open. “Do we have to gain something? Isn't it enough to do what's right?"
"You and the rest of Crystal's crew are smugglers,” Abby said, slipping inside as the door opened.
"Yes,” he said. “Did we look like rich smugglers to you? With Crystal and Banning in charge, we could have made our fortunes several times over. We choose... other work. We most often ran items to worlds that needed them, not to people who could pay us well."
"Ah,” Abby said. He felt like he might actually understand, as they walked out of the lift and down the corridor. They had, truly, all been called in their own way.
Exactly, Tristan said. Almost there.
They'd gone down another hall, around another curve. Rqua waved as he went past in the other direction, mumbling something about Crystal needing to hire a messenger service or keep his hands off the comm system. Istanan laughed. There would be no trouble between the two crews, at least. And no one questioned who captained the ship—it was Crystal and Etric.
"I've seen smaller villages,” Abby finally said aloud.
"I've never seen a ship this large. Do you know, there is enough storage to stock supplies for years. I can't imagine why they thought an emperor needed a craft like this, but I'm glad to have it. We don't know where we'll go or how long it may take us. It's good to know that we won't have to forage along the way.
At last, a good reason for this ship, Abby thought. He felt better about it. As they reached the door, Istanan looked back, startled at the sound of running feet.
"Tristan,” Abby said. “Istanan—thank you. I try to understand why all of you are rushing into this trouble with me, and it's not easy. I try to see it from the eyes of someone who was given a choice."
"You have Tristan,” Istanan said.
"Yes,” Tristan said, coming to a gasping stop. “But he obviously doesn't listen to me any more. What's going on?"
Istanan had opened the door. Banning, Tam, and Tabor were busy at work with one board, and Kadrien sat at another one, keying in information as they gave it to him. It was good to see Kadrien working with them. He had already started to fit in. Good to have him free of that prison, even if it had been a very pretty one.
"You're here. Good,” Banning said, pushing away from the spot where they'd been working. The other two continued, Tabor seeming to understand this arcane magic of computers and power grids that they spoke about now and then. It amazed Abby. He wondered if he could learn as well.
"We thought you'd like a demonstration,” Tabor said. He hit some keys and a large screen came on. “We're using a probe to push through the field we've created. It took a few tries—but Banning thought it might be wise to send something ahead of us, rather than take the ship out first thing and hope for the best."
Abby should have realized Banning would be so practical. He nodded his gratitude to her. She gave a little shrug.
"I like to survive,” she said. “But let me explain about what we've done. The Kiya is intelligent. She remembers where she's been, and holds that memory like a link to her other pieces. It's the power that you and Tristan have tapped to draw you from place to place, and it is what affected us when we crashed the ship on Grant. That piece of the Kiya was the last before the head, and she tried to draw herself to it by tapping into a very dangerous power source."
"Which you intend to do as well,” Abby said.
"Oh yes. But I know it's dangerous, and I understand what it can do,” she said. “I've taken what precautions I can. This is the work I have always done, Abby. That's not the part you need to worry about."
"We have safety measures in place,” Tabor said, waving toward the computers. “Both engineering and magical. We're using the piece of the Kiya I borrowed from Tristan the other day, and the probe and link should be reaching its destination at any moment. We'll see where that one has been."
"It won't show us Gix's domain?” Tristan said.
"Not this time. This time we're tapping memory, rather than drive,” Tabor said. “It took us a while to sort that out, but once Banning isolated the differences, it's been very easy. Where it's been, rather than where it wants to go. I think it should work—"
"Image coming up,” Tam warned. “I think we have it!"
Abby looked up at the screen, blinking, while lines resolved into liquid blue. Water. And then the image turned a little as Kadrien manipulated the controls, shifting around until—
A cliff over looking the ocean, a palace to one side, and a beautiful tree of glass flowers and light.
"Dacey's work,” Tristan said and smiled. “Dacey giving magic to his world."
Abby smiled as well, watching the people walk by the tree, none of them staring at it with fear. He thought he might even have seen Tain for a moment, standing by the palace gate.
"I've got the reading,” Kadrien said. “As far as I can tell, about three days’ journey."
"Journey?” Abby said, startled enough to look away again.
"We could go there,” Banning said. She put a hand on his arm. He didn't know how to take those words. “Three days in slide-like conditions, Abby."
"Etric is working on captured moonlight for Tristan,” Tabor said as well. He grinned, looking young and happy. “Is there a reason we have to go straight to Gix?"
"I don't know,” Abby said. He looked back at the screen. He wanted to go there, but—
"I have a secondary reading,” Tam said. “I think we can shift the probe again, and it should move quickly this time. Shall we try it?"
"Best to get as many readings as we can,” Banning agreed. “Do you have the computer coordinates in for this one?"
"Got it,” Kadrien said.
"Then shift, Tam,” Banning said.
Abby didn't want to let go of Dacey's world again. Lucky that they didn't see him right then, or he might have protested letting go. The others went back to work, and the image changed. He felt even Tristan's momentary loss. But they said nothing at all.
"Almost there,” Tam said. “Stronger signal this time, in fact. There."
"Got it,” Kadrien said. “Yes, much stronger—"
Green this time, resolving slowly into trees. Kadrien mumbled something, changed the perspective, pulled back.
"Ishan,” Tristan whispered.
Tabor looked up, startled. He moved away from the controls, stunned as the three of them looked at a place so far in their past that Abby hadn't thought he would feel the pull of that world. But he did, and for all this own reasons.
"Abby?” Banning said.
"Ishan. Ylant,” he said. The accent of his words had changed. He wondered if the others realized how close to home he felt right then. “That's the world where the three of us were born."
He saw Tam look up at the screen, stare for a moment, and then go back to work. Kadrien did as well.
"I've got the coordinates,” Kadrien said. “They're locked in. I think one of us should warn the captains that we're about to start our journey."
"Start?” Tabor said, looking at him, and then back at the screen.
"A test run,” Banning said. “We're going to your world first. I trust you are not going to protest."
"Going home?” Tristan said.
"Four days’ journey,” Kadrien said. “Engines are ready to engage."
Banning went over to the comm equipment, and then shook her head. “Istanan, would you be kind enough to go tell Crystal to stop playing with the comm system? We're going to be leaving within the hour, and if he doesn't have it fixed, I'll come up there and fix it for him."
Istanan grinned and slipped back out the door.
Abby looked back at the screen. Home. They had never thought they would go home again.

Epilogue

They'd traveled away from Grant, out to a place where leaving would not have any effect on the world. Abby worried about the problems caused by something the size of the ship taking the path he and Tristan usually traveled, considering the havoc they usually left behind in wild winds and storms. He worried, in fact, about the reaction when they arrived as well, but hoped that they could ease into the reality far enough out from the world that it would not be a problem.
The world. Ylant. Home.
He, Tristan, and Tabor stood on the control deck—a room larger than the deck and hall of the IG fighter they had taken from Palin—and watched as the others prepared the last steps before they tried something... insane. They ran through the sequences and rechecked the data. Abby wondered if magic really could be understood and controlled by numbers. Then he considered this group, and realized that they would likely learn how to do it and a lot more before their work was done.
He had not tried to stop them in the end. In the last moment, before Etric and Crystal ordered the ship on the journey, he had silenced the thought of a final protest.
And the ship had shifted—away from the empty place filled with space and bright stars, and into a place that Abby knew all too well. He felt relief when he saw the familiar swirl of colors and felt Tristan, who had been tired despite Etric's help, suddenly lift his head and smile.
"This is right,” Tristan said, his hand up and feeling the change around them. “This is where Abby and I travel with the Kiya."
"Good,” Etric said. He looked very pleased. “Seaton? Banning?"
"No problems,” Seaton said. Abby saw the way his shoulders relaxed. “It's actually a far steadier path than a normal slide jump. Unless there are anomalies that haven't shown up yet, I can't see that this would be a problem."
"The only time we ever had a real problem was when Gix tried to stop us,” Tristan said. He smiled. “I don't think he'd dare such a thing this time, against this behemoth of a ship."
"There's a lot of magic out there,” Etric said, reaching much the way Tristan had a moment before. “I've never felt anything quite so pure. That should help Tristan."
"Oh yes,” Tristan said. “The first time we took this journey I was so enamored of that magic that I nearly lost myself in it. It was only Abby that held me in place."
"Good warning,” Tabor said. He lowered his arm, but looked reluctant to do so. “The way I traveled was not quite as pleasant, but then it was my father's path, so that's not a surprise."
"We're on our way,” Crystal said. He laughed. “Well, at least it's not a trip to hell yet. Let's make the best of it."
Celebrate, Tristan thought, but the word seemed alien to him.
The first day of the journey had been difficult. Abby expected things to go wrong. They had a little trouble with the power link, but fixed it before anything serious happened. And they kept going. Abby rested through most of day two, determined to stay out of the way.
But by day three he had begun to feel the edge of excitement that he'd feared to allow himself until now. Abby sat in the room he shared with Tristan and tried to imagine what it would be like to stand on Ylant again, and to walk the woods of Ishan with his friend. He could not believe that it would happen, even now. Almost there. He thought he could feel the pull in his bones.
His friends gave them this gift. He'd stopped wondering why, or what it would cost them, later. Sometimes it was enough to do something, and not always look at the price of choices.
Peace. They would find a little peace before they went on to hell. And, in a way, it was good to go back to the beginning, and to remember the world he first fought to save.
Ylant was only another step away...

The End

Visit double-dragon-ebooks.com for information on additional titles by this and other authors.